Академический Документы
Профессиональный Документы
Культура Документы
and Maintenance
Manual
MCI% Camp Lejeune
Groundwater
Treatment
System
Volume
V of VII
Submitted to:
DEPARTMENT
Contract
OF THE
NAVY
No. N62470-93-D-3032
Submitted by:
= &B.
-B
\
=
OHM Remediation
Services Corp.
A Subaldiary
ol OHhl
CorporalIon
November
1996
VOLUME
~IISCELLANEOUS
AND BUILDING
EQUIPMENT
TABLE
Volume
1.0
OF CONTE?JTS
I
........................................
SYSTEM OPERXTfONS
.................................
Genenil
Process
Desaiption
1.1
1.1.1 Shailow Groundwater Influent Row and
hn Removal System .................................
1.1.2 Deep Groundwater Irduent r;_ow .......................
......................................
1.1.3 Airstipping
...............
1.1.4 CarMdge F!kration and GXC Adsor$on
1.1-S Treded &Lent Storage and D&.barge .................
............................
1.2
opemtig
Restart
1.2.1 Pr+Skzq!
Ch&&c
: : : : ............................
1.2.2 Security and Site Access .............................
1.2.3 Heaith and Safety ..................................
1.2.4 Key Contacts and Site Personnel .......................
1.2.5 Equipment Labe!s ...................................
.................................
1.2.6 BaselineReadings..
Groundwater Treatment System Stvtuu .......................
1.3
Introduction and Prose
... .-. .......................
1.3.1
1.3.2 GamMartupSe~u;?nce
.............................
rnitistartup
......................................
1.33
1.3.3.1Motor Rotation ...............................
1.3.3.2Turn On Pump Seal Water ......................
1.3.3.3To Initite Siiow
AcuZer Muent now ...........
.....................
1.3.3.4titite
Metals Precipikon
1.3.3.5hifAate Dee? AFtz
hfhent Row ...............
1.3.3.6Xow Equakzation in Groundwater Storage Tank ....
1.3.3.7.k Stiuoer, edge
Fiiter, and Carbon
Absorb& Feed Prenaration .. .... ................
1.3.3.8T0 Begin be EOW &korn T-110 to Ah StippE,
CYtr;,dge
FiIters and Carbon .U.sorbers ....................
1.3.4 Normal Siiut Down .................................
1.3.4.1 Normal Shut Down - Cas2 1
......................
CMaintain Tanks I+&fuU
...
l.3.4.2,iorinai Skit Dowl - case 2 (Mainti
Tanks
Fuu
1.3.4.3Nornal
Shut Down - Case 3 (Maintain
Tanks at Low
Level) ......................................
1.3.5 Post Shutdown Procedures ...........................
1.3.6 Miscellaneous Eqyuioment Star?23 and Snut Down .........
1.3.6.lStar?un and Shut Down 0; Siudge Rump to T-140 ...
1.3.6.2Startu$ and Shut Down or Z&r Press o(-140) ......
1.3.6.3Siudge i?zzy& ................................
.s
1.3.6.4Bac.kash GXC Carbon Adsorber ..............
1.3.6.5Ba&wash Water to X-130 .......................
1.3.6.6Transfer Water &on jmo
T-02.9 .................
1.3.6.7Transfer Water from j=i
i-115 .................
.,......
.... .-. ...............
1.4
Normal Operations and Contois
.................................
1.4.1 Normal Opemions
1-4-2 Instrumentation and Controi System ....................
:::
I-l
1-l
l-10
I-10
l-10
l-10
l-10
l-10
l-12
l-12
l-26
1-26
l-27
l-27
1-27
l-29
l-29
l-29
l-30
l-30
l-31
l-32
l-32
l-33
1-34
l-34
l-33
l-36
l-37
l-37
l-37
l-38
l-39
l-40
l-31
l-42
l-42
l-43
l-43
1-U
TABLE OF CONTEXTS
1.4.3
1.5
1.6
- CONTINUED
Grotidwater
Extraction Svstem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45
1.4.3-f Shallow Groundwater Extraction System (Dwg P-3) . . l-50
l.4.3.2Deq
Aquifer Extraction Systscn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-52
f-4.4 IronRemovaISystez
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-53
1.4.4.11Mi.x Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-53
1.4.4.2CWiier
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-35
1.4.4.3SIudge ihickener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-56
1.4.4.4SludgeDewatetigPress..
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . f-56
1.4.4.5Head Tank.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-56
1.4.4.6ChemidStorage..
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-p
1.4.5 Groundwater Storage and Feed System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I- 38
1.4.5.1 Groundwater Storage i&c and Feed System . . . . . . . 1-58
1.4.5.ZGtoundwater
Storage and
Feed System Instrumentation and Control . . . . . . . . . . l-58
1.4.5.3ChemicaLStorage..
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-60
1.4.6 Airstip~ingsystem
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..*.*........
l-&O
1.4.6.1&r Stripper Column and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-60
1.4.6.2-m Stripper System Instrumentation and Control . . . . l-61
1.4.7 Liquid Granular Activated Carbon (GAC) Adsorber System . l-62
1.4.7.lCatidge
Fiiters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-62
1.4.7.2GXC Adsorbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-63
1.4.8 Efifiuent Storage and Discharge System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-63
1.4.8-1Elrlue~1t Storage iti
and Discharge Equ.@ment . . . . . l-63
1.4.8.2Ef1%~nt Storage Tank and Discharge
Instrumentation and Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-64
1.4.9 Secondaryand Utity Systems . . . . . ..f................
l-65
1.4.9.1Backwash WaterHoidingTank
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-65
1.4.9.2Compressed .%r System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-66
1.4.9.3 Building Drainage System and Containment Sump . . . l-6 6
1.4.9.4Sanitary Bump Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-67
Emergency Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-67
1.5.1 Equ$ment Mait%nc~on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-67
1.5.i.lPumr: Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-67
1.5.1.2ti
jciDDe,
Biower Faihu? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-68
1.5.1.3 Water i&k Faiiuie . . . . . . .
1-63
1.5.1.4GXC Carbon Fiiter ,MaVcL2cYon : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : l-68
1.5.1.5Carmdge Filter.Malfunct;,on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-69
1.5.1.6Automatic Flow Control V&e ~Malfunction
1-69
1.5.1.7CausticTankFailure
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ::::::::
l-69
1.5.1.8Add lank Fa&re . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-70
1.5.1.9Air Cxnpresor
Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-70
1.5.2 Eaergerq
Snutdown Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-70
1.5.3 Guidance on Emergency OperaEcns ofUtiiiP~System.s
. - - . . l-70
1.5.3.1Power Faiiure . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -. . . . . . . . . .;l-70
1.5.3.2Potabie Water Faailure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - . . . . . . - . . . l-71
1.5.3.3NaturalGas
ia&re . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - - . . . . . . . . - l-71
1.5.3.4Comoressed .%r Ftiure
1-71
Q$d~AIarmsand.~utodialer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-72
hLuNnYhVCE
AND TROUBLESHOOTING
.....................
Introduction
.......................................
i.1
2.2
Opemtor Service Requirements ...............................
.......................................
2.3
Troubleshooting
2.4
Endronmental conditions ...................................
l?reventiveMaintenance
.....................................
3
z5
Cormdive Maintenance .....................................
2.7
Troubleshootig
Guides and Diagnostic Techniques ..............
Wiring Diagrams and Control Diagrams .......................
2.5
..- ;-:
2-l
2-f
2-S
2-3
2-3
2-13
2-13
3.0
SAPETY PRECALiiONS
AND STANDARD
......................................
OPEXATING
PROCEDURES
3.1
Introduction
.......................................
Material Safety Data Sheets .................................
:::
Health and Safety Standard Operating Procedures ...............
3-l
3-l
3-l
3-l
PERPORMANCE
SAiiPLING AND MONITORING
...................
.................................
4.1
Introduction
SampiingProcedures
1:::::.
................................
4.2
Quality
~.~surance/Quaiity
Control
(QA/QC) Samples ...........
4.3
Q-1
4-l
4-4
4-5
4.0
TABLES
Table 1.1
Table 1.21
Tabie 1.22
Table 1.23
Table 1.24
Table 1.2.3
Table 1.4.1
Table 1.A2
Tabie 1.4.3
Table 21
Tabk w +73
T&la.c 3-42
Table 24
Tabie 25
Table 25
Table 27
Tabie 16.1
Tabie 4.1
Tabie 4.2
Table 4.3
Tabie 4.1
P
f
TABLE OF COmANTS
APPENDICES
Appendix A
Appendix
- CONTNUED
VolumeII:
I Table of Contents
II Major Equipment List and Contact List
IU EquipmentManuals
- A. Air stripper (C-200), strioper Blower (D-2lO)
B. Grtridge FiZters (F-z0 i/B/C)
C. Carbon Filters (X-229 -A/B)
D. Lam&i @arifier (X-131)
VoIumeIzI:
I TabkofConte?ts
II Major Equipment List and Contact List
III EquipmentManuals
E. Plate Filter Press E-140)
Rdigexated Compressed Air Dryer o(-15OC)
Air Compressor Oc-1.50A/B)
H: PumpsAir stripper feed pump (P-110 .A,B), Section 1
Sump pump (P-025 & P-O2sX), Section 2
Containment area sump pumu (P-1151, Section 2
Jet mixing pum,p & system (Pcl201, Section 3
Caustic feed pumu (P-121), Section 4
Sludge biowdok
Dumn (P-l&>, Section 5
Supexnatant tiansiir p&u (P-2451, Section I
Spent backwash water p&o Cp-2051, Section 6
Acid feed pumps a?-211, P-iI21, Section 4
well pumps (r-100, P-102, P-104, P-300, P-302,
P-304, P-101, P-103, P-10.5, P-3011, Section 7
BacIxash water pump (P-2411, Section 1
Reuse water pump p-2451, Section 6
GXC adsorbet fe& uumus (P-220 X/S), Section I
Filter Tress feed PI+ PA-14i), see section on Fiiter
Pie%
Appendix
Meti scavenger/coag&nt
purchased
pump Cc-i32-11, to be
Volume Iv:
I Table of Contents
DI Major Equipment List and Contact List
Iii Ec&xnentManu&
L Tanks-
----3-inkcr-i-G,=e-%i3
I:
Head tank (T-145). Section 4 -Backwash water h&ding t&k (T-2051, Sectio n5
Add storage tank (T-2111, Section 6
Stripper effiuezt holding &nk (T-2201, refer to
section on air strioper
Treated effiuent hoi&g tank (T-2401, Se&on 5
Mix tank (x-130) & air diffusers, Section 7
Liquid Polymer Feed System N-132)
1
w
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ic.
L.
iYf.
N.
0.
- CONTINUED
Mixer (A-130)
Control and Computer System
Control Instrumentations
Control Cabinet/Panel & Wiring Diagrams
Metering manhole, ParshaIl Flume & Ulbasonic
Meter
Row
Appendix
D Volume V:
I Table of Contents
II Major Equipment List and Contact List
III Equipment Manuals - Miscellaneous and building equipment
D -Transformer
Well Houses
Roll UD Doors
Room kir Conditioning Unit
Bathroom Fixtures
Water Heater
Roof Fans and Exhaust Fans
Building Gas Heaters
Ventilation Louvers
Roof Insulation
Autodialer
AkMhxllaneous
Electrical Equipment
Appendix
E VolumeVIz
I Table of Contents
II Programmable Logic Controller (PLC> System and Instrumentation
A. List of Contractor/Subcontractors/Manufacturers/
suppliers
B. Operation and Maintenance Manual for Programmable
Logic Controller (PLC) System
C. Logic Tables
D. Series 90-70 Programmable Controller Reference Manual
E. Logicmaster 90, Series 90-30/20 Micro Programming
Software Useis Manual
Appendix
Volume VII:
I Table of Contents
II Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) System and Instrumentation
c Cimplicity MM for Windows NT, Cimplicity MM1 for
Windows 95, Cimplidty Senrer for W&do\& NT, Device
Communication Manual
G. TCP/Il? Ethernet Communications for the Series 90-70
PLC Useis Manual
Operation and Maintenance Manual for PC Wor&tation
:' Operation and Maintenance Manual for Instrumentation
J- SM 3000 Smart Meter Useis Manual (34ST-25-08C
05/95)
K. ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Series 1OOEand Series 900 and
SFC Smart Field Communicator Model STS 103
Installation Guide (34ST-3331A 08/95)
I.
APPENDIX
TRANSFORMER
and QL
Type QL,
25 kVA-167 kVA,
Type ML
Type QB,
Type
single-phase
-VdtageTTap
General tnformation
The comolete family of transformers
reliabie transformer operation.
i:fi
I
from GE provide
singls-phase
15 kVA-1500
three-phase
QMS,
5 kVA-25 kVA,
3kVA-15
kVA
three-phase
auiet,
kVA,
Arrangement
Temperature
Class
systems in accordance
Construction
Types OS, ML and QMS
Core and coils are contained within a NEMA 3R nonventilated
weatherproof
enclosure. Type QB and QMS units feature
encapsulated
core and coils.
Type QL
Units are enclosed in a NEMA 2 drip-proof metal enclosure with
natural-draft ventilation. Core-and-coil
assembly is mounted on
rubber isolation pads to reduce noise. Weathershield
kits are
available for conversion to a NEMA 3R enclosure suitable for
outdoor service.
How to Select
l
l
,-
l
l
hWiqS
to change without
nQtica
Termination
improved termination spacing ant wiring comoanment
room
gives greater flexibility in selecting various UL isted 2onnec:ors
for either copper or aluminum cable. A iisting of suitabie
connectors is packaged with each QE rransformer.
I
I
/ DEM - 1002
GE Speciafiy Transformers
and QL
Sound Levels
purpose
o-9
lo-50
51.150
!5 i-300
301-500
Weathershield
Single-phase
.0.50-25
I
25
37.550
' Stancarc
I
on aI, 05 and CM
9T18Y5W2
9T18Y5043
Three-phase
Standard on all ML u"Rs
9T18Y5042
9T78Y5043
me
Three-Phase
i5
30. 15. 50
3 ! :2.5
150
225
300
400. 500
?':*"j3'iJ:
3T:.sYC3:7C35
9i!SY43:7006
msv4317G07
3TlBY43:iG08
9T!SYL3i7G09
9TlW4317G70
DEM - 1006
I
@
GE Speciahy Transformers
I Dry TypeGeneralPurposeTransformers
DimensionS
and Weights
a
\
Type QB
Single-phase,
Type
Type Ql
Type QMS
ML
f
6
6
6
10
1G
16
25
rc25
i"o
1)fpe QL-Three-phase,
16-1000
19
Type QMS-Singkphase,
SO
75
112.5
I-
2
ml
400
500
750
low
40
46
48
51%
3
76
76
$l
24
32
32
kVA, 60 Hertz
16%6
ltl'h
1avq6
76%6
23%
23'%s
23"is
ZS'%a
30%
47%
47%
zi
i
i
1
185
275
325
'
2uo
3!IQ
360
i370
1535
4300
--
'
DEM - 1007
GE Speciahy Transfutmers
I/
olagan;
24
Degram
25
DEM
- 1018
GE Specialty
Transformers
p 0~ TypeGeneralPurposeTransformers
LO& TemperatureRise
Description
Application
Single-phase
Indoor@, Type QL, 60 Hertz
UL Listed
{,fi,
i
catalog
Number
XVA
116C Rise
i5
3.5
50
75.
1100
I
I
'
80-C Rise
15
1
9T23L2670
QT23L2677
ST23L2672
QT23L2673
9T23L2674
ST23L2675
16%
20%
207
221,;
$?k
37%
38%
aa!!?
5 11
::
. 9T23L3670
E5.
9T23L3672
ST23L3670081
:5".
100
9T23L3673
9T2313674
9TZ3L3675
D
3&a
;?;
22:;
%:l
26'k
:;
:2:;
285
:
4
4
1:30
1130
Three-phase
Indoor@, Type QL, 60 Hertz
;g
L
UL Listed.
CSA Certified
480 votk Dena Ptimaty
Secmdary208Y1120Volk
115C Rise
50
75
712
150
225
300
400
SW
80% Rise
525
465
465
64x
1030
1030
:%z
3450
Drawingsanddatasubieci
to chmge
&boat
neticc
Tap Arrangement:
6-(6) 272% taps: 2 above and 4 below rated onmary
voltage
A500 kVA has (2) 3.1% primary
taps aoove ant! oelow rated
voltage.
Consult Factory
for outdoor
NEMA 3R enclosure.
j
f
DEM - 1040
0
@
GE Specialty Transformers
IntegralTransformer
andLXstributionCenter
Sewi& term Mini-hit
Description
,I
Substations
light industrial and temporary
power requirements.
The transformer-The
Servicenter utilizes GE
transformer design which has
twenty years of field proven
experience
behind it and a
long track record for assuring
consistent, re$able~- --Y,
performanca~ Type QMS
:
transformers emp1oy.a t80C
UL recognized
insulation
system with a 115C rise.
Application
The Servicenter can be used
wherever 480-volt power is
available and 120- or 240-volt
branch circuits are required.
The unit can be used in such
applications as vending
machine areas, and
construction laboratory test
areas, where temporary
power is required, or where
future expansion of branch
circuits is planned.
UL Listed
The Servicenter carries a UL
Label for unit substations, and
is suitable for both indoor and
outdoor installation.
NEC Requirements
The Servicenter conforms
with Articie 450-3 of the !987
National Electric Code.
Single-phase
A80 Volts Primary,
120/240 Volts, 60 HZ3
Manmum Branch Soaces
Secondary
kVA
Item
NO.
Qry.
7.5
10
Breaker
%ingS
1-poie
2-Z&
6
6
!2
4
8
10
'2
16
24
I
9TZlS1050
9TZlS1070
9TZlSllOO
9T2tS1150
9T21Si250
12
20
C---~-y
15
1. ThQL
Catalog
Number
1 9T2lS1152
12
4
4
181
21
:2
:2
24
2SA
35A
50A
BOA
OOA
SOA
1 3 1 ;: 1 : j :, / ii::
40A
( 6 1 24 / 10 1 24
60A
O(2)
Dimensions
.Approxlmate
kVA
Catalog
Number
:OA
30A
-0A
Z50A
C Max
Denth
D!mensions
iinches)
;;
-0A
APPENDIX
WELL
HOUSES
.I
ENGINEERED
FMERGLASS
COMPOSITES
INC.
608-562-5900
FAX 608-562-5909
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
NOTES:
1.
2.
3.
EFC RECOMMENDS
3" DIA. X 35" LONG STAINLESS STEEL EXPANSION TYPE ANCHORBOLTS
(53" LONG IF BUILDING HAS AN OPTIONAL FLOOR).
4.
5.
IF YOUR BUILDING IS PROVIDED WITH FRP OUTSIDE VENT COVERSFOR EXHAUST AND/OR
INTAKE APPLICATIONS AND THESE COVERSARE NOT ATTACHEDTO THE BUILDING - USE
THE EFC SUPPLIED NYLON DRIVE RIVETS TO FASTEN COVER(S) TO EXTERIOR SURFACE
OF BUILDING (HOLES ARE PREDRILLED). CAREFULLYSILICONE AROUNDOUTSIDE EDGE
OF COVER'S FLANGE. USE MASKING TAPE AROUNDPERIMETER (ON EXTERIOR WALL OF
BUILDING AND COVER'S FLANGE) TO PROVIDE A GOODAPEARANCE.
6.
AFTER PREPARING
DOOR
AND JAMB
ACCORDING
TO
TEMPLATE
PROVIDED
MOUNT
LATCH UNIT
IN DOOR.
ROTATE OUTSIDE
ROSE IN OR
OUT DEPENDING
ON DOOR THICKNESS.
LOCK WILL FIT ANY DOOR FROM 1%
l/8
l/4
3/8
GAP
GAP
GAP
FOR
FOR
FOR
l-3/8
DOORS
1 - 3/4
DOORS
2 DOORS
LATCH UNITS
WITH DRIVE
REMOVE
PLATE
VERTICAL
NOlE
: WHEN
A CYLINDER
IS CORRECTLY
INSTALLED,
ENTER IN THiS POSITION.
ALIGN
DOWN.
FUNCTION
LOCK
THE KEY SHOULD
IF NOT, REVERSE
CYLINDER
AS FOLLOWS
:
1. WITH
INSIDE
KNOB UNLOCKED,
INSERT A KEY
INTO CYLINDER
2. TURN
KEY ABOUT
45 DEGREE.
3. PRESS RETAINER
THRU SLEEVE HOLE BY USING
TOOL PROVIDED
AND PULL KNOB OUT,
4. TURN
LOCKSET
TO OPPOSITE
SIDE WHERE
YOU WISH
TO REVERSE.
5. PUT OUTSIDE
KNOB WITH KEY-IN-CYLINDER
BACK INTO SPINDLE
UNTlL TAIL-PIECE
CAN
ENGAGE
RETRACTOR
(FEEL RETRACTS
BY TURNING
KEY SLIGHTLY)
6. TURN KEY ABOUT 45O DEGREE
AND PUSH KNOB IN UNTIL
RETAINER
CLICKS
INTO POSITION.
SLOT
SEE REVERSE
AND
KNOB ASSEMBLY
*TURN
LOCKSET
TC
OPPOSITE
SIDE
WHERE
YOU WISlTO REVERSE
*OUTSIDE
KNOB
&
f11Nl
klOWVW3kl
OlNl
NOIlISOd
SI3113
tl3NIVEW
1IlNn
NI BONX HSM
aNV
mm0
m
mow
m
~kml
(AllH9llS
rWl 3NINkii-U
Aa Sl.XW.3tl
1339)
39VDN3
NV3 333ld - lltll
1llNn
31aNldS
XIV8
EtClNllUNI-A3Y
HAM
BON>
HSfkl
333kl
lIV1
kl3aNl-m
r-l
II
II
II
II
II
+ l-1/4 /
I
I
I
MATERIAL:
NECPFENE GASKET
NOT SiiVvN
:
l-7/8 -
------
---
___-----
----I
1
I
-------
---i
___------
I
I
I
I
I
38
THRESHOLD
FCR STANDARD
ENGINEERED
301 BICKFORO
STREET
NEW LISBON.
38
FIBERGLASS
WISCONSIN
WIDE (0.lC.l
COMPOSITES
5.3950-1524
INC.
&IB-562-5900
FAX 608-562-5909
_-_.
1
,_-.
)
-&)-----------&
1
-----
14
5
I+?
--____----
---
---------_
&gjr
$3
IF
ENQINEERED
301 BICKFORD
STREET
NEW LISBON.
fIBERGLASS
WISCONSIN
COMPOSITES
539501524
INC.
608~562-5900
FAX 608-562-5909
--
,,I
.,
_[
SIZE Ax6
6x4
1%
6x6
1 !/2
6x8
1 '/2'
6x10
1 %'
32"
6x12
1%'
1 '/r'
40"
6x14
8x4
13"
8x6
13"
13"
8x8
4 8x10
I-,
! 8x12
13"
; 8x14
13"
10x4
25"
10x6
25"
10x8
25"
10x10
25"
10x12
25"
10x14
25"
37"
12x6
37"
12x10
12x12
12x14
14x4
14x6
14x8
14x10
14x12
14x14
I
I
,I
28"
40"
-
72"
88"
48"
-
16"
104-
28"
40"
40
48"
28
40"
32"
40"
48"
I
- ,I!I
;--
72"
16"
88"
104"
-
H
-
28"
28"
28"
28"
28"
40"
40"
40"
40"
40"
40"
88"
40"
88"
40"
88"
104"
32"
32"
32"
32"
40"
37"
32"
72"
10"
88"
40"
I 104
40"
37"
49"
18"
49"
49"
49"
49"
*ASSUMES
CENTERED
4
4
48"
48"
49"
48"
48"
72"
72"
/
j
72"
I
I
72"
32"
32"
48"
48"
-
STANDARD
30 WIDE DOOR IS
IN FRONT PANEL.
fL
z i
72;
!j
-I---
40"
37"
37"
28"
40"
,6 /
28
16"
32"
12x4
12x8
72"
88"
MNTG
ANGLE
9/16OIATYP
3% TYP.
OUTSIDE
TO HOLE
CENTER
PANEL THICKNESS:
2 TYP. AROUND
PERIMETER
(1 ,,e ELSEWHERE)
88"
I
88"
104"
104"
104"
104"
104"
104"
ANCHOR BOLTS
ARE NOT PROVIDED
WITH BUILDING
TYPICAL
TIE DOWN
NOTTOSCALE.
-DOES
PREDRILLING
NOT RECOMMEND
HOLES IN FOUNDATION.
DETAIL
CADMIUM
CLASS
1. FLAME RESISTANT
POLYISWYAN~RATE
FOAM INSULATION
.-
WOOD
114
LIFTING
EYE
FIBERGLASS
SHEETS
.090 THICKNESS
WHITE COLOR STANDARD
PLATED
SILICONE
,- 316 X 4. UG SCREW
FRAMING
X 2. KBopRwE
GASKET
--
112 X 2 wEoppwE
GASKET
STD
CORNER
STD.
CONSTRUCTION
STD.
!ZAMGE
DOOR
CONSTRUCTION
NEOPRENE
ST. ST. THRESHOLD
GASKET
ROOF
CONSTRUCTION
I
I
13"
13"
25"
25"
25"
25"
25"
25**
37"
37"
37"
32T-.
40"
48'*
32"
40
32"
32"
32"
32"
32"
32"
72"
72"
72"
72"
72"
72"
88"
26"
40"
40"
40''
40"
88"
88"
88".
88"
104"
104"
104"
104"
I v4-104"
16"
28"
40'*
48"
16"
37"
37"
4 0
37"
48"
16"
28"
40"
49"
49"
49"
49"
49"
49"
32"
me*
32"
48"
40"
40"
40"
48"
48"
48**
48*'
48"
48"
1 A l . .
J
h
3 ?4 TYP.,
OUTSIDE TO HOLECENTER "
.. ,
ANCHOR BOLTS
ARE NOT PROVIDED
WITH BUILDING-
..
7
FRP
ROOF PLUG
PVC TRIM
G-SKET
#
\-8
:
I
%;y,\
A
1
-
I/-
-+-- I
q
<
..
, I
ii
Ii
:I
.,
I1
F"GE
NEOPRENE GASKET
.--
NJ%lPR.ENEGASKET
-"- .__-
-7
4
..
M
1
~
=
I
-
FAX 608-562-5909
2.
#lo X
. 2 5 X 2 . PVC GASKET
NO=
WALL SPLl
THAN
TYPICALLY AE-
8.
\-
,-
2 5 X 2.PVC GASKE
'*
FIBERGLASS CAP
'
PVC CAPPING
v-
----
/
/
__--- ---
-- - --
SECTION "C"-"C"
--
SECTION "B"-"B"
STO W A L L SPLICE
CONSTRUCTION
NOT APPLICABLE
2" TYP.
NOTES:
I. ROOF DESIGNED
I
ENOlNEERED FIBEROLASS COMPOSITES INC.
608-!j62-5900
FAX 608-562-5909
I-
ENGINEERED
,-
301 BICKFORD
NEW LISBON,
0
,,? P ,-0
5-26-95
RBERGIASS
STREET
WI 53950
-=
COMPOSlIES
PHONE:
INC.
608/562-5900
-.w-
WTIONAL
EQUlPl.4EN-l
LIST:
NOTES:
/i
(I)
IO OIAUEIER
D(HAsT
FAN. 5BO CFU FREE Am. YOUNTED
ATWAllC
SnJrrm
AND
AN 091*
*PPROKD
INTAKE
GUAQD
SCREENED
FRP OUlBLK
WT
COWL
FAN IS DAY-KM
BRAND.
2CSlO.
E
CGNTROL
SWITCH.
-NOT MRED.
C.
(1) 1500
CLECTRlC
BRAND.
WAR,
5120
BNH,
120
HEATER
WI4
BUICT-CI
STOCX
#2EUI.
$JMREO.
VOLT.
W*LL
THCRUOSTAT.
YWNTED.
RLNa
ON AN
4m
*
STOM
FM-FORCED
SO-SO
F. ,,A,TC+,
CAOMIUM P
lAm UFllNG M S .
lW.FWR
a
I
I
I
I
(4) PROHDED
r
I
I
I
I
3'4.
I
I
I
I
I
I
IC
i
.-"
I
I
I
6'-6'
I
I
I
i
I
I
SEE NOES
#7.8&15
3'-0'
- -L
A $1) 10' DIAMETER EkHAUST FAK 580 CFLl FRP AIR. MOUNTED ON AN
AUTOMATIC S
H
V
m AND AN OSHA A P P R O W INTAKE G
u
m mM A
B.
C.
II NOTES
1.
(2) 10' x 10- GRAWM DPERAED AIR INTAKE KNTS, PROllLlM MVMINUM
ENAMEL RNISH. CCMPLETE WTH
CONSTRUCTION HAWNG A WITE POLA s w m FRP WTSIDEMUT c o r n FOR UM. VD(TS ARE DAYTDN
BRAND STOac 14cs55.
4.
6.
(1)
."
LUTS4Xl%EVAlWH,
D C K W A m -
BO
J
--.
I
I
SHALL INUJJOE ONE (I) STANDARD 3'4' VllDE X 6'4" HlCH (0.I.C)
FLUW-FITIMG SINGLE DDDR DOOR SI4N.L BE OF FIBERQCSS courPoslTE
XONSTRUcTIoN INSVLAEU MTH 1 1/2' THlCK. CLASS 1. M E RESISTANT
POLVSOCYANdRATE F W . DOOR SHUL BE INSTALLED MTH AN INTEGRAL FRP
W E W BE FURNISHED WTH l?iE FOLLOWC IEMS
7. BU5DlNG
a
b.
8.
9.
ARE SKIWN
Sn NOTE
F3.
ON W PUW
wmm
TRAILER
14.
I~
- -
5-2645
- K L lI-HWSE
OPERATING
INSTRUCTIONS
WALL HEATERS
.MODELS
2E709A,
2E873.A
FORM SS1884
04041
0390/096/vP
power before installing or servicing. If the power disconnect is out of sight, lock it in the open position
and tag it to prevent unexpected application of pawer.
Failure to do so could result in fatal electric shock.
Figure l-Model
2E434A
Description
The wall heaters provide fast supplemental
room heat.
The fan draws cool air in through the round opening in
the grille frame and directs it across the nickel chromium elements for discharge through the rectangular
top opening. An over-heat protective device automatically shuts the heater OFF if the discharge is blocked or
an unsafe temperature rise is encountered for any reason. Heaters are equipped with manual reset thermal
over-heat protector. On some models the manual reset
is backed-up with a thermal fuse. The grille is fingerproof and can be easily removed for cleaning.
Unpacking
Remove rough-in box from :arton. Leave heater in styrofoam package until you are ready for final installation.
Specifications
MODEL
BTUH
WATTS
.> 2E434A
2E708A
2E873A
5120
1500
1500/1125
2E435A
2E709A
*5120/3839
2E874A
2E875A
*602715 120
200011500
(*) For 240 and 208 volts respectively.
-&IS
DIMENSIONS
IN INCHES
AMPS
120
12.5
15h
10
4/2
2401208
6.215.4
15%
10
4%
2401208
8.317.2
15%
10
4%
6121-8666
MODELS
FORM 581884
2E434A,
2E435A,
2E708A,
2E709A,
2E873A,
04041
(Continued)
2401208 VOLT
SUPPLY
HEATER
ASSEMBLY
HORIZONTAL
Figure 2 -
VERTICAL
THERMAL
FUSE
Figure 5 -Wiring
Diagram for
Models4=709A,
HEATER
ASSEMBLY
MANUAL
Figure 4 -Wiring
Diagram for
Models?%4-708A
& 2E873A
RESET
BUTTON
__
FORM 5S1884
04041,
MODELS
2E434A,
2E435A,
2E708A,
2E709A,
2E873A,
Operation
Rotate the thermostat knob clockwise, until the heater
comes ON. Heater operation is indicated by the rotating
fan blade. After a few seconds of operation, warm air
should be discharged out of the top or rectangular opening in the heater grille. Adjust thermostat setting to maintain desired room temperature. During proper operation,
the heater will cycle ON and OFF periodically. The heater
should not be blocked or covered in any manner.
LIMIT SWITCH
1. This unit is equipped with a manual-reset, high temperature limit switch. If no heat is delivered with thermostat set fully clockwise, turn thermostat fully
counterclockwise, and check red reset button in
center of front plate.
2. If reset button protrudes- ? must be reset. Using a
toothpick or similar piece ::9 wood, push button IN
where it should remain.
3. Turn thermostat fully clot;:-silse and repeat above
steps when heater resumes normal operation.
4. If the heater still does not function, or after a 10-20
minute cool-down period if button will not reset
(remain in), have heater checked by qualified electrician.
NOTE: Due to the sensitivity of the limit switch, it may
have tripped from vibration during shipment. It may be
necessary to reset switch prior to initial start-up of
heater.
5. The nameplate on heater has a plastic film on it for
protection until after installation. To remove it, peel
corners nearest logo first. For easier removal, pull flat
LIMITED
Maintenance
CAUTION: Before attempting any cleaning or mafntenance on this heater, open the circuit to the heater
by removing the fuse or opening the circuit breaker
for the heater circuit. Lock in the open positlon to
prevent unexpected application of power.
WARNING: AN INCORRECT CONNECTION MAY
CAUSE AN ELECTRIC SHORT, PRODUCE AN ELECTRICAL SHOCK, OR BURN OUT THE HEATER,
RESULTMG IN PROPERTY DAMAGE AND/OR PERSONAL I&.IURY.
WARNIN::r: ONLY QUALIFIED ELECTRICIANS OR
SERVICEMEN SHOULD ATTEMPT TO REPAiR THIS
UNIT. IMPROPER REPAIR AND/OR ASSEMBLY CAN
CAUSE AN ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD.
SIX MONTH
1. Remove four screws securing perforated grille and
wipe dust from under grille. Replace perforated
grille.
2. Remove heater from rough-in box and clean dust
and dirt from rough-in box and underside of heater.
Replace heater in rough-in box.
NOTE: In above cleaning operation, be careful not to
bend or damage fan blade or element wire.
YEARLY
.--Add 2 to 3 drops of S.A.E. 1OW or 20W oil to fan motor
bearings.
.-
WARRANTY
DAYTON ONE-YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY: Wall heaters, Models 2E434A, 2E435A, 2E708A, 2E709A 2E87U, 2E874A &
2E875A, are warranted by Dayton Electric Mfg. Co. (Dayton) to the original user against defects in workmanship
or materials
under normal use for one year after date of purchase. Any part which is determined
by Dayton to be detective in material
or workmanship
and returned to an authorized
service location, as Dayton designates, shipping costs prepaid, wilt be, as
the exclusive remedy, repaired or replaced at Daytons option. For limited warranty claim procedures,
see PROMPT DISPOSlTlON
below. This limited warranty gives purchasers
specific legal rights which vary from state to state.
L/M/TAT/ON OF LIABILITY To the extent allowable under applicable law, Daytons liability for consequential
and incidental damages is expressly disclaimed. Daytons liability in all cents is limited to, and shall not exceed, the purchase price paid.
WARRANTY DISCLAIMER.
Dayton has made a diligent effort to illustrate and describe the products in this literature
accurately; however; such Uustrations and descriptions are for the so/e purpose of identification, and do not express or imp/y
a warranty that the products are merchantable,
or fit for a particular purpose, or that the products will necessarily conform
to the illustrations or descriptions.
Except as provided below, no warranty or affirmation of fact, expressed or implied, other than as stated in LIMITED WARRANTY above is made or authorized
by Dayton.
PRODUCT SUITABILITY
Many states and localities have codes and regulations governing sales, construction,
installation, and/or use of products for certain purposes, which may vary from those in neighboring
areas. While Dayton attempts
to assure that its products comply with such codes, it cannot guarantee compliance,
and cannot be responsible
for how
the product is installed or used. Before purchase and use of a product, p/ease review the product application, and national
and local codes and regulations,
and be sure that the product, installation, and use will comply with them,
Certain aspects of disclaimers are not applicable
to consumer products; e.g., (a) some states do not allow the exclusion
or limitation of incidental or consequential
damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply lo you; (b) also,
some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, consequent/y the above limitation may not apply
to you; and (c) by law, during the period of this Limited Warranty, any implied warranties of merchantability
or fitness for
a particular purpose applicable
to consumer products purchased by consumers,
may not be excluded or otherwise disclaimed.
PROMPT DISPOSITION.
Dayton will make a good faith effort for prompt correction or other adjustment with respect to any
product which proves to be defective within limited warranty. For any product believed to be defective within limited warranty, first write or call dealer from whom product was purchased.
Dealer will give additional directions. If unable to resolve
satisfactorily, write to Dayton at address below, giving dealers name, address, date and number of dealers invoice, and
describing the nature of the defect. Title and risk of loss pass to buyer on delivery to common carriel: If product was damaged
in transit to you, file claim with carrier.
Manufactured
for Dayton Electric Mfg. Co., 5959 W. Howard St., Chicago, IL 60648
--.--
3 --
FORM 5S1884
MODELS
2E434A,
2E435A,
2E708A,
2E709A,
2E873A,
04041
ORDER REPLACEMENT
PARTS
BY CALLING
TOLL FREE
1-800-323-0620
Please
provide
folkwing
* Model
Number
* Serial
Number
mformation:
(if any)
Part Description
and Number
as shwn in Paris List.
to
-.
Figure 7 -
Replacement
Parts Illustration
FORM 581884
04041
MODELS
2E434A;2E435A,
2E708A, .2E709A,
6
2:
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
la
19
20
21
*
19
AND 2E875A
Parts List
PARTNO. FORMODELS
DESCRIPTION
Rough-inbox assembly
Screw,8B x 3/aMountingbracket
2E874A
Replacement
IEF.
YO.
2E8hA,
Heaterassembly,12OV,
1500w
Healerassembly,24OV,
1500w
Heaterassembly,24OV,
ZOOOW
Bracket
Limit switch
Insert
Thermostatassembly
with lead
Cableclip
2E434A
2E435A
2E708A
2E709A
2E873A
2E874A
2E875A
6101-8577
-
6101-8577
6101-8578
--
6101-8577
6101-8578
6101-8578
2436-0002
8536-8517 8536-8517 8536-8517 8536-8517 8536-8517 8536-8517 8536-8517
8671-8036
8671-8036
Hexnut, 6-32
Thermalfuse, 109C 15
amps.
Screw,6ABx 5116
Front panelassembly
1 Screw,8B x 1% bright
Screw,8B x 1% black
0
2
E
SI
L1
L
;
1235-0052 1235-0052 1235-0052 1235-0052
1235-0052
8852-8447 8852-8447
-
i Screw,6ABx 114bright
Screw,6ABx 114black
i Screw,8ABx 3/a bright
Screw,8AB x 3/a black
8671-8036 8671-8036
Phillipsscrew,8-32x 5/8
Motor assemblywith
terminals
Fanblade
*
*
*
i
8767-8131 8767-8131 8767-8131 8767-8131 i 8767-8131 8767-8131 8767-8131
1235-0008 1235~0008 1235~0008 1235-0008 1235-0008 i235-0008 1235~oooa
Screengrille,aluminum
1 Screengrille,almond
Screengrille, brown
Nameplate
12309023 1230-0023
1230-0023
8850-8021 8850-8021
8683-8104 8683-8104
6129-8152 6129-8152 6129-8152 6129-8152 6129-8152 6129-8152 6129-8152
1 Knob:
Knob black
brown
611z-8002
-
FORM 581884
04041
MODELS
2E434A,
2E435A,
2E708A,
2E709A,
2E873A,
Troubleshooting
SYMPTOM
Chart
POSSIBLE CAUSE(S)
CORRECTIVE
ACTION
1. Thermostat
2. Thermostat
Heater discharges
smoke
ELECTRICAL
SERVICE PERSON!
FORM 551884
04041
MODELS
2E434A;2E435A,
2E708A,
2E799A,
2E873A,
Service Record
DATE
MAINTENANCE
REPLACEMENT
PERFORMED
-7-
COMPONENTS
REQUIRED
FORM 581884
04041
.-
Notes
_-.
Pi8as8m8dandsrv8tb8s8blsw&on
I R88d cuddty
ktorr
y-.,k~tut
ywrsdf
wd 0th~~
by obsuvhg
r/l saf8@ inhmna#on.
.m
damage!
Retain instwctbns
for future
rdotvnce.
8tteo@ng
Failwv
to 8ssmnbt0,
to compfy wfth
IrWdl,
opu8h
or m8fntaln
ffm pmduct
in smctfonscouldr8su~th~on8linjuly8ndlor
desdbod.
;-
C Max.
Figure
. ..
protector
trips.
. . .
41916'
6'
2yB"
13118
SW6
5118
2vs
10
15118
61~1
2?J8
12
2C713B
191/a
6112
23fE
16
2C70BB
21 l/8
8314
18
2C71OB
8"
Performance
2C634B
7"
120
l/30
1 .o
1550
2C819B
10
580
l/30
1.0
1550
2C71OB
12
775
li30
1.0
1550
2C713B
16
975
1RO
1.8
1550
2C708B
18
1825
1115
1.2
1050
.*
Form 552035
Information
after
Slots
11118"
1. Follow
as well
(NEC)
Health
x 112"
2C634B
Safety
114"
r 2c*1g8
General
1 - Dimensions
Dimensions
Unpacking
1. Inspect for any damage that may have occurred durinq transit.
--5
113900Bl
Installation
1. The unit should be securely mounted
rigid framework.
NOTE: Allowing the fan frame to flex or
move will result in undue vibrations and
possible premature motor, or fan blade
failure.
in a
.
Dayton Operating Instructions and Parts Manual
Dayton Utility
Exhaust Fans
Installation
(Continued)
SINGLE
LINE
G)yLINE
1
2
3. Periodicallycleanthe propellerblades,
guard, motor and shutter of any
accumulateddirt.
Operation
Figure 2 - Wiring
Connection
Diagram:
115 Volt
Troubleshooting
Excessivenoise
Faninoperative
lnsufficientair flow
,:-.
SPEED
)=o
Shutter-Mounted
Maintenance
MINOR AND ROUTINE:
1. Disconnectpower sourcebefore
servicing.
2. Lubricatethe motor sleevebearingsevery
six monthsusingS.A.E., 20 nondetergent oil.
PARTS REPLACEMENT:
~~;~~&iadesm
.--
fi-t
on
Chart
1. Dry motor bearings
1. Relubricatemotor bearings
2. Loosefan blade
3. Replacefan blade
2. Defective motor
2. Repairor replacemotor
1. Blockedintake or exhaustopening
2. Low voltage
2. Determinecauseand correct
-.
Dayton Operating
Instructionsand
,f--For Replacement
5e provide following
information:
-V&KM number
-Serial number (if any)
-Part descriptions
and number as shown
Address parts correspondence
Parts Company
of America
1657 Shermer Road
Northbrook,
IL 60062.5362
2C634B,
Parts Manual
Parts,
2C708B,
2C71OB,
2C713B
and
2C819B
call 7-800-323-0620
in parts list
lo.
Figure 3 - Replacement
Replacement
,/==-
2
3
4
5
6
Parts Illustration
Parts list
Motor
Shutter assembly
Fan blade
intakeguard
#10-l 6 x 518" SM Screw
#8-32 Spinlock nut
(*)Standard
hardware
13070002
09410001
03124001
09602002
*
*
13076002
09414001
03174001
09606002
13070002
09412001
03172001
09604002
13072002
09413001
03173001
09605004
13070002
09411001
03125001
09603002
1
1
1
1
4
4
2C634B,
2C708B,
2C710B,
2C713B
and 2C819B
c-,
limited Warranty
Dayton One-Year Limited Warranty. Utility Shutter-Mounted Exhaust Fans, Models 2C6348,2C7088,2C7738,
and2C8196, are
warranted by Dayton Electric Mfg. Co. (Dayton) to the original user against defects in workmanship or materials under normal
use for one year after date of purchase. Any parl which is determined to be defective in material or workmanship and returned
to an authorized service location, as Dayton designates, shipping costs prepaid, will be, as the exclusive remedy, repaired or
replaced at Daytons option. For limited warranty claim procedures, see PROMPT DISPOSITION below. This limited warranty gives
purchasers specific legal rights which vary from state to state.
Limitation of Liability. To the extent allowable under applicable law, Daytons liability for consequential and incidental damages
is expressly disclaimed, Daytons liability in all events is limited to and shall not exceed the purchase price paid.
Warranty Disclaimer. Dayton has made a diligent effort to illustrate and describe the products in this literature accurately;
however, such illustrations and descriptions are for the sole purpose of identification, and do not express or imply a warranty thi the products are merchantable, or fit for a particular purpose, or that the products will necessarily conform to the illustrations or
descriptions.
Except as provided below, no warranty or affirmation of fact, expressed or implied, other than as stated in the LIMITED
WARRANTY above is made or authorized by Dayton.
Product Suitability. Many states and localities have codes and regulations governing sales, construction, installation, andlor use of
products for certain purposes, which may vary from those in neighboring areas. While Dayton attempts to assure that its products
comply with such codes, it cannot guarantee compliance, and cannot be responsible for how the product is installed or used.
Before purchase and use of a product, please review the product application, and national and local codes and regulations, and
be sure that the product, installation, and use will comply with them.
Certain aspects of disclaimers are not applicable to consumer products; e.g., (a) some states do not allow the exclusion or
limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you; (b) also, some states
do not allow a limitation on how long an implied warranty lasts, consequentially the above limitation may not apply to you; and
(c) by law, during the period of this limited warranty, any implied warranty of implied merchantability or fitness for a particular
purpose applicable to consumer products purchased by consumers, may not be excluded or otherwise disclaimed.
Prompt Disposition. Dayton will make a good faith effort for prompt correction or other adjustment with respect to any product
which proves to be defective within limited warranty. For any product believed to be defective within limited warranty, first write
or call dealer from whom the product was purchased. Dealer will give additional directions. If unable to resolve Satisfactorily,
write to Dayton at address below, giving dealers name, address, date, and number of dealers invoice, and describing the nature
of the defect. Title and risk of loss pass to buyer on delivery to common carrier. If product was damaged in transit to you, file
claim with carrier.
Manufactured
60714 U.S.A.
_-
Co.
--.
05580
0794116wc
Inc.
m
WP
APPENDIX
ROLL
UP DOORS
OPE_R0TIONFIL
AND
MhINTENANCE
MANUCIL
a
FOR
?
MODEL
INSTCILLED
LOCaL
DISTRIBUTOR
OF
CST:
OVERHEAD
DOOR
PRODUCTS:
MflNUFACTlJRED
ORDER
NO:
BY:
THE i7VERHEAD
PENNSYLWNIA
DDOR
CORPL3RATlON
DIVISION
.
,-
/=\
1.
2.
3.
from tension
Release lever
wheel bolt.
8.
c.
During release,
the tension wheel should rotate rapidly
for
approximately
l/2 turn, then hesitate
as impact paw1 engages
end of barrel
assembly, reducing spring torque from door.
Tension wheel will continue to rotate until tension bolt strikes
back of release arm lever,
restoring
spring torque to door at a
w
reduced rate.
D.
E.
In order
arms should
wheel end.
A.
..
4.
to place
separate
perform
2 feet per
against
to a height
the following;
PUSH-UP OPERATION
.f=+-.
A.
B.
C.
D.
Remove vise
E.
Reconnect
hook.
F.
Install
grips
flame
chain
firmly
turns
grips,
to tension
under bottom
wheel
size
and
'5
hook
from guide.
baffle
release
chain
using
size "S"
Step on foot
from rising.
pedal
and secure
sash chain
down to prevent
foot
pedal
SECTION
RECOMMENDED PREVENTATIVE
ROLLING
To
keep
oil
all
and the
doors.
silicone
Every
tric
MAINTENANCE
STEEL OR ALUMINUM
DOORS
door
in good working
conditions,
every
three
months*
moving
parts
except
the clutch
mechanism
on fire
doors
wool pile
in the guides
on rolling
grilles
or counter
The guides
should
be lubricated
with
a paste
wax or
spray.
six
months*,
operators
dry
oil
lube
all
the
exposed
roller
chains
and
limit
switch
shaft
threads.
on elec-
If
electrically
operated,
every
three
months
check
the
oil
level
in the gear reducer.
If it is necessary
to add oil,
use
gear oil
as recommended
by the operator
installation
instruction.
At
this
time
check
tension
of
roller
chain
between
operator
and door
sprocket,
if
too
loose,
loosen
operator
mounting
bolts
and slide
operator
to tighten
chain.
Retighten
mounting
bolts.
All
bearings
provided
with
grease
fittings
should
be lubricated
every
six
months*.
If
so equipped,
find
bearings
located
in
the drive
bracket
and tension
end of the counter
balance.
On crank
operated
sealed with grease
doors
and grilles
the crank
assemblies
and should
not require
lubrication.
Fire
doors
should
be drop
otherwise
required
by others.
*
tested
every
six
months
are
unless
The above
frequency
of
lubrication
is
for
normal
operation.
Severe
duty
or
unusual
operating
conditions
require
may
modification
of the times between
lubrication.
B.
or hand crank
C.
wheel and
D.
E.
F.
Install
G.
Release
foot
pedal
chain
firmly
turns
to tension
release
chain
sash chain
using
size
"S" hook
size
ELECTRIC OPERATION
A.
B.
Step on foot
C.
D.
E.
F.
Reconnect
hook.
G.
Install
H.
Release
pedal
and secure
until
operation
stops.
sash chain.
open position.
chain
firmly
turns
to tension
wheel
size
and
"S" hook
.
flame
baffle
release
pedal
sash chain.
chain
using
size "S"
TROUBLE,SHOQTING
SECTION
GUIDE FOR ROLLING
II
STEEL OR ALUMINUM
DOORS
C.
Endlocks
might have become loose and tilted
Drill
out loose
fasteners
out of position.
and reattach
with suitable
fastener.
Curtain
might have been bent and damaged
enough
to wedge in guides.
In some cases
can
be
removed
the
bellmouths
from
the
guide
entrance
and
the
curtain
lowered
outside
of the guides
and straightened.
Be
not
to
allow
curtain
to
rapidly
careful
unwind off the counter
balance.
Curtain
might be too tight
in the guides.
This could have happened from guides
or
curtains
having
become
damaged.
Curtain
should
rattle
about
l/16
minimum
plat
for
full
length
of each guide.
.
.
Page 2
5.,ELECTRIC
OPERATOR STOPS TOO SOON OR NOT ENOUGH AT THE OPEN
OR CLOSED POSITION.
Solution:
Operator
limit
switch
setting
has become out of
phase with
the door.
Reset
the limit
switches.
See operator
installation
instructions
for
method
of resetting
limits.
It
would
be wise
tighten
the
drive
chain
between
operator
and
door sprockets
to avoid
the chain
jumping
and a
repeat
of this
situation.
6. OPERATOR DOES NOT RUN AND CIRCUITS i0 IT ARE OKAY.
Solution:
switch
jammed at an out of phase
- a. Limit
tion.
Reset limit
switch
per operator
installation
instructions.
b. Faulty
7.
limit
switch.
Replace
old
switch.
C.
Chain
throw-out
is
in position
operation.
Make sure mechanism
is
tion
for electric
operation.
d.
Interlock
switch.
switch
faulty.
posi-
for
manual
in posi-
Replace
old
On drive
end,
(electric,
chain
or crank
operated)
the gap between
face of stationary
Dentil
Release
Assembly
and washer on governor
drive
hub assembly
is
incorrect
not
allowing
drive
to
disengage.
Set
gap at
l/32"
to l/16"
to correct.
See page 13 of
Fire Door Installation
instructions.
c.
Release
chain
not allowing
door to release.
Find area where chain
is binding
and correct.
*ilMiTED WARRANTY
The authorized distributor of Overhead Door Corporation products whose
name appears below (Seller) warrants the product sold under this warranty to be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use
and service. This warranty extends only to the original consumer (Buyer),
and expires one-year after the date of installation.
Sellers sole obligation under this warranty is limited to repairing or replacing any parts which shall be determined by Seller to be defective, and is
conditioned upon Buyer giving notice of any such defect to Seller within the
warranty period. If Seller concludes that repair or replacement is necessary,
Seller will commence work within a reasonable time after the decision to
repair or replace is made.
This warranty does not apply to any product which has been altered or
repaired by any person not authorized by the Seller, or which has been
subjected to misuse, neglect or accident.
Seller has not established any informal dispute settlement procedure of
type described in the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act.
SELLER ASSUMES NO LIABILITY FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY LAW ARE LIMITED IN
DURATION TO THE ONE YEAR PERIOD DESCRIBED ABOVE.
This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may have other
rights which vary from state to state. Some states do not allow limitations on
how long an implied warranty lasts, and some states do not allow the
exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above
limitations or exclusions may not apply to you.
Inquiries to the Seller concerning this warranty should be directed to:
OVERHEAD DOOR CD. OF NEW 8ERN. INC.
POST 0mcE 80X 12467
NEW BERN, NC 26661
M-l 04274
1o-30-81
II6
39
N OPE RAlEO
<FtAtttt
OPERATED
MOTOR
---
OPERATED--
x*.
tAAftUAl,~OfEft41
0
vlEW fACitiG
CCIL Slot Of 6 007
lt1G191 tt4ttO
ORIVL StlOWN
Lt f I ttAtl0
UnlVf
OPPOSITE
OEl4lL
37
-.
_A
K
F
:I3
OEIAIL
-1..
- c
C- 197 SLAT
C-215
SLAT
F -265
SLAT
FIGURE
1 -TYPE
D t. DRAWBAR
FOR CONSTANT
CGNT$T
CLGSE
FOR STGPPING
SAFETY SvITcn
IIDEL
EL
bs stiom
YY II
NODEL
IN INSTRUCTIDN
FL/SFL
il.&g
DEL
I
INTERLUCK
WJRNALLY
FIGURE
011 STOPPING SAFETY SVITM
EHGVE THIS VW
PUSH BUTTON
STATION
(5 vIREs>
SVITCH
CLOSED)
3 -TYPE
SAFETY EDGE
II
CONMERCIAL
REltlVETHISVDE
RECEIVER
WRING
,ONE PAIR
SVITCH
CLGSEIU
TVO-STATION
STATION
45 VIRES)
WRING
BOX
r --
CUT-OUT
WORMALLY
MODEL RD-30H
SEE INSTRUCTIGN
NANUAL PAGE 0. FIGURE
MIDEL
FIGURE
(SEE NOTE 1)
11
II
D & DRAWBAR
INTERLOCK
WGRNALLY
,I1
(5 VIRES)
SVITCH
.~
PUSH SUTTUN
STATION
OPERATOR
ELECTRICAL
l-7-A
LL ---
ZWJ
L---i -.._
SDA
VHEN
INSTRUCTION
INSTALLED
IN PosITIGNS
SHIVN IN
,HAtUAL.
USE TYPE C WRRJG DUQWL
4-TYPE
14.
RDA
C
FOR CIINSTANT CONTACT CLaSE
RENOVE THIS JUHPER
I
I
SVITCJi
CLOSED)
irl.z?.J
- 7-i
k.
7i
INTERLOCK
clmllMLY
EDGE SVITCH
STATION
(5 vI!xs>
SVITCH
cLost3~
NOTE3
L VHEN USING 4-VIRE
RECEIVER
(AS
SHGVW UPERATGR WST BE VIRED
FUR NDNENTARY CONTACT IlPCRATIUN.
t
IF STWFWG
e
SAFETY EDGE
SVITCH IS BEING USCD, GPERATOR SHOULD
BE VIRED FUR NMENTARY
CONTACT CLOSt
3. IF REVERSING
SAFETY EDGE SVITCH IS
BEING USED CBERATGR NUST BE VIRED
HCWENTARY WNTACT
OPEN
4. ADUST
CUT-GUT SVTTCH (IF USED) TO
PREVENT
DOOR REVERSING
AT THE FLOOR
5. CIRCLED NUNBERS ARE FUR VIRE
IDENTIFICATIW
WLY.
OVERHEAD
Y
MN
mm4 n
C.L.VATSON
-SV
uM
YRDMD
r
MJ-
DOOR
DRAVING
54, SW&
6
CORPORATION
TXTLLj
NONE
=6-10748
mmn
N/A
-2
6
'2
verhead Door
Corporation 625
Series StormtiteTM
doors are considered the
finest insulated rolling service doors in the industry.
They are ideally suited to a
wide variety of applications
where strength and energy
efficiency are factors.
Common applications
include industrial warehouses, factories, distribution
celztms and vehicle mainten;: i-e garages.
f---\
\\I)
II c-i-c
no environmentally
HCFCs.
These compounds
compounds
Overhead
Door Corporation
testing culminated
,iOOD
CFCs or
and polystyrene
took immediate
insu-
that these
action. Extensive
of the advanced
to be totally
research
polyurethane
and
foam insu-
HCFCs.
POLAR
r-l
I
DOVE
BUCKSKIN
GRAY
DARK
CRIMSON
CANARY
GUIDES
Guides of structural steel angle are
weatherstripped with a vinyl weatherseal at each jamb.
of polyurethane
CUSTOM
DESIGN
625 St>ries doors are computer
desi:,:ned to fit your specific requirements.
CURTAIN
Roll-formed
curtain
slats are interlocking
and !ullv foamed-inplace with polyurethane insulation.
damaging
that
were damaging
in the introduction
625
a product
f EATURES
NO CFCs or HCFCs
Our unique polyurethane
foam Ai;-,
lation contains no environmentally
damaging CFCs or HCFCs.
contains
manufacturing
Door Corporation
FOREST
TANGERINE
GREEN
BRONZE
PATRIOT
BLUE
OVERHEAD
DOOR
CORPORATION
625
,F--
S T 0 R M T 1 T E TM
INSULATED
SERIES
SERVI
Approvaldoesnot relievesuppUeror
subcontractorof his obligationto
furnishand/orinsW this materMin
accardance
with requirements
of the
ContractutipIansmdspetiicztionS.
OVERHEAD
DOOR
CORPORATION
PART
1 GENERAL
PART 2 PRODUCT
2.01 Curtain
Curtain slats will be interlocking, roll-formed,
fully foamed-in-place, insulated, flat profile,
type F-2651. The front and back slats shall be
fabricated from minimum 24 gauge galvanized
steel, per ASTM A-525. Endlocks will be
attached to each end of alternate slats to prevent lateral movement.
2.02 Bottom Bar
The bottom bar will be two prime-painted steel
angles, minimum thickness l/8, bolted back
to back to reinforce the curtain in the guides,
and will. have a bottom weatherseal. (Optional
bottom bars in galvanized steel, stainless steel
and aluminum, as the project requires.)
2.03 Guides
Guides will be three (3) structural steel angles
with a minimum thickness of 3/16. Guides
will be weatherstripped with a vinyl weatherseal at each jamb, on the exterior curtain
side. (Interior curtain side weatherseal is an
option.) Guides will be equipped with windlock bars as required to meet the minimum
design windload of 20 PSF. (Greater windload
designs are available as options on request.)
(As an option, guides are a\-ailable in galvanized, aluminum and stainless steel material.)
2.06 Hood
The hood will be minimum 24 gauge galvanized steel. (Heavier steel gauges and aluminum or stainless steel material are available
options.) Intermediate supports will be furnished to support the hood where required on
wider openings. The hood will be supplied
with an internal hood baffle weatherseal.
(Lintel weatherseals are optional.)
2.05 Counterbalance
The counterbalance \*ill be helical torsion
springs designed for standard 20,000 cycles.
(Optional cycle designs are available, such as
50,000 or 100,000). The counterbalance is
housed in a steel tube or pipe barrel, supporting the curtain with a deflection limited to .03
per foot of span (width). The counterbalance
will be adjusted by means of an adjusting tension wheel.
2.09 Finish
Curtain slats and hood shall be galvanized per
ASTM A-525 and shall receive a rust-inhibitive, roll-coating process, including bonderizing, baked-on prime paint to be .2 mils thick,
and a baked-on polyester top coat to be .6 mils
thick. All non-galvanized exposed ferrous surfaces will receive one coat of rust-inhibitive
primer. All aluminum will be furnished in a
mill finish (both clear and bronze anodized finishes are available options.) All stainless steel
material will be furnished in a 2B mill finish.
(#4 finish is an available option.) (OHD
ColorSpec optional powder coating finish.)
2.07 Operation
Manual chain hoist is standard. (Electric motor
and crank operation are optional.)
Overhead Door Corporation
recommends the
installation
ofa reversing
safety edge to all electrically opera fed commercial doors. lf a reversing edge
is not chosen, the operator musf be insta22ed z&h a
constant coilfacf control szuitch.
2.08 Locking
Manual chain hoist operated doors shall have
chain keeper locks suitable for padlocking by
otheis. (Cylinder locks are optional.
Manufacturers standard cylinder is supplied
or masterkeyed cylinder may be furnished by
others.)
When
electric
c@der
nzoto~
and/or
operafion
is chosen,
and
TRADE
SERIES,
NAME,
MODEL
Common
Project
PART
3 EXECUTION
3.01 Installation
The rolling service doors shall be installed in
accordance with Overhead Door Corporation
instructions and standards. Installation
will be
by authorized Overhead Door Corporation
representatives.
when
inter-
STORMTITE
Types
and
Uses
Industrial
warehouse,
INSULATED
625, UFN
factory,
distribution
center, vehicle
Operation
Wall
2.04 Brackets
Brackets will be 3/16 min. hot-rolled steel
plates to support the counterbalance, curtain,
and hood. (Galvanized steel plate is an available option.)
Available
Mounting
Windload
Condition
Face-of-wall,
20 PSF
Design
Curtain
F-2651 insulated
Bottom
Optional
Bar Design
features
shown
in italics
(foamed-in-place)
seals
steel slats
for steel and masonry
,rr~,
Interlock Switch-Provided
chain hoist.
with the
Brake-Solenoid-actuated
standard
drum and shoe-type with 3 ft-lb of
braking. Prevents coasting and
ensures that door will stop and hold in
any position. Stops on floor for good
weather seal. No adjustment required.
,i Reversing Contactor-Heavy-duty
for
long life; electrically and mechanically
interlocked.
r: Control Circuit-24V
three-button
OPEN-CLOSE-STOP
control. Other
voltages available. (Not shown.)
.
Limit Switches-Adjustable
rotarytype with vernier adjustment. Remains
synchronized with door during chain
hoist operation. Allows easy addition
of extra switches for accessory
controls.
torque
Mounting
TOP-OF-HOOD
Daty,-)
MOUN
HEADROOM
18 l/4 - h HP
19 74 - 1 HP
21-2HP
ABOVE
TOP OF
1 HP
2HP
12,
FACE VIEW
RIGHT SIDE
11 1 FACE VIEW
RIGHT SIDE MOUNT
RIGHT
SIDE
MOUNT
18 - 2 HP
ONT-OF-HOOD
RIGHT
SIDE
MOUNT
MOUNT
HP
P
RIGHT
RIGHT
SIDE
,
.
I.%.
E Standard
SIDE
MOUNT
MOUNT
Voltages
Push-Button
Control
Stations
Programmable
Timer
Light
Package
Control
Systems
~Ed.rw..
/
;; :h~i,a?az
Consistent with our policy of conti
without notice or obligation. LIMITED WARRANTY. All Overhead Door Corporation products are sold with a one-year
limited warranty for workmanship, materials, and installation by the distributor of The OVERHEAD DOOR.
FormA-802,2192
0 1992Overhead
DoorCorporation
Printedin USA
. .
D NOTES:
t.
2.
..
A V E R A G E DOOR T R A V E L S P E E D I S I " P E R S E C O N D .
PLEASE VERIFY VOLTAGE, PHASE h MOUNTING.
5.
6.
HAND
C H A IN
O F 1 2 " S H O U L D B E A L L O W E D FOR A C C E S S
TO E L E C T R I C A L BOX.
CONTROL VOLTAGE I S 2 4 V . U N L E S S O T H E R W I S E S T A T E D .
E L E C T R I C A L B O X MAY B E L O C A T E D O N O P P O S I T E S I D E .
A CLEARANCE
FACE VIEW
R I G H T S I D E MOUNT
RIGHT S I D E YOU#l
OPERATOR
ARCH I T E C T
DOOR
QTY
FACTORY
ORDER
NUMBER
I RQB
I
MOUNT
BENCH o F T i t o D
ofFRiiXD W A L L
SIDE
CENTER DRAWBAR
PHASE
VOLTS
HAND
115 I 2 0 8
230 I460
?VLF\&
? 7 5 SINGLE THREE
L!Ea Fq
Q-, F;
c:
C O N T R O L S T A T I O N Sag3 BUTTON
KEY
SWITCH
E:TiurF
MODEL R D B
FLTG
- WAL'L
Enel$5
MOUNT ( A B O V E S H A F T )
NOTES:
1 . CLEARANCES SHOWN ARE
. .
- _ I
I ,
I-
"""1
.
I
DRIVE
TENSION
END
EM)
BRACKET
REMOVABLE
STOPS
7 I -.
GUIDE
- 4
CURTAIN-.
HEAD
(STANDARD]
WEATHERSEAL
Z+
BOTTOM
BAR
\--QVC
SECTION 2-2
WEATHERSTRIP
O P E N I N G WIDTH
SLAT DETAIL
OPENING' WIDTH
n DTM.
AVfRACf
OOOR
PLrAsc
LLL
)I
70
OPYIONALS
II
hIAL1
YOUNT
BRACKET
W----l-
- -H:---- --Y
I-
H~AoPLAlE
FACE
RIGHT
I I
l0r.a
VIEW
SIOt
I \,
YOUNl
I \I
SlZf
-----5If
1111
OF
flCClRlCAL
ELEC,RlCIL
SPEED
VOLTACE.
CLfARAICf
COYTROL
_---
TRAVEL
YERlfY
17
11
IS
PHASC
*DOtO
SHOULD
PER
SfCOID.
YOUYYIHC.
COZY.
Bf
ALLOWfO
OR
lccr*s
BOX.
VOLIAEE
BOX
1s
AI
2,v.
BE
RLCSS
LOCCTEO
OIHfR*ISC
0
OPPOSlTE
STl,fO.
SIOE.
OPENING WIDTH
DIM.
STORMTITE
INSULATED
MODEL
UW
APPENDIX
UNIT
KenmOre
OWNERs
M!WUAL
AIR CONDJTiONERS
Contents
Safety
m-m
instructions
Operating
instructions
1
Page
Safety instructions
....................... .2
Operating instructions
................. 2
Starting your air conditioner ........... .2
Fan control settings ........................ .3
The power saver switch ................... 3
The vent control.. ............................ .3
.3
Filter monitor ..................................
Changing air direction .................... .3
.3
Super Thrust ...................................
Cleaning and caring for your air
conditioner
.4
................................
Cleaning the front panel ................. .4
Cleaning the air filter ...................... .4
Annual maintenance for your air
4
conditioner ...................................
Repairing paint damage .................. 5
Energy saving tips .......................... .5
If you need service or assistance
6
Sears Kenmore automatic air
conditioner
warranty.. ............... .6
We service what we sell ............... .6
0 1994 Sears, Roebuck and Co.
Slide-out
fr--\
Control
panel cover
direction
4-way air
louvers
I\
safety
instructions
I
.
San confroi
The power
settings
saver
swkh
=:be
1 :1 ..zi
3onitor
OFF
COOL
The air
running
settings
MED
FAN
OFF
FILTER
MONITOR
NoRMAL
lo
settings
HEAT
f-
COOL
a
MED
COOL
CLOSED
Changing
air direction
Right/left
tab
Up/down
tab
OPEN
VENT
l
l
CLOSED
OPEN
Super
VENT
To circulate
room air
l Set Vent
Control to CLOSED.
l Set Fan Control
to desired setting.
l Set Temp
Control to desired
setting.
Thrust
Cleaning
and caring
Cleaning
3eaning
the front
panel
Ar!nual maintenance
ycur air conditioner
for
Electrical
Shock, Product
Damage, and Personal
Injury Hazard
l Unplug
power cord from
receptacle
before performing
any maintenance.
Be sure no
liquid gets into the motor,
electrical control box, or
compressor
electrical terminals.
l
Do not lift, push, or pull on any
white beaded foam (expanded
polystyrene)
parts.
l Because
your air conditioner
weighs from 145 to 190
pounds, it is recommended
that you have someone
help
you when you remove and
reinstatl your unit and that you
both use proper lifting techniques.
l Handle
the air conditioner
with
care. Watch out for the sharp
metal fins on the front and rear
coils.
l Do not
use the collected water
for drinking
purposes.
It is not
sanitary.
Failure to follow the above
precautions
could result in
electrical
shock, product damage, or personal
injury.
To further add to the value of your air
conditioner, buy a Sears maintenance agreement.
Rqairing
paint
damage
-..
Energy
l
saving
tips
If you neecl
service
or assistance
-T
.,
l
,Je
sugges:
these
3.-.
f;llc:,l,
steps:
l
l
Air conditioner
wont run:
Is unit plugged into a live circuit with
proper voltage?
Is unit turned on?
Is Temp Control set correctly?
Has a household fuse blown or a
circuit breaker tripped?
Has the local power failed?
l
l
-Droplets
of water httting the condenser. causing a pinging or
clicking sound. Water droplets
help to cool the condenser.
-Air movement from the fan. especially on high fan speed setting.
-Clicks
from the thermostat cycle.
Sounds also may be caused by house
construction
- such as vibration of the
unit due to wall construction
or
unsteady window mounting area.
Operating
sounds:
When your room air conditioner is
operating
normally, you will hear
sounds such as:
l
I
-
s&s
FULL
Kenmore
ONE
YEAR
automatic
WARRANTY
air conditioner
ON ROOM
AIR
warranty
CONDITIONER
For one year from date of purchase, when the Room Air Conditioner is operated and maintained for normal room
cooling according to the owners instructions attached to, or furnished with, the product, Sears will repair the
Room Air Conditioner free of charge, if defective in materials or workmanship.
The customer pays for:
A. Service calls to:
1. Correct the installation of a Room Air Conditioner if it was not installed by Sears.
2. _Replace house fuses or correct house wiring.
3. Clean or replace the filter.
B. Damage to the Room Air Conditioner caused by accident, misuse, fire, flood, or acts of God.
FULL
FIVE
YEAR
WARRANTY
ON SEALED
REFRIGERATION
SYSTEM
For five years from date of purchase, when the Room Air Conditioner is operated and maintained for normal room
cooling according to the owners instructions attached to, or furnished with, the product, Sears will repair the sealed
system (consisting of refrigerant, connecting tubing, and compressor motor) free of charge, if defective in materials or
workmanship.
WARRANTY
SERVICE IS AVAILABLE
BY CONTACTING
THROUGHOUT
THE UNITED STATES.
THE NEAREST
SEARS
STORE
OR SERVICE
CENTER
This warranty applies only while this product is in use in the United States.
This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state.
SEARS, ROEBUCK
AND CO., B/817 WA, Hoffman Estates, IL 60195
We service
what
we sell
trained technicians
professional
REPAIR
PARTS
LIST
Model No.
106.9741971
Kenmord
AIR CONDITIONER
Depending
on your
model,
the model
conditioner
is found
on
serial
front
of the
base
pan
the
or
plate
evaporator
front assembly
number
of your
located
cover
on
air
the
by removing
cabinet.
All
To Call
Toll Free
For Parts:
l-800-366-PART
(l-800-366-7278)
For Service:
l -800-4-REPAIR
(l-800-473-7247)
repair
purchase
or
parts
listed
are
special
order
when
Sears
Service
Sears
stores. To order
parts number
Center,
available
you
or the Service
parts
by
for
visit
immediate
your
Department
phone,
call
nearest
at most
the
toll
free
When
requesting
provide
the following
service
or
ordering
parts,
always
information:
+ Product Type
+ Model Number
+ Part Number
+ Part Description
i
s.
Sears, Roebuck
12-95 Printed In U.S.A. (tlf)
Estates,
IL 60179 U.S.A.
UNIT PARTS
For Model: 106.9741971
16
/
Literature
41
i
48
1168222
Parts
UNIT PARTS
ForModek106.9741971
,.-..
I
Illus.
No.
Part
No.
1
UT1 161324
UT1 166163
LIT1168228
UT1168222
UT1 166070
2
708532
708531
4
5
49599
1163768
1161269
~161359
i
10
160870
160672
166222
160408
11
illus.
DESCRIPTION
LITERATURE PARTS
Wiring Diagram
Owners Manual
Tech Sheet
Repair Parts List
Instructions,
Installation
Bend, Return
Condenser (17)
Evaporator (13)
Bend, Return
Condenser (6)
Evaporator (8)
Strainer, Tube
Tube, Outlet
(Includes Illus. 4)
Tube,
Restrictor (4)
Blade, Fan
(Condenser)
Seal, Suction Tube
Bracket, Fan Motor
Motor, Fan
Nut
No.
Part
No.
602851
1161297
950037
1158703
DESCRIPTION
Tie, Cable
Evaporator
Gasket, Nut
Tube,
Connect
1161519
Condenser
1156329
Bend Return
Condenser (1)
Evaporator (6)
1161523
Base
1 159489
Coil, Solenoid
1 164497
Harness, Wiring
1161296
Compressor
950021
Grommet (3)
1158685
Return Bend
3-Way
858121
Locknut (3)
950035
Gasket, Terminal
Cover
950036
Cover, Terminal
950027
Nut, Terminal
Cover
116 1358 Wheel, Blower
rotor)
Pa
1158692
Ben $ , Return (1)
1 15868 1 Manifold, Suction
Illus.
No.
Part
No.
1 165674
947364
:67
DESCRIPTION
Bolt, Compressor
Tube, Flow
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
471088
647971
1160656
1157015
1163775
1166782
642080
1160880
1 163785
45
1 163759
Divider (2)
Clam
Han&, Base
Pan, Drain
CIip, Motor (2)
Clamp, Wiring
Anticipator
Clip, Anticipator
Washer (3)
Distributor4 Circuit
I+K;: Restrictor
1162398
1160357
1160358
1 164499
1 162089
1162955
1163907
1161271
1 16 1416
V!Ive, Reversing
Tube, Feeder
Tube, Feeder
Tube Valve/Disc.
Tube-Valve/Cond
Tube-VaIve/Evap.
Tube-VaIve/Accum
Tube, Connect
Seal, Tubing (2)
REFRIGERANT
CHARGE
43 oz.
1168222
AIRFLOW
AND CONTROL
PARTS
Forhlodel:106.9741971
16
1168222
AIRFLOW
AND CONTROL
PARTS
Part
No.
1157403
1160715
1160652
1160653
1163469
1160510
488480
1157407
856094
60509
67648
61504
80126
676 11
63332
60716
1164511
950529
1160709
1161707
1166169
1161333
1158732
1161706
488624
1157749
1 162616
1 16 1705
489092
647882
647879
488734
1160657
1161313
854369
1167522
1161714
1 164516
1 159905
1160710
1157158
1159175
1162061
1155801
1160684
DESCRIPTION
Shroud, Condenser
Heatin
Element
Door, Er
Spring, Door
Screw #8 - 5/8
Fuse, Link
Screw #8-318
Top, Condenser
Wire, Ground
Limit,.Switch
Cable, A iiance
Control, 8 aft
Capacitor
Bracket, Capacitor
Seal,
Condenstate Cup
Sheild,, Heat,
Clip, Shroud (2)
Switch-S&din
Evap. Shrou cc?Top
Panel, Control
Support, Unit (2)
W$esIontroL
Seal, Shroud
Dividing Wall
Screw, 8x3/8
Switch Rotary
Seal, Anti-Rub
Shroud Assembly,
Evaporator
Screw 7-l 8 x 5/8
Cam, Exhaust
Bushing, Shaft
Screw,
6-32 x .175 (2)
Housing, Air
Washer
$hk$ntroi
Harness, Wiring Control Box
Control Box (R.S.)
Control Box (L.S.)
Control, Temp.
Cover, Top
Screw #8 x 3/8
Spacer
Harness, Heater
Control,
Temperature
Cup, Condensate
1168222
No.
:
No.
1161335
469877
488480
DESCRIPTION
Cabinet
f;;ket,
Meeting
Screw,
8 x l/2
1 1608 18 Insulation,
Cabinet
Side
2)
1167203
Insulation,
Co b .
1160768
Seal, Cabinet
(Bottom)
1 165934
Monitor,
Filter
1165926
Frame,
Front
1162099
Insulation,
Cabinet
Side (2)
486529 Nut, Hex 8-32
644271 Angle, Top
Mounting
Illus.
No.
Part
No.
855265
1163784
1166387
1163767
1 165933
1167096
997285
1 166672
1 162077
1 165927
1 165928
1 167305
1168222
DESCRIPTION
Seal, Cabinet
Top
Seal, Top
Mounting
Angle
Bag Accessory
Sea/ (3)
Control,
Door
Louver,
Vertical
Cup, Condensate
Drain
Link, Horizontal
Louver
Link, Vertical
Louver
(2)
Louver,
Horizontal
Louver,
Horizontal
(Handle
Left)
Front,
Complete
lllus.
No.
24
25
28
29
is
:6
38
Part
No.
1 165929
DESCRIPTION
Louver,
Horizontal
(Handle
Right)
Louver,
Horizontal
1165930
(Notch
Left)
1 165931
(Notch
Right)
1 162078
Actuator,
Vertical
Louver
(2)
1 167297
Filter
1167095
Spring,
Detent
(2)
857022
Wire,
Ground
A88234 Screw, 8-32 x l/4
1 16591
1 Plate, Escutcheon
470036
Spacer,
Escuthchon
1165998
Knobs,
(3)
OPTlONAL
799833
3
:
6
505168
479502
10943
99243
876764
978025
978026
978027
978028
7
978029
978030
978865
8
10875
242820
242825
242826
47261
299885
9
47263
8 13684
10
279368
11
485426
12
212643
13
99344
14
YJ -11
484066
484067
484069
15
484184
8 136 10
Epoxy,
Tube
(Aluminum
Repair)
Tape, No Drip 30
To e, Viny/ 36
Oi P, Turbine
1 Oz.
Oil, Turbine
8 Oz.
Valve,
Access
3/ 16 Tube O.D.
l/4
Tube O.D.
5/l 6 Tube O.D.
3/8
Tube O.D.
l/2
Tube O.D.
5/8
Tube O.D.
3/4
Tube O.D.
Seal, Ring
Access Valve
(20~Pack)
Wire,
25RoiI
Blue 16 Go.
Black 14 Go.
Red 14 Go.
White
14 Go.
Black 12 Go.
Red 12 Go.
White
12 Ga.
Adhesive,
Insulation
(24 Oz. Spray)
Adhesive,
Insulation
(2 Oz. Tube)
Paint, Touch-up
Starlight
Gray
l/2
Pint {Lacquer)
Sealer,
Permagum
4- 1" Strips
~ea$rLPermagum
r
Cover,
Winter
28"xl9"x3 1
19xl2x14
27"xl9"x6 to 27
22xl5x3
to 18
Retainer,
Cord
(Winter
Cover)
1168222
INSTALLATION
PARTS
WINDOW
MOUNTING
KITS
Lo,,,,,,,-,,,,--,,,
Illus.
Part
No.
No.
1
z
4
5
1162 147
469877
1166388
855265
649945
;
9
1:
488808
486009
486035
649946
649947
14
1166266
644228
487371
15
488624
1168222
DESCRIPTION
Kit, Standard
Installation
Seal, Meeting
Gasket, Sash
Strip, Seal
488750 Bql!,
,F==+
-----
Rail
_ , __.
Illus.
No.
Part
No.
16
1;
19
644271
644272
995274
1166265
20
485679
21
644283
22
644284
23
644285
24
64428
25
485856
26
27
856979
470800
- - DESCRIPTION
Angie (Top)
Angie (2)
Spacer, Block (4)
Screw (Side Angle
To Filler Board)
Kit, Outside
SUPp0r-i
Support,
Cabinet (2)
Extension,
Support (2)
Retainer,
Cabinet (2)
I Bracket,
Support
Kit, Wide
I. Window
Strip, Seal
Seal,
Meeting Rail
Illus.
No.
Part
No.
28
485457
29
470168
Following
DESCRIPTION
Gasket,
Sash (54)
Sealer, Gum Type
Parts
LITERATURE
UT1 166072
UT1 155965
LIT485707
Not
Illustrated
PARTS
Instructions,
Installation
&mdord
Mounting
I
Instructions,
Installation
(Wide Window Kit)
Instructions,
lnstollotion
(Kq;ltside Support
i
Kenmore
REPAIR
PARTS
LIST
or replacement
l -800-366PART
.(l-800-366-7278)
When
requesting
or ordering
always
parts,
provide
following
service
the
information:
Product
Type
Model
Part Number
Part Description
Number
Sears, Roebuck
of a
l-800-488- 1222
For information
Maintenance
about
on purchasing
Agreement
an existing
a Sears
or to inquire
Agreement
l-800-827-6655
Estates,
IL 60179 U.S.A.
Kenmore
hstallation
Instructions
IMPORTANT:
hklkr:
klVe
hStdatiOn
tnstructions
with the homeowner,
kmeowner:
Keep Installation
Instructions
for future reference
Save htallation
Instructions
for local electrical
inspectors
use,
Grounded
electrical
outlet
reach of the power supply
required.
See Electrical
requirements.
Before you
start...
:I
Proper installation
is your respon:ibility, Make sure you have
every-thing necessary for correct
installation.
It is the customers
responsibility
to comply with the
installation
specifications
provided.
Through-the-Wall
within
cord is
Electrical Shock Hazard
it is the customers
responsibility:
. To contact a qualified
electrical
installer.
l
To assure that the electrical
installation
is adequate
and
in conformance
with
National Electrical Code,
ANSVNFPA 70 - latest
edition,
and ail local
codes and ordinances.
Failure to do so could result in
fire, electrical shock or other
personal injury.
Important:
Observe all
governing codes and
ordinances.
lrytallation
Personal injury/Product
Damage Hazard
l
Because of the weight and
size of the air conditioner,
more than one person is
required to move, lift and
safely install it.
l
Handle air conditioner
with
care. Metal fins on front
and rear coils are sharp.
l
Do Not drink the water that
collects inside the air
conditioner.
it is not
sanitary.
l
Maintain a firm hold on the
air conditioner
to prevent it
from failing out of opening
during installation.
l
Do Not locate air
conditioner
where cabinet
front is exposed to a heat
source that raises the
surface temperature
above
120F.
Failure to follow these
instructions could result in
personal injury or damage io
air conditioner.
minimum
opening size
4-
.
gep:uhs
-.
thickness of
-D
1_
19&;-W: tL$
thickness of
wood used to
build frame
.y-.
Electrical outlet
must be available
within the reach of
Window
Do Not use an
extension cord.
Installation
A window
large enough
. Adequate
wall support
weight of air conditioner
l
for
An electrical
outlet within
reach of the power supply
cord
Free movement
of air to
rooms to be cooled.
1S8an
n cord.
Page 2
Tools and
materials needed
,fbr indahtion:
Through-the-wall
installations:
0 wood presetvcitive
l
10, #10x 1 screws
Parts su lied
for inst E tion:
EIectrkaI
requirements
W&g
requirements
min.-253
max.)
metal
screws
x0 A,8
hex-head,
metal screws
6
3/iround-head
bolts
,nlnstallation
parts are supplied for
double-hung
windows up to 40
t
tiide. Installation
up to 54 can be
made with a special, wide
window kit available
from your
Sears store or service center.
/
handle
model
serial
and
label
Page 3
Recommended
method
grounding
appropriate
header if ,required
J1
lintel
Floor Damage
Remove air conditioner
from
carton and place on
cardboard.
Failure to do so may cause
damage
to floor covering.
alternate
construction
for plaster
Provide l-3/16
clearance
ford
power supply cord
entry on left side.
l-3/16
power
clearance
supplycard.
grounding
..,:.a.
f&
Brick Veneer
Construction
nzscrew
..
.r
Now start...
With air conditioner
fiwill
be installed.
in room where
n Pull on handle; slide air
conditioner
out of cabinet
and place on cardboard.
( iii
OPPfOPrtate header
if required.
2,
Diniension
depends on
wall
thickness
and type of
molding.
the wall.
ice for
SuPPly
cord.
Frame Construction
Page 4
Property Damage
Check that air conditioner
cabinet is tilted to the outside so
that water will run to the outside.
Failure to do so may cause
damage
to floor covering or
wail.
9
opening
10
l
pc;f:ame,
screws
14
15
16
cabinet.
II
If needed,
install
n molding around room
side of cabinet.
cabinet
Place side-mounting
H anales on cabinet so
upright side is toward the front of
air conditioner
and seal is against
cabinet. Attach side-mounting
angles with two, hex-head,
metal
screws using l/4 socket and
socket wrench.
1 WINDOW INSTALLATION 1
12
\\
Floor Damage
Remove air conditioner
from
carton and place on
cardboard.
Failure to do so may cause
damage
to floor covering.
Remove grounding
screw
H and grounding
wire from
front of air conditioner
base. Save
grounding
screw for Step 20.
handle
Cnd Cabinet.
Page 5
I
/
11
12
82 1
lB1
Side View
/ tnn
angle
WI
-
I cabinet
Measure the
n distance
between the channel
edge and the filler board.
Cut foam blocks l/4
inch wider. Insert blocks
into channel behind
filler boards.
Top View
+I
I
I
+A1
cabinet
bont
I+
I
2
right
filler
board
I
I
I
I
,I
left
filler
board
Page 6
filler
10
13
Property Damage
Check that air conditioner
cabinet is tilted to the
outside so that water will run
to the outside.
Failure to do so may cause
damage
to floor covering,
window sill or wall.
Screws must be
on both sides.
14
15
116a
i3ip
Place the
2-l/2 seal strip inside the cabinet
as shown. Make seal flush with
cabinet front edge. (This seal strip
fits between the air conditioner
base and the cabinet.)
window
lock
21
19
17
rail
Secure vertical
n and anale supports
together.
Attach supports to
bottom of cabinet.
But Do Not
tiahten bolts at this time. Attach
wall rail to angle supports. Slide
each support assembly toward
house until wall rail is positioned
firmly against wall.
Note: If your house is constructed
of material that could be damaged by wall-mounting
support,
fasten a board between wall rail
and house.
18
20
Page 7
is not
Part No.
0 1994
1166070
Sears,
Roebuck
Hoffman
Printed
in U.S.A.
APPENDIX
BATHROOM
FIXTURES
-.
l-%0-849-6331/ 9194.514331
Fax9194514371
P. 0. BOX 5218
CARY, N. C. 275124218
July
10, 1995
Project:
Rem., Site
Contractor:
OHM Remediation
Norcross,
GA
P.O.#:
1006496
Sales Rep:
Manufacturer:
Raywail
Reznor
;@%%
Electric
Services
6 and 82
Corp.
Products
L
HEATERS
--_I
BASEBOARDHEATER
1 - (Item #Q) HQC51212 baseboard electric
115/l/60,
with built
in t'stat.
heater,
1250 watts,
5 ft.
long,
draft,
115/l/60,
single
Model F-75 propane gas unit heater, natural
stage, 75 MBH input, 60 MBH ou.tput with 24 volt t'stat
and discharge
louver.
.'
.
L5
a:ohm.mo
I
\
,
.
To increur
customor
utlrrfaction
and &d&toe
Ed
tpicorporation
.
Installation
Heavy-Duty"
/--
& Operating
Instructions
t,.
. ..--
Lemtfl
an IH.
--.
nHoc(IoY
HOcS?2Y
noc6rM
Inatanabon
hstrum
. . . . . . . .. . .
. . . . . _ _ . ..24
s...................................*
fmubbz
Shooting
GuiOe
. ..
. . . . . . . . . . . . _ . .S
Limited Warranty _ _
._.__.._
UKrSGuidt.
..
.___ ::::.I..::
. .;z
no0611
HqCslS
Cl016
Pagt
.s6
1. WlRlNG MSTRUCTlDNS
Notr: 2 Md 3 hub)m M wind thru tfu bft hand wiring compartment onlyi All other ien(4. 5,6. 3. and 107 mey b
wired through lho bft or hght hand wiring compartment.
Refer to buwliltion and Wiring htruUions
furnished with the thermotut
PUmmti
for use with the BaseHeater.
All hums have bad wires that M futory spliced with wife connectors.
To cornp@o bmr mmtians,
s@iw ludt to line wires with line wire Connectors 8s shown In dirgmms. No wiring changes are
fwwimd in oppdte wiring compartment.
WIRING
DIAGRAM
RIGHT HAND CONNECTtON
(EXCEPT 2 AND 3 HEATERS)
THERMAL CufOm
1
ELEMENT
I I
I
GND LI K
LINE
i
y,Nf: GND
WIRING TWO HEATERS FROM SINGLE LINE SERVICE
J- JOItiING KlT BOCJK
THERMAL
CmDm
II
I Ii II
T
Ll L2
LINE
ELEMENT
LRACEWAY
I
ADAPTER
BDCRA
.
Heaters to be coilnectd must be on the se& oleetrical branch circuits l d must be connected in peraliel. Heetefs wired in series
wiJl not heU properfy. To connect two heaters, bring wiring into either one of Ute two adjoining wiring tompanments. Connect
tha hutm w6h joining kit (kit numtw BOCJK and *rib w instrucbons. lf fief8 wiring does not enter diredly into one of the
lwol djwnt compumrmta.a mcevmy fdwor. BOCRA Series must be used.
YPONTANTZ
. Do not m adjoining huters in series. Hr8ters mred in series will onfy reach 296 of normal temperature.
6. FlfULstEp:
A. Cfean off ail ~nstrubon
din l d oebns from the inside of the heater. Fatlure to do this will cause wall smudgmg.
B. Afier elf mnng to the thermostats an0 heaters hes been COmPleteO. turn on the elcctnc power at the clrcult breaker Panel.
3
TPI Corporafion
LIMITED
1
.
WARRANTY
Products manufactured by TPI Corporation are warranted to the original consumer to be free from
defects in material and workmanship for twelve (12) months from the original date of purchase. The
TPI warranty does not cover products modified outside our factory, damage or failure caused by acts
of God, abuse, misuse, use on other than rated voltage, abnormal usage, faulty installation, failure to
provide suggested maintenance procedures enclosed with the product. Improper maintenance or any
repairs other than these provided by an authorized TPI Corporation service center.
THERE ARE NO OBLIGATIONS OR LIABILITIES ON THE PART OF TPI CORPORATION FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT OR OTHER INDIRECT DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO LOSS OF
PROPERTY, REVENUES, OR PROFIT, OR COSTS OF REMOVAL, INSTALLATION OR REINSTALLATION.
ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES WITH RESPECT TO TPI PRODUCTS, INCLUDING IMPLIED WARRANTIES FOR MERCHANTABILITY AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES FOR FITNESS, ARE LIMITED IN
DURATION TO TWELVE (12) MONTHS FROM ORIGINAL DATE OF PURCHASE, EXCEPT THOSE
PRODUCTS OR PARTS OF PRODUCTS WHICH ARE WARRANTED FOR LONGER PERIODS. ON
SUCH PRODUCTS
OR PARTS OF PRODUCTS
ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES
FOR MERCHANTABILITYAND
FITNESS ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE EXTENDED WARRANTY
PERIOD THEREON.
Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages and some
states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so the above exclusions or limitations may not apply to you.
During the warranty period, TPI Corporation will, at its sole option, repair or replace any defective parts
or products returned, freight prepaid, to the TPI Corporation factory or such other location as TPI
Corporation may designate. Returned products must be packaged carefully and TPI Corporation shall
not be responsible for damage in transit. When returning parts, the owner must provide the model
number of the product and nature of difficulty being experienced. This warranty does not obligate TPI
Corporation to bear the cost of labor in replacing any assembly, unit or component part thereof, nor
does the company assume any liability for secondary charges, expenses for installing or removal,
Freight or damages. There will be charges rendered for product repairs made after our warranty period
has expired. Proof of purchase, including date, must accompany request for in-warranty service. In any
event, TPI Corporations maximum liability shall not in any case exceed the list price for the product
claimed to be defective. This warranty gives to you specific legal rights and you may have other rights
which may vary from state to state. For the name of your nearest authorized TPI Corporation service
center, please write to TPI Corporation, P.O. Box 4973, Johnson City, Tennessee, 37602.
In addition to the Limited Warranty stated above covering general.products, TPI Corporation extends
this warranty on the following listed products, which are warranted to the original consumer.from the
original date of purchase for the total time periods indicated herein below:
HEATING
1;:~~~
PRODUCTS
Fr
VENTILATION
PRODUCTS
1 ,Z!:
Seri~eri~
;;FGrt;y
GV
Fans,f!, 1
HUMPHREY
MECHANICAL,
2421AN.MARINEBLVD..JACKSOMrILLE,NC2
October
5, 1995
Northeast
Construction
Co.,
Post Office
Box 548
Jacksonville,
NC 28541-0548
Inc.
ATT :
Mr.
REF:
OHM Remediation
Project
MCB, Camp Lejeune,
North Carolina
Contract
No. N62470-93-D-3032
SUB:
Fixture
Dear Mr.
WW~E~H
INC.
LU
n
NO EXCEPTIONS
Tom Delong
submittals
Delong:
5s~
lHF=v
@50.p-%q'\-;;o~~pp-l--rtp,nS,
-6 La-d.
A.(3D
c OMmO-oE
zqhrqhER
-0+&q
zzrj==-z
-&a= pfjlCOWE P To 'Aalzm
Sincerely,
HUMPHREY MECHANICAL,
Chuck Steed
Project
Manager
CS/ln
INC.
CADETTM
D FRONT/ELONGATED
11 1.6 10R
7OILEI
10 ROUGHING
'CADETmII
- VITREOUS CHINA
1.6 10" R
Vitreous china
10 roughing-in
. Round front or elongated siphon action bowl
Close-coupled tank
Speed Connect TM tank/bowl coupling system
2 bolt caps
Flushes on 1.6 gallons
l
l
l
l
l
l
CADET II RF 1.6 10 R
0 2164.010
Round front toilet [254mm (10)
3054.018 Bowl
4010.010 Tank
roughing]
CADET II EL 1.6 10 R
ci
2174.010
Nominal Dimensions:
Round Front: 673 x 473 x 762mm
{26-l/2 x 18-98" x 30")
Eionoated: 724 x 473 x 762mm
(28-l/2" x 18-5i8"x 30")
To Be Specified
a
Color:
Seat: American Standard kS324.019 (elongated or k5322.011 (round front) Rise and
Shine (with easy to clean lift-off hinge system)
solid plastic ciosed front seat with cover.
See page TBU-001.
Seat: American Standard GS311 .012 (elongated or n5308.014 (round front) Laurel
molded closed front seat with cover.
See page TBU-001.
Cl
Alternate
TBU-038
Seat:
NOTES:
* DIMENSION
SHOWN
FCR LOCATiCN
CF SUPPLY IS
THIS MMSINATICN
IS CES:GNEC) T O XUGH-IN
AT X
(107 FROM FINISHED
WALL T O C,L Ci CUTLET.
SUPPLY NOT INCLUDED
WITH FIXXRE
AN0 MUS -I tE
IMPORTANT:
Oimansions
01 tixtures are nommal and may
established
by ANSI Standard
Al 12.192.
These measurements
are wbpct
:o oanpe
or cancella;cn.
of superseded
or voided saps.
SpS 216412174.010
SUGGESTED.
MINIMUM
DIMENSION
CF 30SMM
ORDE.?ED SE?ARATELY.
vary wllhln the range Of lOleraI7Zs
No reswnsubilily
is a?.sumed
fO( Use
WALL-HUNG
PENLYN
LAVATORY
VITREOUS CHINA
t
PENLYN
l
l
l
l
WALL-HUNG
LAVATORY
Vitreous china
Front overflow
Integral back splash
Faucet ledge.
Shown with 4801.862 Amariiis Heritage
faucet with Triune Cross handles
(not included)
Q
u
0
m
Dimensions:
(18 x 157/8)
457 x 403mm
Bowl sizes:
340mm (13-3/8) wide,
216mm (8-l/2) front to back,
127mm (5) deep
Fixture Dimensions
Al.1 2.19.2
To Ee Specified
Faucet:
Faucet Finish:
Supplies:
l-1 14 Trap:
13
Nipple:
Cl
* See faucet
section
for additional
models
avakole
NOTES:
l
0IMENS:CNS
SHOWN iCS LCCXTION
Cf SUPPLIES ANO -P- TRAP ARE SUGGESTSO.
PAOVIOE SUITABLE
REiNFCFCEMENT
FOR AU WALL SUPPORTS.
FiTflNGS
NOT INCLUDE3
AhO MUST BE CROERED
SE.=SRATELY.
IMPORTANT:
01mens1or.s c: bores
are nommal and may ~/a~ w+thtn rhe rance cf :oierances
eslablished
by ANSI Stancard Al :2.19.2.
Tnese measurements
are sqec
:o change 01 camllac~an.
No respxsbklity
is assumed for use
01 superseded
or voided %$es.
SPS 0372fo373
_ a^-^ .__ .__ c.___.
AV-054
TWO-HANDLE
CENTERSET
WITH CONVENTIONAL
LAVATORY
FAUCET
INSTALLED
DRAIN
HANDLES
MODEL NUMBER:
q
5402.102H
Centerset
Lavatory
Faucet
cl 5402.102V Centerset
Lavato
Faucet
5402.112H
Centerset
Lavatory
Faucet
5402.142H
Centerset
Lavatory
Faucet
5402.142V
Centerset
Lavatory
Faucet
5402.152H
Centerset
Lavatory
Faucet
5402.152V
Centerset
Lavatory
Faucet
5402.172H
Centerset
Lavatory
Faucet
5402.172V
Centerset
Lavato
Faucet
q
q
q
J
q
cl
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION:
P-x
* [ SUGGESTED
Pi-
0.13.
I ON PRODUCT
.i
@ ,
-5-3/8
OR i/Z
CoNNECT
FEATURES:
SPECIFICATION:
4 centerset lavatory faucet shall be cast brass construction with all brass shank nuts and coupling nuts. All
brass components In contact wrth water su ply shall contain no more than 3% lead content by werght. Shall
also feature l/4 turn washertess ceramic dpISC valve cartridges that are reversible for use with round or lever
handles. Fitting shall be American Standard Model # ---*-*
Product
names
lietad
@American
Standard
herain
are
Inc. 1992
credamarta
of Amwicsn
Standard
Inc.
P-HANDLE
CENTERSET
COMM / INST
l-3
TWO-HANDLE
CENTERSET
WITH CONVENTIONAL
LAVATORY FAUCET
k.. _
CODES AND STANDARDS
These products meet or exceed the following
codes and standards:
ASTM
~~~~;;~18.1
NSF14
torque for valve cartridge is less
Operatin
than AN 8 I Al 12.18.1 M requirements.
FLOWRATE*
.-
. . . . . * a*y,St..
- ._ <:: _ .-___ f ;.
-,
_a ! ,,;.
ijl&jels.
With this luxury and an array of safety/convenience group features, ycull enjoy years of
satisfaction
and trouble-free
performance.
..
rem4mbe.r. Mustee puts it all together!
Quality
Plumblng
SOLD
Products
E.L. MUSTEE
BY:
HARUWARE SCHENJLE
FOR
TOILET ACCESORIES-GROUND
RE!lEDIATION
HIJILDIMG
CAtiF' LEJEUNE,
GEKfsAL
NORTHEAST
WATER
M+G+ 28542
CONTRACTOR:
REfjISTEREf~
CONSTRUCTION
CC),
SUBi'!lTTEIf
B+A,
ARGHITEC?:
WOFT,
7412
BY:
INC,
(319)5?6-4446
A+G+C+ BLVD,
I
I
:
I
,
ARCHfTEGT
and
GENEF;AL CONTRACTOR
FLEASE
NOTE:
I
I
The hardware
will
he ordered
IMMEDIATELY
upon
:
nf an APPROVED Hardware
Schedule+
Subsequent
I4
will
be treated
QS on EXTRA md excess
hardware
:
be turned
over
to the owner+
ti
I
------------------------------------------------------------
receipt
changes
will
t
,I
t
f
:
t1
31
1I
I
DATE:
..
04;'20/35
04i21/?5
11:1l5 Ml
NOTES:
.
.
04/21/?5
,JOB HO,
HEADING
ITEti
I
1
1
2
EA
EA
EA
E~I
DR,
KESTTsti1l.01
MIRROR 750-2430
PAPEF; TOWEL ElISPENSER X50-15
TOILET PAPER HOLDER 5071
GRISE BAR 8!20-00142
a ENIS OF SCHEWLE
5254ST
TECHNICAL
DATA
8 Surface Mounted
0 C-Fold/Multi-Fold Towels
@ Tumbler Lock
.
When installed as sceciiied
below, unit meets Barrier-Free
requirements
(6) 3/4
oval
/
\
,H
/-\
:
.i
.I
112 I 1116
,(322 mm)
10 lY16
(275 mm)
:+:2
*/(lo2
mm)
mm)
j4
(102 mm)
!
51;27:
ifl40
mm)
CONSTRUCTION:
UNIT fabricated
of type 334 (188),
22 gauge stainless
steel with exposed
surfaces
in architectural
sa:in finish.
Smcah
csrners,
free of burrs and sharp edges.
Tumbler
lock keyed like other Bradley
units. Cabinet
hinsed at bottom to alfo*w easy filling.
Qfill
indicator
slot on face of cabinet.
Rolled edge on dispenser
opening.
CAPACITY
525 multi-fold
OPERATION:
Unit holds
INSTALLATION:
Secure
GUIDE
SPECIFICATION:
or 400 Cfold
multi-fold
or Cfofd
paper
towels.
towels
without
screws
(included)
use of special
at hcfes
adapter.
provided.
Surface
mounted
towel dispenser
shall be !at;ricated
of type 20-t (:8-8). 22 gauge stainless
steel ~i!h ex-,osed
surfaces in satin
capacih~ X.0 multi-fold
finish.
Refill indicator
on face of cabinet,
Tumbler
lock t0 secure hinsed front panel.
Towel d ;srzen;er
or 300 C-fold towels.
Overall
dimensions:
11 W x 15-S/6 H x 4 0.
Surface
Mounted
Towel DisPenaer
shall be Bradley
Mod01 250-15.
TECHNICAL
DATA
@ Con&oiled
Delivery-Rocking
Action
QB Single Roll (For Dual Roll See Model 5241)
:ONSTRUCTlON:
BRACKET
SPINDLE
CAPACITY:
Cne
OPERATION:
liemove
revolves
INSTALLATION:
Secure
fabrica:ed
fabricated
standard
core
polystyrene.
tissue
roll through
screws
Stainless
steel
spring.
5-1~2
in diameter.
t0ck;r.g mechanism
for SeriiCiRg.
cperakcn
and returns to cr@al
(included)
at holes
StOFS
on spino!e
control
parer
deli,;er/
So:nd:e
positzn.
provided.
OPTiONAl
FEATURES:
Fcatllrc
0
GUIDE
SPECIFICATION:
Nan-controlled
delivery
Surface
mounted
toilet tissue dispenser
shall be die cast aluminum
with satin linish
Stops ccnfrol paper deiivefy.
Overall
drmensrons:
6-1RW
x l-3/4H
x 4-1120.
Surface
Mounted
Toilet Tissue
Dispenser
shall be Bradley
Model 5071.
.::I ._,.-.
-:.
. TEGHNICAL
.
DATA
MODEL 780
@Angie Frame--Welded
Corners
43 Theft Resistant Mounting
i-
CONSTRUCTION:
FRAI,lE!r~br!:a:~6cl:~c:
smoo;h to sa::r, fin:s1;
BACK faorlca%d
brncke:s.
MIRROR
backing
VIALL
c! Yrj gzl;cji;
cl ! rst quaiirj
b,lee& ledi:ral
HANGER
n.nrr-ed
V 39: (!8.8:.cne.p;ecer,.l
,v ,. sta~nibss s:t2i. S. :- x ? Iang!2
Ccn~:,noc~us tntegrsl s:it:onsr cn 511 W&S Icr added sfrkogth.
galvanized
sltil.
secured
to tramevdl:h
CC~C~~!E~S~:EWS.
labrlc;!ed
of 18.gauge
cold rol:2d
steel.
all welded
v;;:k ct:~.;rj
E~L;:;FEC
.&iiarcv+ld2c!
;.,f, .r:+grai
constructrcn
lo
ar,d ground
hor!:~n!al
.n::ar2rj
banging
cured
parnt
WAS
ACCESSORIES
OIVISION
.TECHNlCAL
TYPICAL
DA-I-A .
. .
..._..
..
:.
..
,.
Specify
length desired.
See
048 and 049 for 45
mounting.
001 over 54 requires
a
center suppon and becomes
002.
A=
0opos;te
CO5
A Umenscn
wl
have
alwavs
.z
t
0 003
0 48 0 52 f-J 54
Standard
length 48. 52 or
54 with center post: only
one end return.
t Bar ac+s:atzle
l?lOW:lng.
A>
_ specify
.
&
fl
-47
Opposte
01 D
048 !;tx,;~n,
These units
barrier-free
provide the
wheelchair
for specific
049
0DCCS::C
txlr-d
FEATURES
. .
0
0
0
0
MODEL 70
OPTIONS
Model 70LU
Model . jODU
Model 7ODUC
Model 70DUCM
Modei70DM
Same as 70 series except double male meter thread (1 National l-lose Thread), no
union included.
._ .
Model TOSC .
_ :_. .
Model 70SS
Same as 70 series except sealed cage bell and bronze adjusting screw.
Same as 70SC series except with stainless steel spring and adjusting screw.
ACCESSORIES
r4Vodel7ODUSPC
Special plastic spacer nipple for use with 70 series double union regulators.
-. _
s ._ ;cR ..
Special inline &&er screen for use with 70 DUSPC.
.- :_
*Not&.70DU series i .1/4 thru 2 comes with the same internals as model #500.
DIMENSIONS &WEIGHTS
AMERlCAN STANDARD
METRIC
PIPE
SZE
(mm)
MODEL
f-=-
DIMENSIONS
15
SINGLE
70
15
LESS
(mm)
CONNECTIONS
70
70
STANDARD
UNION
UNION
I
A
113.i9
1152.40
1 25.44
1 69.34
1.18
85.47
152.40
25.40
69.34
1.04
20
1 SINGLEUNION
116.33
165.10
28.70
69.65
20
[ DOUBLE
150.37
(165.10
28.7U
69.65
UNION
SHIP.
wr.
kgs.
1.27
1
1.54
I
B
MODEL
70
DOUBLE
UNION
FLOW CHARACTERISTICS
AMERICAN STANDARD
20
40
60
80
FLOW RATE (U.S. GPM)
METRIC STANDARD
loo
lzcl
3
4
5
FLOW RATE (US)
-.
April
22,
-- ._._
1995
Northeast
Construction
229 Center Street
Jacksonville,
NC 28541
RE
Ground Uater
Camp LeJeune,
Rerediation
MC.
This is to certify
that the h
for the above refe
Hoft,
Inc.
in Section
08710, Pages 1 - 9,
specifications
as listed.
B
---,--
-_^
I_ . . . .
'W: L-.L; ;
'as listed
'BHMWANSI
;
', '
Sincerely,
Vice
President
SC:jh
This is to certify
that on th
1995, personally
appeared
before
me, Scott
Cunningham,
deposes and says that he
being by me first
duly sworn,
that
he
signed
the foregoing
letter
of certification,
was authorized
so to sign,
and that
the statements
therein
contained
are true.
My commission
expires:
N CO.
NC28641=0!348/
Approved
k/
Approved
asnoted
a
JAtXBO~
Approval
doesnotrf%vesupptieror
subcontractor
of his obiigation
tr)
furnisha~~d/or
instaltthis materidIn
8cco~!anct
withrquirements
ofthe
~nta%mlplammd
speci:iw,
:HEDULE
, Y,,
GROUND WRTEE REHEDIATXON
ELDG+
-&
GEilEf;At
COE!TF:ACTOR:
,.
NCETHEAST
CONSTRUCTION
CO.
SUBMITTED
BY:
B,A,
HO!?,
IMC, !?1?~5Y5-.4440
7412 A+C+C+ EL'JD,
l?ALEIGH,
N+C+ 27513
F'REPD t BY : SCOTT CIJNNINGHl?i?,AHC
-----------------------------------------------------------I
..f--Y
i
b
._'
.,..,..: .-.
::
ARCHITECT
and
GENERAL
COMfF:ACTOR
F'LEASE
1
1,
NOTE:
:
II
The hardware
will
Se ordered
IiMEDXATELY
upan
It
<If sin APF'l?OVED Hardware
Schedule.
Subsequent
12
will
bc treated
QS an EXTRA and excess
hardwax?
It
be t,I.:rned
over
to the owner+
i
r,
--------3-----------______________1____1--------------------
receipt
ctftmges
will
:
,i
:
I
,t
c,. ..
;.
?JOOR IMIEX
DOOR NO+
s
2
3
4
c
i
7
8
0
I.0
I1
KEY CONTRL
I-IEADING
It:
ITEM
MO+
KEYSET
i/vi
1AA
3AA
2h4
2AA
i&A
IAA
4AA
4AA
1AA
l-i E a 11 I b! G
24
8
4
8
8
ni,
4
4
4
0
!&
EA
EA
HINGE EBll?i
4 lit2 X 4 l/2 NW
FLiJSH BOLT 28211-12
&? INACTIVE
COOH
EA LOCH LM531 X RN X IG7
I? ACTIUE COOP
EA CLOSER 7601 Pfi X SNl
EA KICKPLATE
190s X 8 X 34 X +#?I(!
C! PLISH SIDE
EA KICKPLATE
190s X S X 35 X ,050
@ FtJ!-t SIDE
Etfi THRESHlSLD 4lOS X 72 X MS X LA
EA DOOR SWEEP 75OSN X 36 X MS
SET WEATWEESTRfPSING
SPlStr X 1/72
1< 2/94
ASTlAGrCtL FUKMISHElr
LJITH PfETPlL UOORS
AL
t 30
X PtS
PI
a1..
AL
AL.
I..!.!
LH
St?
3AA
4AA
1aa
.I
7
3
3
3
EA
KiCKPLATE
l&S
X
!?2 PULL SIDE
Ef? THRESHOLlr 410s X
EA DOOR SWEEP 750SH
SET WEATHERSTRTPPTNG
X 35
36 X tiS X LA
X 36 X MS
3PlSU X l/36
X 2/34
HEADING
ITEM
1. SGL. DS + 3
30
X 70
1 3/4
050
X ,050
HM-D
141..
AL
?A.
2a
EXTERIOR
X HM-F
I Cc7n%if?!Iecl
X MS
HA.410
FROM 100
EHR
1
I
I.
1
1.
1
1
1AA
1AA
EA
EA
EA
ITEH
5. SIX TIH, 10
30
X 70
1 3/4
ITEM
ITEti
10
2.1
1 RUD ru3 + 1,
3. RUD IF,, 5
ROLL UP IrOOKS
630
X HS
AL
AL
AL
105 TD 101
HM-11 X HM-F
EXTERZOH
E:(TERZOR
TO 105
TQ 105
-.
ITEM
3.2
EA
1.
KEY CABINET
NO+1200
X 30 CAPACITY
t END OF SCt1EKU.E
GRAY
t.
t.
Value
.. . Accessibility
... Aesthetics!
8 DORMAs 7600 Series Closers are hydraulic surface-applied door
closers with backcheck and full range adjustable spring force for
interior or exterior doors, including doors that must comply with
barrier-free codes.
Certification:
The DORMA 76C0 Series !s i&ted by U.L. and U.L.C. urder :t-er
continutng reinspec:ton prcgrams. The 7660 Ser:es IS certified :c
conform to the recurrements cf ANSI A: C6..1 Grade :
Specification:
All closers shail be COPMA 7660 Series hydraulic surface-appiied
rack and pinion closers. Tne c!osers wiil h8.e aiurr5ur-n a%/ bcdies
wi!h high compresscn s:ec! sp+gs arc P.ardeneC rec!k and plr.icn
fc: doors cpenlng up to I&? maximum. The c!ose:s ;:.i/i rave corrosion-resistant strea,ml,,ne ~o::ers. The cl-==*=
I. v/i j have ;::o rcr.cr:!ical
ti-ermostaic
valves i0 se,parstely cc.n.rl
,L.v s:Jqp a2-J :-I,-7
:c.. . . c$E;fdS
and provide ccr.stiZ c;::rg s=e&
e:E? uy,$ef qx:re,Ta :Cyf~.fsr?S, 712 C!,;serS :J,/l p,z,,e hy&a&
tacic;ec% is ~.*.~~,$~: ;,?ccgtrc::ed cpen;cg ci :re dr,c,r f:cm approxTa:eiy
63. All 7631 Seres
c!csers shail have ad;us:ate spr:r.g pcv,er %I
,,Id , sizr-s 1 to 5 1; meet
ir,;erior or ex:er:cr o~;c: bar,. .er-free re@rsmer:s. The TX5 ccrer x./
be ad]usiab!e
frcm Size 5 to 6 viith 5;?i additicnal C!CSing fCrCe
abode size 6. Ecoes ar.s a:rn assert? b& ;o be ccrrosicn-res:s:ar,t
ar,d finished :;i:h a t:.ms CCC? and !CD CC:ii of pc:yu:etharc eramel
paint. p&e;
a:mt:a+,g
;z k**: ,-ac?,sserJ star,sr,d !,sr r,<c
--v?r
arn.:parai!eI arm cc-r:: ra: cr.s.
Optional
finishes:
Standard
Sprayed Finishes: P:.med fcr Fa.r,::rg (PG). A:umirml
(AL). Cull Bronze (DE). Statuary Eronze (STAT), Dark Durancdic
Ercnze (CUECI. Gs:d (Gil. E:ack (EL).
Optional Special Color Sprayed Finishes: SC-.?CCF.:.!.?A5n;sn chart.
Optional
Plated Finishes: Er:gnt E:tss iUS3). Satin Erass (USJI.
@r@i Erorze (US:!. Sa::n Ercnze (US:C;. Cxdzed Satin Srcrze Oil
Aupced (!JSi 63). Er.gr: Nickel (USlj!. Sa:,n I!ickeI (US? 5j. S:#ght
CP.rcre :USX). Sai,n Chrcme (US26ci.
Warranty:
25 Yws.
:L..
Specification:
Instaiea. x6 x+sted
to met-!
fray r-c! K3a.e si;ff:c:ent pcvier
TE!APCATE
REFERE!JCE
Regular Installation x
Friction Hold Open/
Fusible Link Hold Open
(spccilyhxd
7601
7605
7601
7605
!orfus~b!clink)
FHO
FHO
FL
FL
DIM "A"
C!M "3
APPROX.
!AAXItAU'A
CPEfilNG
APPRCX.
SACKCHECK
RAI4GE
APFRGX
GELAYE
AC%C!4
RA!ICi
--
Parallel
(660R
Arm 1nstafla:ion
bracket
furnished
standard)
7601 PA
7605 PA
N/A
b
-PM qx!iCJS!*?
- Cpwg
!crcB
ccors : 6.5 !bs.
for dwr wrd:h
Note:
(Speclly
Arm installation
Hold Open/
Link Hold Open
hand
for fusible
CM -8
APPROX.
MAXIMUM
OPENltG
AFPROX.
BACKCHECK
RAHCE
APPROX.
DELAYED
ACXCM
RAliGE
MIM!HUM
DOOR
WIDTH
5Cd
Althcur;h
OORMA
76C0 Scrics c!cws
have ad,uslab!e
spring pwer
lo csmpcnsa!c
Ior si:c cc.55::cns.
II c3n
not be Guaranteed
lhat adcqua!c
c!osq
!crcc iyi!l be
:;ll!1 bsrricr
!:W cfcn:ng
c3amed
,tih!!e ccmpiyq
!crce rcstr;c!:ons.
~-I~.-~~-~~~----~~~~~~..-
Parallel
Friction
Fusible
7601
7605
7601
7605
/ sp~licJi:on
no! ri-cT;rrc,~
5 ibs. or !ess on :n:cr:zr
or less on ex:.:r 5: 2x:x
no!ed.
DIM A
link)
PAFHO
PAFHO
PAFL
PAFL
L
. --
~~
APPRCX.
UAXYUII
CPEhiHG
APPROX.
BACXCHECK
WINE
U:!a4Uhl
CCCA
3wTH
-_-.
-,
- Rcccmmccccd
N/A
1 Not a~pkcablc
- Otxnmq
!arcc
drxrs;
8 S bs.
Ior doa
wdlh
&L
Nolo:
.~p~;!cn~.cr~
I .~cpt~c.~::or~ r,ot rewmmendcd
S Its cr ICX on :r.:cr:cr
or !css on c~:cr.cr
dccrs
no!cd.
>i:txx@
OCflhlA
XC0
Scr:cs c!csws hwc ad;ustJblC
:~rm~ pcwx
:o ccrr~r:nsa!o
!or jilt ccrx!.:fons.
rt cnn
I
1
SPECIFICATIONS
Power
Spring
lever trims with individual
spring in each trim to eliminate
lever sag.
Easily reversible
in field. Stronger
lo-32
screws
with
thread
sealant
for greater
strength and resistance to loosening.
ATTACHMENT:
Knob
and rose trim
require
no surface applied
screws. Inner
and outer trims are designed
to bottom
0 LI t 0 n I % doors
to prevent
door
collapse.
T-TURN:
1 %, T-turn.
haCdiCJJ1
NT
Sormally
furnished
with a
h 2 long
lever
for
J;CJS
FALCON
iS J/SO
Jt2iiJbie.
LOCK
order
NT Falcon
Lock
M Series
Locksets, please
consult page 19 for ordering information
and assistance.
To
*o
indiytes
awlable.
interchangeable
core
.-
esc&tion
Issagc/Closet
Itch
bolt
by
Latchset
knobs
01-l
at all
01-2
mes.
r&&y i&k
,,
io2-1
itch ~olt~~~~knobs,
d&l
q!!,b$
turn
inside
or
mergcngy kei; oiltsicle.
.
. ..
Y,*'..,
FO2-2
.
rivacy,
Bdroom
~111 Lock
FlJ-1
Fl)-2
..
arch
)catl
nsicfc
or
,I
._
:.,r
. *-*,y
: :
i. ...,
:
: .
._*
lo!.
_-
ha
. .,
I..
*
:*I-
...-.
-.-
bolt
by knobs.
holt
hy turn
iron)
and
emergency
CY outside.
7sidc knob
dk.
Rotstin::
retrxts
t)oth
~tobroobrlock
.atch bolt
&ad
bolt
!idler side.
;
by knobs;
by key from
i\sylum Lock
Deadlocking
latch
by key from either
Both knobs rigid.
Fl:-1
F14-2
bolt
side.
Entry/Office
cock
.:.
Deadlocking
!a!&
bol
by knobs
Cxccpt whel
outside knoh is locked h
Lutton; in face, th.yrt b
key outside.
%
FO-IFO4-
NO. 955DL
PADLOCK
_ _._ -._- -- -
primarily
used in prisons
The reverse
security
stud
(RSS) is a feature that has a
stud projecting
from the back
of both leaves into the reinforcing plate of both the frame
and the door. It is intended to
keep the hinge
locked
in
place from abuse of battering
or trying to shear the hinge
and screws.
This feature
is
and psychiatric areas.
Mount
(JSM)
RAlSED BARREL
deep back into lhe
applications:
Jalamb
Edged Door and
The hinge knuckle
of the frame.
applicaticn,
mortised
to accommodate
both
sometimes
referred to as double mortised. The Jamb Surface
Mount may be applied to either
a square or beveled edge door.
The Raised Barrel for Square
Edged
door (RBS)
and the
Raised
Barrel
for Beveled
Edged (RBB) door applications
are mortised into the frame and
door as a standard full mortised
hinge.
Depending
on the depth of the
frame, all three of these applications may restrict the degree of
opening.
hinge
leaves
or what
is
!.
P
9
Raised
Rarsed
Barrel
Beveled
earrel
Square
the door is
Concealed
Bearing
Hinge
Weight
Heavy Weight
Tempiate Wide Throw
or Doors Requiring
High Frequency Service
Door
ANSI
A8117
Wi-AB850
Brass ANSI A2111
Stainless
Stainless
Steel with
Steel Pin ANSI A5111
Three kmckle
with concealed
risir.g removable
pin, concealed
Specify
Screw Rcquiremenls.
4/2x
5
x 6
7
5x6
5x7
412
X8
5x0
A/2
412
Size Open
Gauge
(Inches)
of metal
Number of holes
Machine screw size
Wood
screw
Box quantity
Pair in a case
Average
weight per case (ibs)
Steel - Slainless
:
.lEO
,190
x 12-24
114 x 12
1 Ii2 pr (3 ea)
12
Ii2 x 12-24
I2
size
l!/JXlZ
1 Ii2 pr (2 c-a)
6
-,.
23
60
Brass
hinge bearings
nonpin head and plug.
32
nr
;5
Plain Bearing
Standard
Weight
l Teqplate
For use on Medium Weight Doors Requiring LOP/Frequency Semke
Not for use with Door Closer
l
1279
Steel
kvith
Steel
Pin
ANSI A81 33
1191
Brass ANSl A2133
Stainless
Steel with
Stainless
Steel
Pin
ANSI A5133
Five knuckle
non-risong
removable
,,? 3rd ;!i;q
Specty
Screw Roc&:remenrs.
I
Size
Open
(Inches)
Furnished
wtlh
screw
212
,089
!/h&3
6
,:x8-32
3kd
3,.:x8
,037
G
,:x:
5 pr (10 ca
103
ix5
ix6
x 212
,083
5 pr (:C .:a.
1CO
1EO
10
;:x:.:-20
3.2,:
1 ! :x 1.:
1x9
1 pr (2 ca)
50
12
(!bs)
3.1
39
hole
bu!tcn
I
2x2
Gauge of metal
Number
01 holes
Machine
screw size
Wood screw scze
Box quantity
Parr in case
Avcmgc
:ve~gn; per case
SICCI - Slalr.less
Brass
pin w!h
location
to conform
to standards
approved
by (ANSI)
Al56.7-1988.
Ball Bearing
For use on Medium
Steel vrith
Weight
Standard
Doors
Weight
or Doors
Template
Requiring
Average
Frequency
Service
non-rising
removable
pin
For Hospi!al
pipe
prefix HT lo
catalog
number
6x4/2
412
X 412
3% x 3lt2
4x4
4?/2
5 X
5x5
.llS
.129
.134
.145
x lo-24
1 x9
I2
I2
12
1 pr (2 ea)
50
1112 pr (3 ea)
x 12-21
1/2 x 12
1 j/2 pr (3 eaj
24
24
66
43
37
72
47
4c
/2
x 12-24
114
6x5
6x6
.1&O
10
x 12-24
I/4 x 12
1 Ii2 pr (3 eaj
/2
x 12
d1/2
i2
112
1:/2
12
(ibs)
57
62
BB1168
Steel with Steel Pin ANSI A8111
BB1199
Brass ANSI A2111
Stainless Steel with
Stainless Steel Pin ANSI A5111
Five knuckle
!cur ball bearings
with button :o and p:ug.
Soeclfy
SC:** ;~cufircmcnt;.
Size
Gauge
Open
non-nslng
of retal
Number
of hcles
Machme
SC:W sze
V/cod sc:e:~ size
Box qxr.tt-/
per
411 x 4
4% x 412
5x4
5 x 4%
5X5
,180
,190
Furnished
with screw
Hinge testing conform
tycc
to cata-
(Ibs
6 x 412
6x5
6x6
i 90 S:w:es; s:cci
:I2 x 12-24
1/1 x 12
1: x 12-24
l/r x 12
11i2
case
For PcscM
p&x
hi
pm
!cg rLC:Cr
(Inches)
Parr m a c3se
Avcrac;c
.wghl
S1CCl-sI3:~:c!SS
Brclcs
Stain!css
removable
pr (3
ea)
11.2pr
12
12
35
38
44
(3 eaj
approved
s:air.:ess
Steel
1lzprfZca)
12
1 .: pr (3 ~3)
6
48
to standards
1 so
hole localion
to conform
to ANSI - A156.1-1988.
8x6
8X8
by (ANSI)
A156.7-1988.
1;:
x 1.t
x L-20
x 14
pr (3 ea)
TRIM
DOOR PROTECTION
&
AUXILIARY
HARDWARE
PLATES
STANDARD
STRETCHER
PLATE
Ll
C
\\
MOP PLATE
MATERIAL
Metal
Metal
!AcTal
Me!al
Fdlelal( 1)
C:ear Plastic
P!asirc Laminate(2)
22rss
223s
224s
225s
bleral
IA?El
Metal
Kydex!2)
* Aluminum.
Brass,
** All S:atx!ard
Plates
1iiT(
meet
J 1 C6 P!asric
KICK PLATE
THICKNESS
.OSG
,050
.050
.OZC
.ozala
!j
.CE2
.C62
.C62
$5
.ca:-
Ercnzc.
Sln~r.less
Flnlshes.
see P3se
A:dSI A156.6
for JlOl
Kickplate;
J 103 Metal
GA.
B&S
US GA.
16
16
16
16
-
18
18
13
14
14
1-I
-
16
16
16
-
BEVEL
FINISH
Male
B3E
B4E
F!ona
None
64E
64E
ra
2c,
-
l *
.
*
*
32D
Clear PC
ElackPK
EroNn CO
Grey PG
None
i33E
FIO?IE
NONE
.
**
-
Steel.
:P.
Medal cr JlO5
Piasbc
cr J 107 P!astic
Mcp
Armor
Pla!e;
J!C2
!.k?al
or
P!a:e.
Selellon.
other
than
?r:cc on
App!lca:icn.
ARPilOR
PLATE
22P
RIM
&
AUXILIARY
HARDWARE
KlOUN-i-ING
230W
CONVEX WALL STOP
z7/16"
Diameter; 13/16"
Projection
MATERIAL:
FINISHES:
231W
CONVEX WALL STOP
z7/16"
Diameter; 13/r6
Projection
Cast Brass, Bronze w/Rubber Bumper
3,4, 10, 108, 26 & 26D in stock. Other
Finishes on Special Order. Price on
Application.
PACKED:
10 Per Box w/#lO x 1 l/Y Mounting SCreWS.
and 10124 x 2112" M.S. and Toggle Nut
Meets ANSI A 156.76 for L 72 10 1
MATERIAL:
FINISHES:
F-c-
232W
CONVEX WALL STOP
2112 Diameter;
1 3/1 6 Projection
MATERIAL:
:.
233W
CONVEX WALL STOP
21/2 Diameter;
13/16 Projection
MATERIAL:
250W
,-
t -.
MATERIAL:
Wrought Bass
FINISHES
3,lOB. 26 8 260 only.
PACKED: 20 Per Box w/:16 x 5;~~ htounling
and Shields
23P
Screws.
NOTE:
For fastener
details,
. -...
-.
TRIM
SLIDE
FLUSH
AUXILIARY
HARDWARE
BOLT
FACE: 314 x 6
BOLT HEAD: l/2
STRIKE: 7/a* x 13/4*
MATERIAL:
Brass
FINISHES: 3,4, IO, 1OB 26 & 260 only:
PACKED: IO per box w/i:6 FHWS
Meets AN.9 A 156.16 for L2420 7
25320*
LEVER
EXTENSION FLUSH BOLT
!
FACE: 1 X 63/Y
L
BOLT HEAD: Flatted 12 RD
@k
THROW:
=/A
ROD BACKSET:
3/s
GUIDE: 1 x 2
STRIKE:
5/16 X 21.1
MATERIAL:
Extruded Brass
Fi~IISl-iES:
3, 4, 10, 106. 26 & 260 Onl'f
PACKED:
2 per box vi/#8 ccmbinaticn
sc:ws
STANDARD
ROD LENGTH: 2820. 12 CZfiier of Face
to Comer of Door.
For other centers, Specify 232R Red.
DIMENSIONS:
18. 25 8 30 Available.
Bolt Head Not Inc!uded.
282R
~
282D()
(1) Fits ANSI Al 15 Door & Frame Prep.
283D*
LEVER EXTENSION
FLUSH BOLT
2830
36P
-
TRIM
M;iSCELLRNEOUS
&
AUXlLlARY
HARDWARE
PRODUCTS
3QOD
CHAIN
DOOR CHECK
303w
HAND RAIL BRACKET
31/8 Diameter Base;
23/4 From Base to Center of Rail
MATERIAL: Cast Grass
FINISHES: All Standard, See Page iP.
PACKED: 5 each per box with #IO x 1l/2 OHWS.
307D
DOOR SILENCER
3/8 x 3/,r Base; 314 Length
MATERIAL: Rubber
FOR WOOD FRAMES
PACKED: 100 per bag
1755
160 Door Viewer
Solid Brass
Adjustable For Doors 13/8 To 2/8 TK.
Requires l/2 Hole in Door
Finish: 3 - 260
Packed: 5 Per Box;
Meets ANSI Al 56.16 - Ll3221
DOOR SILENCER
J/2
Diameter; 11/16 Length
MATERIAL: Rubber
FOR METAL FRAMES
PACKED: 100 per bag
1756
u
0
Door Viewer
Solid Brass
Adjustable For Dcors
200
@L
Finish: 3 - 260
Packed: 5 ?er Box;
Meets ANSI A 156.16 - L 1322 1
4OP
,p^i;;
EALING
SYSTEMS
SADDLE
TYPE
THRESHOLD
iedc
41os/411s
SADDLE THRESHOLD
Meets ANSI 756.21, J32700
Meets ANSI 756.21, J12700
l
l
l
410s
ONLY
- Aluminum
- Bronze
Constructed
of strong,
high quality extruded
Grade 6063-15
aluminum
for dependable
long
lasting performance.
Available
in Bronze Extrusion.
Available
in a variety
of configurations
and
lengths
that meet the requirements
of standard applications
and building codes.
All threshclds
are furnished
with appropriate
size full threaded
wood screws
compatible
with specified ekvations.
Threshcld
with fasteners
are wrapped
!or individual protection. .
Available
in AL, CU. BR Finishes.
101.6mm
c6Q
101.6mm
EVERYTHfKG
HP&ES
GN W&ER
SEALING
SYSTEMS
DOOR
SWEEPS / BOTTOM
0
U
4
750SN
against
for new
housing
seal for
contact
I P-
l-1/4,
31.75mm
U
@L
751 SN/SS/SV/SW
Provides
door botlom
protechon
against
weather. light, sound, insects and dust for new
and existrng doors.
Constructed
of extruded
alum~m
housing
wcth a durable
insert for lasting cerfcrmancc:
7SlSV
- Vinyl:
761S>l
. P:ie: 7jlS?d
*
Neoprene:
751SS - Skone.
Door sweep creates
a posrtlve
contact
seal
with threshold or tloor.
Slotted holes for easy adfustment
Supplies with a6 sheet metal sc:o.?s.
Avatlable
In AL. OU. GL F!n!shes
1_/6_
17.J8mm
A
1 506
15il6
-A
46.05mm
46.05mm
46.05mm
NEOPRENE
751s
(N)
iZS
I
I
VINYL(V)
SILICONE
(S)
~.
EALING
_._---_..
SYSTEMS
DOOR GASKETING
0
U
@L
891 SN/SS/SV
JAMB-UP
SEAL
Protects
against
weather,
light and sound
infiltration
&I new and existing
doors
and
frames
without
impairing
door latching
at
normal closing force.
Constructed
of sturdy
extruded
aluminum
housing with durable sealing member:
891 SV
- Vinyl; 891 SN - Neoprene;
891 SS - Silicone.
Provides
continuous
seal along head and
jambs.
Slotted holes for easy adjustment.
Supplied with #6 sheet metal screws.
Available
in AL, DU. GL Finishes.
l
l
l
114
6.35mm
892SV
JAMB-UP
l
0
U
@L
SEAL
Protects
agamst
weather,
light and sound
infiitratlon
on new and existmg
doors
and
frames
wtthout
impairing
door latchmg
at
normal closing force.
l
Construeed
of sturdy aluminum
hcusng
with
durable vlnyl sealing member.
l
Provides
contmuous
seal along head and
jambs.
* Slotted hcles fcr easy adJuslment.
l
Sucolled
..vlth -6 sr.eet metal screws.
l
AvaIlable
!r. CA. 3U. GL Fimshes.
9OQ
:?
*,,.+-y
t -a:y
,.z$*!
I
$;-:
.,dy
.<J
,&*,:
#g ;,
...
.A book index (No. 511-B)
is furnished
with all
Lund De Luxe Wall Cabinets
with the Two Tag
Key System. This index is to be filed in the office
letter file cabinet. for key security.
Panel hooks and key tags are numbered
consecutively from No. 1 up. Hooks on panels are r/2 long,
See Page 4 for Two Tag Key System.
See Page 15 for Color Tags.
cabSee
WALL
KEY CABINETS
No. 1200
30 cap.
- -Expand up to 90 cap.
No. 1201
60 cap.
Funad
WALL
,,n tn
an
e-n
90 cap.
No expansion.
120 cap.
No expansion.
KEY CABlNETS
STYLENo.I205-0
No. 1205
No. 1205-A
Ho. 1205.AA -
No. 1205-B
No. 1205-c
600
No. 1205-O
cap.
April
22,
Northeast
229 Center
Jacksonville,
RE:
1995
Construction
Street
NC 28541
Ground Uater
Camp Lejeune,
Rerediation
RC.
Bldg.
. .._
This
is tc
and accessories
above
referenced
supplied
project
by
in
Sincerely,
Vice
President
SC: jh
This
is to certify
that
on
personally
appeared
before
me, Scott
Cunningham,
1995,
AHC
being
by me first
duly
sworn,
deposes
and
says
that
he signed
the
foregoing
letter
of
certification,
that
he was authorized
so to sign,
and
that
the statements
therein
contained
are true.
My commission
04 /r: I
/
expires:
/YJ7
Approved
Approvedas noted
d
cl
Agprovaidoesnot relievesupplieror
subcontractorof his obligationto
fumtsnaMor installthis materialin
acccrm u&h requirements
of the
~gtansandsp~ifications.
CURRES
HOLLOW,
METALDOORS
ANDFRddililELsa
poSTOFFIcEBOX648
JACWW
NC 28541-0348
DISTRIBUTED BY:
Approved
kf
Approvedas noted
B,A.HOFTJNC.
supplieror
Awrovaidoes not
subcontractorof his obligation to
fur&h zndlor lns$ll this rn@$i in
accardsncewith requirementsof the
co~~kici~~lgkisand SpeCifiC2liOOS.
P.o.E#)(x%!~.RAtEIGH,tiC
276750127
7412ACCtkVD.
* RALEIGH,
NC27613
7
C
I r
MK
FRAME PROFILES
DOOR HANDING CHART
I-J
CK
-II
RECORDOF SUBMITTALS
RETURNED
SUBMITTED
1ST
Id\\%
2ND
3RD
4TH
RECEIVEDAPPROVED DRAWINGS
RECEIVEDAPPROVED HARDWARE
DRAWN BY:
7r
1l-l
I
cG
GENERAL NOTES:
1. Material shown on these drawings will be fabricated only after formal approval by the architect and contractor, receipt of approved hardware schedule and all necessary hardware templates.
miJer
runs
L
4-m B ,3P.&.
AL
L.
v)uh 1
2. Doors and frames will be reinforced for surface mounte d-i! ardware as required. Drilling and tapping for attaching gP-surface mounted hardware by others. Doors and frames will be prepared and reinforced for mortise hardware. Holes for this hardware will be drilted and tapped at the factory
except for trim mounting holes. Surface exit cylinder and thumb piece holes factory drilled only when ordered.
3.
treatment
4.
Installation
5.
6. j
finish .pap
or
All frames will be prepared for push-in type silencers, 3 per strike jamb for single frames or 2 per head for double frames (supplied by others)
7.
8.
The hardware locations indicated on the door and frame elevation are this manufacturers standard locations for standard type hardware. Other hardware such as deadlocks, panic exit devices, etc., will also be located at this manufacturers standard locations for that specific hardware unless
advised otherwise.
9.
10.
11.
Store doors and frames at the building site under cover. place units on at least 4 wood sills or on the floors in a manner that will prevent rust
and damage. Avoid use of non-vented plastic or canvas shelters, which create a humidity chamber. If the wrapper on the door becomes wet,
remove immediately,
Provide l/4 space between doors to promote air circulation.
12.
Frames in masonry construction to be filled with grout, when anti-freeze additives are added to the mortar, the insides of the frames shall be
treated in the field by the general contractor with a bituminous asphalt material.
13. ihbk/-idr
JOB NO.
-+
7
t
Alor%
b--d
PROJECT
-F-
5LJ\
bL
ty&&A
hbl
LOCATION
J
SHEET NO.
OF
\
q,
LOCATION
II
7 I@ 136. i
)-J0 L, I I
11
l-TIT
I I
12
13
I I
FRAME DATA
II
DOOR DATA
SPECIAL INFO
5% t4 id
1I
14
I I I
ICC-A8011 (.
PROJECT
LOCATION
I I I II ll
I SHEET NO. 3
Elev. No. _
Elev. No. 2
- 1 I I
MW
JOB NO.
-4
FWA
MP
MP
PROJECT
i
LOCATION
.?a-_
ws
SC
SHEET NO.
OF
00
1LKK Rf INf
AS RI DUlRf It
FACE SKINS
COYTI4OUS
HINGE CHANNEL
4 GA ~STANDAAD
.14 GA
;\
PRIN
PAW
COA I
ST0
,I6 GA REM
CONTtNUOUS
NOTE
SCAW HOLES ARE
ANDED T O PROVJDE
3EAD DEPTH EOUAL
0 10 GA PLATE OR
T O j 6 IN PLATE
ONLY
tSTANDARDl
ASTRAGALS
IF NOTED
SUPPLIED BY HOlLO\V
IN ASTRA$C&
COLtJhlN
$Icf
*i.c
OUTSIDE
OUTSIDE
INSIDE
INStOE
;T$L;V.P.D
GLASS
GOVT.
161 CYLINDRICAL
LOCK REINFORCEMENT
GOVT.
LOCK
MORTISE
REINFORCEMENT
66
:-
PROJECT
LOCATION
SHEET NO.
A.4
OUTSIDE
0U1SI0E
106 NO.
/
F OR 2
tNSlDf
INSIDE
12 GA REINF
ME: 41
SPEClfV
OF
$3
t
1
-ILCI_-1
F
I i
FV
tt
-)
IT1:
-
l-
T-
IIt
-
l- I
FNV
FG
HG
t 17
1
El
P
-I
FL
I---.--
NORt~Al
\\lDIH
..
GLASS POCKET
SIZED FOR
I, GLASS STD.
STEEL
MUNTIN
JOB NO.
LV$
door
*bottom undercut
1 ,I,- DOURS
li
ILOCATION
Vi door
*bottom undercut
SID ON I b- 0tn)R.S
ISHEET
NO.
OF
7%*
-I- f.
LOCATIONS
2 h
-I--
25h
f.
33%
--I-e
f.
-r
45
40
12%
1
1
7 2
KNOBLOCK
STRIKE
HOSPITAL
LATCH
STRIKE
DEADLOCK
STRIKE
--~
E
g3
Standard
/aHEAD
Locations
T.
,c
% UNDERCUT
TWO
Standard
WHEAD
CLEARANCE
F.
B
B f. F.
.cq
4
Q
I-
1 ?V Doors
For
CLEARANCE
% UNDERCUT
HINGES
THREE
#HEAD
HINGES
Locations
For 1% Doors
CLEARANCE
UNDERCUT
THREE
% UNDERCUT
HINGES
SIZE
68
7o
7-2
SIZE
6B
7O
7-2
SIZE
HINGES ----.--_
C
9%
9%
9%
9%
9%
9%
6%
7%
20%
11%
39%
610
7%
20%
11%
39%
70
7%
2 1%
11%
39%
72
7%
22%
11%
39%
710
7%
24 Jb
11%
39%
80
7%
11%
39%
HINGE
DDimension
BACKSET
shown
JOB NO.
12
:
HINGE
is for locks
a command
with
t and
PROJECT
BACKSET
lock
and
strike
IEx. Govt
16 1 cyl.
lock)
HINGE
BACKSET
LOCATION
*f: ?
FOUR
HINGE
BACKSET
- 25%
.-.-~
SHEET
NO.
7
i
OF
F.
Model 800
Model 800
Inverted Y Blades
Non-vision
design recommended
for schools, class A and
in$titutional
buildings.
Material:
18 Ga. C.R. Steel
Available in Core, C, A
A-1 mounting
styles.
Screen:
Removable
ORDER SIZE IS
DOOR CUT OUT
and
or attached.
Model 800
Basic blade unit only; for interior
doors; or as transom louver held in
place with wood or metal moulding
(furnished by others).
Model
800-A
Model BOOC
Model 800A
Basic blade unit with flanged
frame welded lo face (corridor) side
and separate flanged frame on
opposite side; frame adjuslable to
fit any door thickness from 1 3/S
to 1 34.
Basic blade
unll with
single
flanged
frame welded
to face
(corridor)
side; for interior
or
exterior
doors: wood or metal
moulding
(by others) used on
opposite side.
of Louvers
and Damoers.
inc.
-SK--
ode1 800Al
Vandal-proof
design; basic blade
unit with flanged frame welded to
face (corridor) side and separate
removable
flanged
frame on
oppodte
side; fits 1 314 thick
doors only.
PROJECT:
DATE:
LOCATION:
SCALE:
ARCHTECT
CONTRACTOR:
DRWG. NO.
B&S
APPENDIX
WATER
HEATER
\
\
ENERGY SAVER
ELECTRIC
RESIDENTIAL
WATER HEATERS
MODELS EES, EEH, EEST & EWF
7
FEATURES
CODE COMPLIANCE:
H.U.D.,
1992. and 1990 NAECA.
B.O.C.A.,
ASHRAE
for Household
90.lb-
Electric
screw-in
anode
for
5 YEAR
If the tzn
NON-METALLIC
BOILER TYPE DRAIN VALVE (6 and
gallon models have a combination 3/4 inlet/drain fitting).
LIMITED
TANK WARRANT-Y
15
TEUFERATURE
VAWE
OPENING
COLD
IFLET
AND PRESSURE
RELIEF
MAY BE ON TOP OR
WATER
LINE
ENERGY SAVER
ELECTRIC
StOE OF HEATER. \
GLASS-LINED
WATER HEATER
UNION
SHUTOFF
T WATER
PPLY PtPE
VALVE
-.
SUPPUED
HEATER
CONSULT
L
*FUSED
SW THREADED
CONNECTION
ELECTRICAL
SUPPLY
-/
ELECTRICAL
JUNCTION
ADJACENT
CONDUIT
ENTRANCE
t OVERCURRENT
PROTECTlON
MUST
BE
IN WATER
CIRCUIT
LOCAL
CODE
OR NEC-1964 FOR
PROPER INSTAWTION.
LCWSOY
LOWBOY
15 GAUON
6 GALLON
BOX
EMBLEM
AND
RATfNG
PLATE
-INSTALL
AC&i
PANELS
IN ACCORO-
ANCE WITH
CODES
ALL LOCAL
LOWBOY
26-50 GAUON
..-
6 AIR GAP
@$j?!
DRAIN
VALVE
TSINGLE
0~ LOWBOY
ooou
MODELS
FRONT VIEW
TYPICAL INSTALLATION
Akvrions
Top VIEW
In Inches
Element Wattage
Model
No.
C..rnl
cncnur
EES-30
EES40
.EES-52
EEH-52
5ES-66
EES-80
EES-120
ENERGY
EEST-30
EEST-40
EEST-52
ENERGY
SlDfTALL
36-120 GAUON
Gal.
CdO.
cJN*cn..I.?.3 .,m...C.
rnVEW
I
I
I
30
40
50
I
1
I
f
I
1
I
50
66
80
120
I
I
I
I
SAVER
TALL
UpperfLower
c
4500/4500
450014500
45wM5Oa
45oOI4500
4500/4506
4500/45c6
4500/4566
(Non-Simultaneous)
Max. 240 Volt
upper/Lower
Height
Dia.
Approx.
Ship. Wt
(Lb%)
20 :/2 I
I 20 l/2 I
1 an . ,n 1
94
115
.?.I)
I
1 ;; ;.i
1 24
1 29 l/2
I
172
206
336
4500/4500
6000/6COO
6CiOO/6COO
I 34 l/2
1
, s32,.
600016000
6000/6cOo
6000/6000
6000/6c60
I
1 :::3/4
i 5.8 l/4
I 61 3/4
(
1
1
MODEL@
1 30
I
1 40
t
1 55
1
SAVER LOWBOY
I
c
I
45G. ._.,__
4500/4506
456w4
MODhw
-
_-.._,___.
6000/6001
SUGGESTED SPECIFICATIONS
fw.
ebcWlc heater, or an approved equaf. Heater(s) shaff be rated at
Thfa water heater(s) shafl be A. 0. SMITH Model(s) No.
Heater(s) shafl have a maximum working pressure of 150 psi, a nominal storage
volts. single phase. 60 cycle AC and listed by Undeiwtiters
Laboratories.
tank capacky of gallons
with a separate 3I4 tapping for reffef vafve instalhtfon and a rfgidfy supported an&e rod for maximum cathodic protectfort.
AU internal
Electric heatfng element(s) shall be zfnc pfated
surfaces of the heata@)
exposed to water shaft be glass-lined with an alkaline borosifffte
composition fused-to-steel.
copper sheath, screw-in design. Element operation shall be double etement, non-sknuttaneous
(or single element); (or double element, simuttarwous).
The contmfs
shaff incfude a thermostat
with each element and a high temperature cutoff. The jacket shall provide full size control compartments
for performance OfseDfcealld
mahrtsMnce
through front panel openings and enclose
the tank wkh foam insulation.
The drain valve shall be located in the front for ease of sewicing
(except
6. and
installiltion:
15 galbn have a combination
34 inlet/drain fitting). Outer jacket shall be baked enamel finish. Heater(s) shall have a 5 year limited warranty for residential
1 year for commercial
instaflatfan. as outfined in the written warranty
Fully illustrated instruction manual to be induded.
Heater(s) shall meet the minimum energy
\factor required by the Federal National Appliance Energy Conservation Act of 196T.
A. 0. Smith
Water Products Company
A Division of %%$h
Corporation
P
.
APPENDIX
FANS
Submitting Office
T)
&&~JJ
Order No.
Date
PROJECT:
ENGINEER:
CONTRACTOR:
MFG:
PRODUCTS:
226-221
6/8/91
SERVICES
OHM I
GREEI
FANS
HOFFMAN
RO. BOX 77266
GREENSBORO,
INC.
HOFFMAN,
3616
NC
BRANCH
Asheville,
27417-7259
PATTERSON
GREENSBORO,
PHONE
ST.
(919) 292-8777
NC 27497
OFFICES:
N. C. / Charlotte,
N. C. I Raleigh,
N. C. I Roanoke,
Va. / Charleston,
S. C. / Columbia,
S. C. I Greenville,
S. C.
MARK
GB
Standard
Comtruction
l
l
l
NOTES
: All dimensions
shown
am in units
Roof Exhauster
Features
A NEMA 1 disconnect
switch
motor to thediiconneot
box
prepunched
mounting
hole l
l Corrosion
resistant
fasteners
motor plate l Fan shaft mounted
resistant
belts.
l
Options
RF-l,2
with factory
installed
wiring
from
the
Birdscreen
l
Aluminum
curb cap with
Ball bearing
motors
l
Shock
mounts
l
Adjustable
motor
pulley
l
Adjustable
in ball bearing
pillow
blocks
l
Stetic
& Accessories
Selected
UL 706 electrical
8 Galvanized
Roof Curb
Gravity
Damper
WD100
GPS 40-68
30x30
of inches.
DlMENSlONS
I+
30x30
32.5
x 32.5
208
I
I
PERFORMANCE
Model
2
66-3~50
Volume
(CFM)
Cln%.I
FRPM
Power
(BHp)
Hp
13200
0.500
882
4.84
V/C/P
460/w/3
Motor
Information
Enclosure
TotaUy
: SOUND
1725/1140
AIR DENSlTY
;v
*.
RPM
Enclosed
Inlet
63
I125
I256
88
1I 84
1I
Sound
Power
Iwo
91
1I
by Octave
Sand
m
m
11ooo12000/4wG
84
1I
80
power bvel,
pnosun bvel.
1I
77
iI
70
based on ANSI 61 A.
Sonw
baeed on 11 .S dB mtenuation
calculated
u&g
AMCA
301
pu octam band at 5 feet.
at 5 feet.
5.5
2.0
CAm
~6.101
or-------0
8
vdumBx1ooomn
10
12
14
16
18
Drmirq
SWARTWOUT
Fiber-Aire Fiberglass
Ventilators .
There are no shortcuts
to quality.
SWARTWOUT
products are engineered and built for
quality. More than 75 years of manufacturing
gravity
and powered ventilation products enables us to focus
on the quality of our products materials, workmanship,
performance,
and product life. Our fiberglass products
are molded of tough, chemical-resistant
resins and
heavy-weave
glass cloth. All products are designed for
simple installation and maintenance. The result is
products that deliver superior performance,
with
minimal downtime and maintenance, and the best fulllife value of any ventilation product available.
Long-Life
Fiberglass
Ventilators
Swartwout
offers several types of Fiber-Aire ventilators
in a range of sizes and capacities to meet your exhaust
ventilation requirements
and applications.
Each type of
Fiber-Aire offers each of the following features:
Indestructible
housings
impossible
salt spray,
to
operation
appearance
and do not
SWARTWOUT
Direct and Belt Drive
Fiber-Aires ;
Direct drive or belt drive.
The SWARTWOUT
Fiber-Aire is available with direct
drive or belt drive for general ventilation requirements
where a low noise level exhaust is desired. The
fiberglass housing of the Fiber-Aire is virtually dent,
crack, and break proof and is highly resistant to a wide
array of chemicals. The motor is completely separated
from the airstream, as are the belts and drive
components
of the belt driven model.
::
h
f-T..
characteristics.
Disconnect
switches for single- and three-phase
motors
can be furnished as specified. l/15HP to X HP, singlephase, 60 cycle motors are available in 115V or 230V.
Three phase % to % HP motors are furnished 200V or
230/46OV, 60 cycle. Two-speed
motors are available in
115V, 60 cycle single-phase
only. Explosion-proof
(Class
I, Group D or Class II, Group E, F, and G) housings are
available on all YEHP and larger models in ll!X, 60
cycle single-phase.
Explosion-proof
disconnect
switches are not available. No starting equipment is
furnished for direct drive models.
characteristics.
Safety disconnect
switches
can be furnished as
accessories
for belt drive units having standard singleor three-phase
motors. Explosion-proof
disconnect
switches are not available. No starting equipment is
furnished for belt drive models. All motors are 1725
RPM belted to the designated fan RPM. Single speed
motors are available in 115 or 230 volts single-phase,
and 200 or 230/46OV three-phase,
open-type with ball
bearings sealed for life that require no lubrication. Twospeed motors are available for most models in
1725/1140 RPM. Most models are available with
explosion-proof
motors (Class I, Group D or Class II,
Group E, F, and G).
Suggested
Specification
Dimensional
Data
_-
~erfknance
-,
Sealed
for life.
open type, ball
. . requires
bearing
Noise Level
1
Available,
Available
HP and
2 speed
60 cycle 115V single
phase.
in explosion-proof
60 cycle llSV single phase
over - 60 cycle 200 or 230146OV
three phase.
through
h HP, I/,
Performance
shown is for units without ducts.
The Sound Power Ratings shown are decibel levels
(referred to lo-12 watts) and were obtained in accordance with AMCA Standard 300, Test Set Up No. 4.
Values shown are sound power levels at the fan inlet.
SWARTWOUT
certifies that the FiberAires shown herein are licensed to bear
the AMCA Seal. The ratings shown are
based on tests made in accordance with
AMCA Standard 210 and AMCA Standard
300 and comply with the requirements
of
the AMCA Certified Ratings Program.
MARK
GB
Standard
Constmction
l
l
NOTES
: All dimensions
plMENsloNs
Damper
Size (In)
Roof
Opening
10x10
12.5
are in units
Roof Exhauster
with factory
installed
wiring
from
the
Birdscreen
l
Aluminum
curb cep with
Sal1 bearing
motors
l
Shock
mounts
l
Adjustable
motor
pulley
l
Adjustable
in ball bearfng
pillow
blocks
l
Static
Selected
10x10
GPNS
18-G8
of inches.
Approximate
Weight
(Lb)
(In)
30
x 12.5
Model
a*/.
-\
shown
& Accessorks
UL 705 electnod
Gmwty
Damper
WD-100
8 Gdwdzed
Roof Curb
RF-4
Features
A NEMA
1 disconnect
switch
motor to the disconnect
box
prepunched mounting
hole l
l Corrosion
resistant
fasteners
motor plate l Fan shaft mounted
resistant
belts.
l
Options
GS-80-4
Volume
CFM)
Clns&
FRPM
500
0.250
1205
Power
(SHp)
0.06
Motor
@
V/C/F
114
115/60/l
Infomation
Enclosure
Open
Drip
RPM
Proof
1725
D
83
I 125
73
71
Inlet Sound
250
68
Power
500
60
by Octave
Sand
2DOOj4000
loo0
66
52
8000
45
41
LwA
dBA
Sones
64
53
6.6
k
- A wel hted sound
dBA - A woi & ted sound
,875
LwA
.7w
power
preuure
kvel.
beeed on ANSI S1.4.
Sones
level, baeed on 11.5 dB attenuation
celculated
using AMCA
301
per octave band at 5 feet.
at 5 feet.
I-
.IIm , -
.lO
.8Qo I-
.w
Ecu
a78
.Qe
.2w
-04
02
o%?&
0
VdumxlQQw
8
Orming
No. GE143
EF-5
MARK :
SE1
Standard
Construction
Features
. Fan panels
of galvanized
steel
pisted heavy gauge welded
wire motor
mounted
to support
guard
with
resistant
fastsnem
l Motor
side guard.
Options
l
18.6
UL
81 Accessories
705
Aluminum
fan
blades
* Zinc
supports
and fan guard
l
Motor
neoprene
isolators
l
Corrosion
Selected
eleotriod
shown
art) in units
of inches.
DIMENSIONS
Damper
Size (In1
Wdl
Opening
10x16
PERFORMANCE
(N/Al
Model
QW1
\
--a SOUND
,.,+
2
63
Approximate
Weight
(Lb)
(In)
SEl-19440-B8
125
Inlet
Sound
250
80
69
66
\
LwA - A umi htad sound
dBA - A wolg II ted l ound
Power
500
63
power
27
Volume
(cm
Cln%J
mPM
561
0.450
by Octave
Band
1000
2000
4OW
61
level.
pmuuro Ioval,
58
54
1160
Motor
Power
@HP)
Hp
VICIP
0.17
l/8
115/60/l
8000
LwA
dBA
Sones
54
67
55
8.2
baaad on AN% 01 A.
Sows
bund
on 11 .S dB attmuadon
celculated
using AMCA
301
per octave
band at 5 feet.
Information
Enclosure
Totally
Enclosed
RPM
1160
at 5 feet.
4
Id
rll.l(k
volulmx1ooerw
Ormirq
No. SEl-WJ4
MARK
SE1
Standard
Sidewall
Exhaust
Construction
Direct
Fan
NOTES
: All dimensions
l -VSflO8WlthMOtW3Skdkn
shown
era in units
EF-6
Drive
Features
Fen panels
of g&enized
steal
plated heavy gauge welded
wire motor
mounted
to support
guard
with
resistant
fastener8
l Motor
side guard.
l
Options
& Access&es
l
UL 705 electrical
Aluminum
fan
blades
l
Zinc
supports
and fan guard
l
Motor
neoprene
isolators
l
Corrosion
Selected
of inches.
DIMPSSIONS
Damper
Size tInI
Wdl
Opening
10x10
Approximate
Weight
(Lb)
(InI
12
WA)
PERFORMANCE
1
.
.il
Volume
CFM)
Model
QWSE1 -8-440-D
(In%)
167
0.250
Motor
FRPM
Power
(BHp)
Hp
v/c/p
1550
0.03
1125
115/60/l
Information
Enclosure
Totally
Enclosed
RPM
1550
FOUND
Inlet
<*
Sound
Power
by Ooteve
Band
63
125
250
500
loo0
2ooo
4ooo
8ooo
88
71
58
55
53
50
47
44
power
preuure
61
Sonar
leval, based on ANSI 81.4.
level, band
on 11 .S dB attenuatian
48
5.8
calculated
wing AMCA
301
pi ootave
band at 5 faet.
at S feet.
0.8
0.5
,060
0.4
.040
&4
0.3
0.3
@
volurnax1oocar
Dr~wina
No. SEl-l-S4
MARK
SP
Ceiling Exhaust
Standard
Consbuction
EF-7
Fan
Features
l
Galvanized
housings
with
sound
absorbing
insulation
(Painted
housing
SP-5)
l
Aluminum
grille
with
white
enamel
coating
(Molded
Polymer
grille SP-5)
l
Duct connector
with
integral
backdraft
damper
l
Forward
curved
wheel
(Radial
tip
SP-6)
l
Plug
in disconnect
l Shaded
pole motor
with thermal
overload.
NOTES
: All dimensions
(N/A)
WA)
,
* SOUND
-
are in units
of inches.
15
Volume
I-M)
Model
QW.
1
shown
SP-117
172
Motor
hIsk
FRPM
Power
(5Hp)
~~
0.250
1690
0.00
75 w
information
V/C/P
115/60/l
Enclosure
Open
Drip
RPM
Proof
AIR DENSITY
Inlet
Sound
Power
by Octave
Sand
63
125
250
500
1000
2000
4000
8000
63
62
61
53
44
39
38
37
LwA
dBA
Sones
56
44
3.7
power
level, baeed on ANSI 81.4.
Sonw
preaauro
lovel, baud
on 11.5 dB attenuation
cakuiated
par octaw
wing AMCA
301
band at 5 feat.
at 6 feet.
0.7
Legend
Powar
----
0.6
gtemk
0.2
----0 0
CAP8
VS.lOV
-r-
-25
60
76
100
Vdume
125
150
176
200
Drawing
221
No. SP-1-W
Ma!+13-36
lfil
11:43
f1112-Z32
T-il*Y/QaLEIt31979335c?S
GREENHECK
SYMBOL
0.626
*p-
2.376
: EF-5
WD-320
Vertical Mount
Exhaust Damper
Ae~lkation
WD-320
oonmuot4d
rted
with
flangeleu
81 .Wgn
mount
rti4un
of
18
WJW
prrgunchsd
mounting
framr.
The
damper
roll
fonnod
aluminum
drmpar
VOnNCd
closing
edge
holes
and
a
blade&
shall
with
vinyl
4nd
spring
Axlrs
Ited
NOTES
: All dimenrionr
Mown
m
Height & Width fumbhrd
In unita of inchrr.
appoximMely
114 under
mounted
In 8aetd
burhlnga.
is
golvonimd
zlno
rholl
Wed
size.
Conatruedon Features
Frw
Moterlal
...........
Galvanized
Atie Metuirl
......................
Stool
Axle Bastings ...............
SWthrtic
CM4
u4.14r
Motor
Skltl~
Peak ........................
............................
None
NOWlilWl
t#w
No. Wo%!O.! 44
APPENDIX
BUILDING
GAS HEATERS
MODEL F INDOOR
j3RAW-Y
.
STANDARD
FEATURES
OPTIONAL
l
l
l
,ESCRIPTION
The Reznor Series 100, Model F gas-fired unit heaters are
designed for 80% thermal efficiency for use witty natural or
propane gas in sizes from 25,000 to 400,000 BTU!+ gas input
and are arranged for gravity venting. Model F units are designed for ceiling suspension with propellerfans for air delivery.
Standard features on the Model F Series include a manual
match-lit pilot wi?h 100% shut-off and a single-stage, 24.voh
gas valve. A terminai strip Wnnector facilitates field connection
to a remote 24-volt thermostat for automatic operation. Each
unit is provided with a fan control and required limit safety
.. controls, including an energy cut-off (ECO) device atid a blocked
vent switch.
These units have been dasign-certified by the American Gas
Association
(A.&A.)
and approved by the Canadian G&s
Aaaociation (CGA.)
and bear the A.&A. or C.G.A. label, and
are approved for use in CaMomia.
.
NOT-C
: RSgUlnIea
OOmDlMLLon
gra
valve
r;utroi&m
or
camb;Mtion
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
FEATURES-FACTORY
INSTALLED
OPTIONAL
Power
pk+t
aolonoid
valve.
elootrie
sac
urbr,
pHet
filtmr,
p+rrusrr
mgufalor, pilot shut-of!, and manual oh&off, all in one body. Gas supply pressure must not exceed 0.5 PSI (8 oz.-14 WE.),
f:
:.
I.
,,;ji
.I I
:
$
A .
HEATERS
UODEL
Gu
FOR COMMERClAL
F TECHNICAL
ConnectIon-Natural
Pcwrr
- INDUSTRIAL
USE
DATA
l *
FOR ADDITJONAL
MOUNllNQ
tr
ttl
Consumsdon~Wutta
95
A.G.A. ratrnfo
to 2000 feet.
for altiweb
IO 2000 feet. Above 2000 feet do-rate
3y
att:!ude units (2001 IO 4500 fret) de-rated
Sy l0Y0
propane
i6 12. for all sizes. SiY.86 ShOWn are for
in this tack
is based on a healer
equippea
with
all omer sta?dafd motors are open motors. Cplionaf enclosed
Not crnifirl
fo* resioential ure.
Higr,
aa8 COnneCtiOn
!or
All 0th~
inforrr.Etisn
motor;
NOTE:
8EL PAQC
l/Z*
135
I .I
2600
HEIWTS
3380
P-d
MODEL
F DlMENStONS
I #
.
0
.I--=.
I tM
dlmrrnsian
G tar P-D&t
5usDension
and
^E
and
for l-point
2. Factory
equipped
2.point
SUSpensiOW
d-point
18 m
Gas-Fired
l
Unit Heaters
GAS CONTROL
SYSTEMS
SINGLE-STAGE: Single-stage gas vafve which cycles on &t 100% fire on a call for heat.
TWO-STAGE: Two-stage gas vatve which fires at 100% or 50%. as required by remote two-stage thermostat.
ELECTRONIC MODULATION (Models SCAlSC%; natural gas only): Solid state control system, providing close temperature control
through related manifold pressure, On a call for heat from a remote electronic thermostat, controls modulate between 50% and
100%. Remote thermostat is included.
l
l
l
.
1.
i
1,.
AIR
RECIRCULATION
KIT (SINGLE-STAGE UNITS ONLY): First stage control of thermostat energizes unit heater fan to reCirC&te
warm stratified ceiling air. Seoond stage control of thermostat opens single-stage gas valve. Kits includes relay and Wst~
.<ii
)thermostat (4W90F) shipped separately,
SPECIAL AIR RECIRCULATION Klf (SINGLE-STAGE UNITS ONLY): Same as the basic kit, with the addition of a manual summer ;i;
.-;e
-...).
li (
switch on thermostat for summer fan operation.
l,?
,:i:
STEP-DOWN
TRANSFORMERS
Models FE/BE/FIB
(KVA Requlrernents-All
voltages)
0 with Fisld~lnslalled
DOWNTURk
NOZZLE
Gas-Fired
OUTLETS
LJnNt Heaters
IMPORTANT
vdth
range
of air deflection.
.
IN$TA-LLATION4ROCEDURES
1
1
i.
07 other
and
movablle
scaf-
: :.,
0,
*
DW
Unit6 must be InStalled so that cleanuroee are p
combustion air space, se&e and inspection, and fo
.r
spacing from combu6tible construction.
All fuel-burning equipment must be supplied with the air&
enters into the combu6tion process and is then vented to##
outdoors.
Sufficient air must enter the equipment focatW$
replace that exhausted through the vent system. M6$r3$
construction
methods involve the greater use of lneui&I$j
improved vapor barriers and weatherstripping, with the +f!@
that buftdings generally are much tfghter Structu~ #&
they have been in the past. Combustion air supply fat+
fired equipment can be affected by these construction e@@
tloni because infiltration that would have existed in tM prer
may not be adequate.
Extensive use of exhaust fans aggravate8 the eltuat@n.ks4&
past, the infiltration of outside air assumed in heax
,
calculations
(one air change per hour) WBS assum
sufficient.
_,
However, current construction
methods utilizing more &U6
tion and vapor barriers, tighter fitting and gaeketed door8 w
WindOW
or weatherstripping,
may
require
now
the
introdt.:etinn
and meChaniCa!
nf outrida
air
exhaLt6t tar
through WI
openings or ducts,
: _.. .-
CONTINUED
NEXT CAQE
:
L-m-
..
.
HEATERS
LOCATED IN CONFINED
SPACES
WARNlkf
Never expose gas controls on unit to greater t&n
r
l/2 pound pressure! Pressure testing of 3% gas supply piping
system must be carried out before conn@ctlng the fumaw. A
pipe cad or field-supplled
high pressure gas cock m&i
.*
be used during proof terllng of the 8y8tmn.
For NaturrlG88:
Man&Id gas pressure iS regulated by the
combination valve to 3.5 water cdumn. Inlet pressure to the
valve must be a minimum of 5 water column or a6 noted on
the rating plate and a maximum of 1.4 water column.
For Propcme bat: Manifold gas pressure is regulsted by the : :combinafion valve to 10 water column. Inlet pressure to thy : a.:
,;>
valve must be a minimum of 11 water column and a fnaxifnum :,.Y?
:+pc
of 14 water column.
iji
to pipe
supply
service
higher
~~
~~~ _
_~
CAPACTTY OF PIPING
S@tlc
Langth
a4
150
56
31
I,
200
NOTE: Whm
rlrln6
19
64
1-m
1-m
to0
16
t
pouibWa8
8up@y tirru,
cerisldU
Ralw to NW0nal
Puoi lu
cod*
I
61
I 210
I
126
I 320
I
196
I
heating
rcquirmmonta.
of futun
upanston
and Jncruud
for 8dditlonN
lntorrmtron
on +Wng.
p1v
I%
4 k.
.
.
STANDARD
PRODUCT
LIMITED WARRANTY
.+
Reznor warrants to the oripinal owner-user that this Rernor product will be free from defects in materiel or workmanship. This warranty is fimlted
whether or not actual use begins on that date, or eignteen (18) months from date of
shipment by Reznor. whichever occurs first.
MODEL
EXTENDED
LIMITED
WARRANTY
MODEL
(Applier
The heat exchanger
OH/OB
EXTENDED
MODELS
(Applier
LIMITED
warranty
WARRANTY
purchesed
LIMITED
WARRANTY
after Novembur f, 1492.)
The heat exchanger, burners, and all electrical and mechanical operatins components {with the exception c! Siowsr belts on SC8 Models) shall
have an extended four (4) year non-prorated warranty in addition to the standard warranty.
LlMiTATlONS
+,
I
AND EXCLIJSIONS
3. Rernor shall not be liaole for any default or oelay in performance of its warranty obligations nereunder caused by any circumstances beyond
i?~ control, including but no: limite:! to judicial or government restrictions or restraints, strikes, fires, fiooas. c: reduce:! supplies of raw materials,
energy or pans.
4. Reznor will not be liable for any loss. damage, cost of repair. or incidental or consequential damages of eny kind in connection with the sale.
we or repair of any Rezno: produc;s.THiS WARRANTY IS IN LIEU Of ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS AND IMPLIED, AND AEZNOR
DISCLAIMS ALL OTH ER EXPRESS WARRAKTIES AND ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILIN AND OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. NC person is authorzed to assume for Aeznor any oLher wayanty, obligation or
liability.
Ziiomas&BetZs
.
/
k
lIzEm
INSTALLATION
FORM
RGM 434-A
Obsoletes
MERCER,
PA. 16137
434-8
Installation/Operation/Service
APPLIES TO:
Table if Contents
Installation and Operation ............. . .
Check Installation and Start-Up..--...... .
Optional Equipment ................ . . .... -Service/MaintenanceiPIioubleshooting
.+.-
Par. 1-24
Par. 25
Par. 26-33
Par. 34-44
Index by Paragraph
Belt Tension......................................... .:.... 15
BlockedVent Switch ........................... 19, 43
Blower/FilterCabinet(Optional).
..................33
BlowerMotor ...................................... 1.5,39
BlowerRotation......................................... 17
BlowerSpeedAdjustment......................... 16
BottomAccess........................................... 34
Burners................................................ 23, 34
BurnerAir Adjustment.............................. 24
BurnerRack Removal............................... 34
Carryover,Flash........................................ 37
Chxk InstallationandStart-Up ................ 25
Clearances
to Combustibles........................ 6
CombustionAir ....................................... 6, 7
ConfinedSpaceInstallation......................... 7
DimensionalDrawings................................ 3
r:.
ct\
The use and storage of gasoline or other flammable vapors and liquids in open containers
in the vicinity of this appliance is hazardous.
WARNING:
Gas-fired appliances are not designed for use in hazardous atmospheres containing flammable vapors or combustible dust,
iu atmospheres containing chlorinated or halogenated hydrocarbons,
or in applications
with airborne silicone substances. See Hazard Levels, Page 2.
WARNING:
Improper
installation,
adjustment, alteration, service, or maintenance can
cause property damage, injury or death. Read
the installation, operation, and maintenance instructions thoroughly before installing or servicing this equipment.
GENERAL
:-
Model
Fuel
1 Vent
Air Delivery
Gas-Fired
Gratity
Propeller
Fan
Gas-Fired
Gratity
Centrifugal Blower
(heater may be attached
to ductwork)
HAZARD
INTENSITY
LEVELS
DANGER: Failure to comply will result in severe personal injury or death and/or property damage.
A. WARNING:
Failure to comply could result in severe personal injury or death and/or property damage.
3. CAUTION: Failure to comply could result in minor personal injury and/or property damage.
1. Installation
Codes
2. Warranty
Refer to limited warranty information on the warranty card in the
OwnersEnvelope.
WARRANTY:
. domas&Wetts
434
Page
Unit Heatera
marketed
under
the Reznor
3. Dimensional Data
Fan-Type, Gravity-Vented Unit Heater
f+~ !
su6PEnsxGN
Poxws
(21 OR (Y)
3/G-,6
PE*LE WREIO
A
Horizontal
SEEMOTEI
OPTIc+a.
, I+,
Vent Positon
--
VERTICAL
LWVEfS
REAR
RIGlIT SIDE
,Size
Q,r-
I/
K mtLRa.
25
m-Y32
13-9J16
27-l/16
! 31-7116
5271321
14-7/16
14-l/32
19
4Rnd
10-g/32
16 112 l/2
21-l/2
50
30-Y32
13-9J16
27-l/16
/ 31-7/16
527/321
14-7/16
14-l/32
19
4Rnd
lo-9132
16 l/2' l/2
21-112 ,27-21132
75
30-Y32
159116
27-1116 / 31-7116
527t32
14-7/16
14-l/32
19
5Oml
lo-17132
16 l/2
21-112
27-21J32
100
30-Y32
17-9J16
3Q-7116 / 31-7Jl6
5-27132
14-706
14-l/32
19
60val
12-29132
16 1J2 l/2
21-112
27-21132
125
32
23-Y16
3Q-7J16 ; 31-7Jl6
527132
14-7116
14-l/32
17-lYl6
7Oml
14-7116
16 l/2 l/2
21-l/2
28-l/2
165
4O-Y32
20-Y16
35-7/16
;35-lY16
4-718 119-lY32
1523J32
23-13'32
8Oml
14-9132
24 112: l/2
27
36-2502
200
40-Y32
23-Y16
36-3'16
/WY16
4-718 h9-lY32
15-23J32
23-13J32
8Chal
14-13132
24 lJ2 l/2
27
36-25/32
250
4UY32
28-13J16
36-3/16
b5lYl6
4-718
19-lY32
15-2Z32
21-13Jl6
lOOmI
12-11/32
24 l/2.1/2
27
38-3'8
300
40-Y32
28-13Jl6
36-11/16!35-Wl6
4-7J8
19-15J32
15-23J32 21-13Jl6
10 Owl
12-11/32
24 34;
27
38-38
400
40-Y32
37-l/16
37-Y16
4-7/8
15-23J32
12-l
27
38-3J8
Suspension
Notes:
/S-15/16
119-1502
21-13J16
13
112
l/2
24 3/4:1/2
27-21J32
Use Dimension G for two-point suspension and E and F for fourpoint suspension. (Two-point suspensiori is standard: four-point is optional. Four-point suspension is available either factory or field installed.)
-I31
Page 3
Gravity-Vented
Unit Heater
, y-7,
(4) SUSPENSION
POINTS
3/6-16FEMU.ElHREAO
L-S
----+
Horizontal
25
i
100
125
166
30-Y32
30-Y32
30-Y32
3C-Y32
32
40-Y32
159ll6
13-9ll6
15-9J16
17-9/16
23-Y16
ZO-Y16
200
250
300.
4QO
N-Y32
43-916
43-916
43-9l16
23-Y16
Z&13/16
28-1306
37-l/16
/+!Sl
DUCT FLANGE
-.
6LlPPl.Y
D-.--
(NOT SUPPLY
RIGHT SIDE
C
QD
43-3/8
50
50
50
47-112
61
F@
Hanger
31-7116 5-27132 14-7116
31-7/16 5-2702
14-706
31-7116 5-27132 14-7116
31-7116 5-27132 14-7116
31-7116 5-27132 14-7/16
35-lY16
4-718 N-15/32\
66-l/2
35-lYl6
66-112 35-lY16
66-l/2
35-lYl6
66-112 !35-1316
4-718
4-718
4-7/8
4-718
ELECTRIC
Vent Position
7\.
FRONT
Site
LINE)
REAR
/
G
j OCQ
/ 61-38
I
i 61-36
/ 61-38
/ 61-38
! 65-29132
76-118
19-lY321 76-l/8
14lY321-76l/8
19lY32j
76-l/8
19-15/32/ 76-l/8
H
19
19
19
19
17-lYl6/
/
1
1
23-13321
1
23-13/32i
21-13/161
21-13/16/
21-1306:
4 Rnd
4Rnd
5-l
6otal
7 otal
80@
8O\al
lOoMI
1Oovd)
120~1
J
10-932
l@9/32
lo-17/32
12-29132
14-7116
14-9/32
14-1332
12-11132
12-11132
13
K
otzl
16
16
16
16
16
24
24
24
24
24
L
Nat
l/2
112
112
112
l/2
112
l/2
l/2
3/4
3l4
Ro
I
;
i
;
!
!
j
l/2
l/2
l/2
l/2
112
l/2
l/2
112
l/2
l/2
q Blower
screws.
aMotor
Shipping Block - Remove the wooden block located under
the motor bracket. Find the two rubber pads shipped in the instruction
envelope. Place these pads on the ends of the motor bracket bolts.
aMotor
Shipping Plate -- Blower models that are equipped with motors of 314 HP or less have a metal shipping plate attached between the
motor and the blower housing. Remove and discard the shipping plate.
Note: On units factory equipped with an optional belt guard, the belt
guard must be removed in order to reach the shipping plate.
that it will discharge directly toward the source of cold air from a distance of 1.5 to 20 feet.
Units should not be installed closer than 18 inches from any wall.
CAUTION:
Do not locate the heater where it
may be exposed to water spray, rain or dripping water.
Air
~\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\~\\
Top ctearance
rl
** When supplied with optional downturn nozzle, bottom clearance is 42. For service purposes, on standard units. bottom
clearance exceeding minimum ( 12) is not required but may
be desirable.
*** For servicing purposes only, rear must have 24 clearance.
All fuel-burning equipment must be supplied with the air that enters
into the combustion process and is then vented to the outdoors. Sufficient air must enter the equipment location to replace that exhausted
through the heater vent system. In the past, the infiltration of outside
air assumed in heat loss calculations (one air change per hour) was
assumed to be sufficient. However, current construction methods utilizing more insulation, vapor barriers. tighter fitting and gasketed doors
and windows or weather-stripping,
and mechanical exhaust fans may
now require the introduction of outside air through wall openings or
ducts.
The requirements for combustion and ventilation air depend upon
whether the unit is located in a confined or unconfined space. An
unconfined space is defined as a space whose volume is not less than
50 cubic feet per 1000 BTUH of the installed appliance. Lhder all
conditions, enough air must be provided to ensure there will not be a
negative pressure condition within the equipment room or space. For
specific requirements for confined space installation, see Paragraph 7.
1-U Page 5
not install a unit in a confined space without providing wall openleading to and from the space. Provide openings near the floor
_ -ceiling for ventilation and air for combustion as shown in Figure I,
depending on the combustion air source as noted in Items I, 2, and 3
below the illustration.
8. Horizontal/Vertical
Vent Outlet
All heaters are designed for either a horizontal or vertical vent outlet.
Sizes 25, 50, 75, 100, 165, and 200 are shipped with the vent outlet
inscalled in the horizontal position. Sizes !25,250,300, and 400 require field assembly of the vent outlet. When the outlet is in the horizontal position, it is recommended that a !2- 18 piece of straight pipe
be connected to the outlet before installing an elbow.
Add total BTUH of all appliances in the confined space and divide by
figures below for square inch free area size of each (top and bottom)
opening.
1. Air from inside the building--openings 1 square inch free area per
1000 BTUH. Never less than 100 square inches free area for each
opening. See ( 1) in Figure !.
2. Air from outside through duct -- openings 1 square inch free area
per 2000 BTUH. See (2) in Figure 1.
3. Air direct from outside -- openings I square inch free area per 4000
BTUH. See (3) in Figure 1.
NOTE: For further details on supplying combustion air to a confined
space, see the National Fuel Gas Code ANSI Z223. la (latest edition ).
IMPORTANT INSTALLATION
NOTE: The instructions and
tiillu t tions i
sembled in the horizontal oosition, To assemble the vent outlet in
the vertical Do&ion. follow the instructions REVERSING the DO&ions of the flue collar assemblv and the cover.
1. Remove the two center screws (one on each side) that are holding
pieces in place during shipping. Use these screws
and the 16 screws (#10x1/2 sheet metal screws) in the plastic bag.
8.1 HorizontalNertical
Vent Outlet -- Sizes 25,
50,75,100,165 and 200
The heater in these sizes is shipped with the vent outlet in the horizontal positon. If a vertical vent outlet connection is needed, reverse the
positions of the flat cover plate and the flue collar assembly. See Figure 2.
Sizes 25,50,75,100,
165, and 200 - Vent is
factory assembled in
the horizontal position.
Sizes 25,50,75,100,
165, and 200 Change the position
of the flue collar
ssembly for a
:rtical vent outlet
Flange on
r It:
Collar
SUPport
*afthood
Front of
Flue Collar
!+l~DOl-t
Underneath
the
Drafthood
I
434
- Size 12.5
Pztg:e 6
i.K..
1.
--
3:
Screw (4)
The vent outlet on these heaters requires field assembly. The three sheet metal pieces and a parts bag including
shipped attached to the drafthood of the heater.
1. Remove the two center screws (one on each side) that are hol ding
the three flue outlet pieces in place during shipping. Use these SCrews
and the 24 screws (#10x1/2 sheet metal screws) in the plastic bag.
ILVC--1
DluFlHOOD
434 Page
.?---- .erify that it has sufficient load-carrying capacity to support the weight
ne unit.
WARNING:
When the heater is lifted for suspension, the bottom must be protected.
If the wooden crate bottom has been removed, the bottom of the heater
will have to be supported with plywood or the appropriately placed
material. If the bottom is not supported. the bottom access panel could
be damaged. Also, when lifting a blower unit, support the blower and
motor to prevent the unit from tipping.
All blower models have legs that support the blower assembly during
shipping. After the unit is suspended, these legs should be removed.
Be sure that the threaded hanger rods are locked to the heater as shown
in Figure 5.
Optional,
Field-Installed
Hanger
Kits:
2) Two-Point Swivel Connectors (fan models only) Option CK8 (See Figure 6.)
The purpose of this option kit is to adapt the standard hanger bracket
so that the heater can be suspended from I I. threaded. stationary pipe.
The swivel connector screws into the thrcadsd hanger bracket on the
heater and onto the 1 threaded pipe used for hanging the heater.
The kit includes two swivel hanger connector assemblies and two lock
washers.
Figure 5 - Suspension
3) Four-Point with Swivel Connectors (fan-models only) Option CK9 (See Figure 7)
This option package is designed to con\ crt a fun-type heater from standard two-point suspension to four-point suspension with swivel connectors. By installing this kit the standard fan-type heater can be hung
from four 1. threaded. stationary pipes. The kit includes two hanger
bracket assemblies. four swivel hanger connector assemblies and four
lock washers.
stationary pipes. The kit includes four swivel hanger connector assembiies and four lock washers.
Venting
2.
3.
4.
10. Venting
DANGER: Failure to provide proper venting
could result in death, serious injury, and/or
property damage. This heater must be installed
with a vent connection and proper vent to the
outside of the building. Install vent in accordance with Part 7, Venting of Equipment, of
the National Fuel Gas Code, ANSI 2223.1 (latest edition) or applicable provision of national,
state or local codes. A Canadian installation
must be in accordance with the CAN/CGA
B149.1 and B149.2, Installation Code for Gas
Burning Appliances and Equipment, and applicable local codes. Also, follow venting recommeqdations listed below.
Safe operation of any gravity-vented gas equipment requires a properly operating vent system, correct provision for the combustion air
(See Paragraphs 6-7) and regular maintenance
and inspection (See page 27). See Hazard Levels, page 2.
Heaters have the following
NOTE:
Standard
units manufacturedprior
to IO/89 (Serial No. Date
Code prior to
Model
Size
25 - 50
75
100
125
250 - 300
400
5 Oval
6 Oval
7 Oval
8 Oval
10 Oval
12 Oval
outlet in the
sizes listed. Units manufactured prior to IO/89 wirh Option BTI have
the horizonral/verticnl
\-em outlet.
Requirements
- All Models
5.
6.
Tigure 8 Venting
TEE YITH
INSTALLED
CAP
SLOPE AT LEAST
l/Y INCH PER FOOT
SNALL OIARETER
TUBING T O DRAIN
Page
T-t
Table 1
Maximum Horizontal Run for Double Wall Type B
Connector and Dourble-Wall
Type B Vent
ModelSizes
~25/50~75~100~125~165/200)250/300~
400
Vent Diameter
Vertical
)
I
I
--
Figure llVenting
Arrangement
without Vent
Run
Table 2
Maximum
Model sixes
Vertical
!
Horizontal
Run for Single Wall Metal Pipe
25.60~75~
1OOj 1251 155/2OOj 250/3001 400
Vent Diameter
I
I
I
I
I
I
Figure 9 Venting
Arranement
through a
434 Page 10
2 IIIIN
i I %.L,,,
/FROW JACK
FROM
GAS
SUPPLY
WARNING
This appliance is equipped for a maximum gas
supply pressure of l/2 pound, 8 ounces, or 14
inches water column. Supply pressure higher
than l/2 pound requires installation of an additional service regulator external to the unit.
PRESSURE TESTING
SUPPLY PIPING
GAS
GROUNO
TO
CONTROLS
NOTE:
Test Pressures Above l/2 PSI: Disconnect the heater and manual
n
I
valve from the gas supply line which is to be tested. Cap orplug
the supply line.
Test Pressures Below 112PSI: Before testing, close the manual
valve on the heater.
Piping Connection
Install a ground joint union and manual shut-off valve upstream of the
unit control system. as shown in Figure 12. The l/8 plugged tapping
in the shut-off valve provides connection for supply line pressure test
gauge. The National Fuel Gas Code requires the installation of a trap
with a minimum 3 drip leg. Local codes may require a minimum drip
leg longer than 3 (typically 6).
Gas connection sizes are included in the Dimensional Tables in Paragraph 3. After all connections are made, disconnect the pilot supply at
the control valve and bleed the system of air. Reconnect the pilot line
and leak-test all connections by brushing on a soap solution.
Supply
Feet
Gmvlty
Gmvitv
Specific
Soecific
I
t
I.
Length
of
For Natural Gas: Manifold gas pressure is regulated by the.combination valve to 3.5 W.C. Inlet pressure to the valve must be a minimum
of 5 W.C.or as noted on the rating plate and a maximum of 14 W.C.
CAPACITY
OF PIPING
per Hour
besad
on 0.3 W.C.
for Natural
Gas
- 0.6 (1000
for Prooane
Gas - 1.6 (2550
wno@r
Dim
--IUI
4a
WARNING:
Manifold gas pressure must never
exceed 3.5 W.C. for natural gas and 10 W.C.
for propane gas.
Lines
Cubic
Connectlonr
ahown are
by installer.
WARNING: All components of a gas supply system must be leak tested prior to placing equipment in service. NEVER TEST FOR LEAKS
WITH AN OPEN FLAhIE. Failure to comply
could result in personal injury, property damage or death.
Gas
(F TRAP
Figure 12 - Supply
Sizing
l/P
+ural
,1
92
7.1
.63
50
60
70
90
56
50
48
40
100
125
150
38
34
31
175
200
26
26
NOTE:
3/4
) Propane
(1
Natural
350
285
--245
215
214
149
131
730
590
--500
440
400
370 I
320
305
190
157
.-130
115
31
28
24
23
105
96
84
79
64
59
51
48
195
180
180
150
119
110
98
92
72
64
59
55
44
39
38
34
130
120
110
100
79
73
87
81
When
string
See Natlonal
supply
Fuel
lines,
consider
Gas Code
for
of Plpe
Propane
58.AS
38
34
,
1
I
I
I
Natural
1 Propane
118
I]
QR
-]
79
70
21
19
17
18
Natural
Dro
Prersuro
BTU/Cubic
EITU/Cubkc
posslbilitles
additional
174
1 .,a,,
,-I,*
Propane
445
244
228
1,
and
plpe
543
871
I
I
/ NsWraI
2100
1 1650
;iii
870
1
i
AC1
am
409
,I
1
.Arn
I.%?
1270
865
775
810
580
1
1
372
342
1
i
1105
1050
874
841
930
870
790
1
1
1
587
531
478
710
850
810
1
1
/
433
397
372
Natural
1100
360
--305
288
275
250
225
210
of future
expansion
information
on supply
r oot)
Foot)
a a 1-1.
l-l,&
Propene
Em0
,
1
195
168
188
490
480
410
299
281
250
153
137
128
360
350
320
232
214
195
Increased
sizing.
heailng
..,,
L.
I
Propane
1281
1007
requirements.
I
131
Page
II
For Propane Gas: Manifold gas pressure is regulated by the combination valve to IO W.C. Inlet pressure to the valve must be a minimum of
1I W.C. and a maximum of 14 W.C.
Before attempting to measure or adjust manifold gas pressure. the inlet
(supply) pressure must be within the specified range for the gas being
used both when the heater is in operation and on standby. Incorrect
inlet pressure could cause excessive manifold gas pressure immediately or at some future time.
Instructions
to Check Manifold
Pressure:
Remove Access
Panel to Make
Connections
CAUTION:
If any of the original wire as supplied with the appliance must be replaced, it
must be replaced with wiring material having
a temperature rating of at least 105C except
for blocked vent switch, limit control, energy
cutoff, and sensor lead wires which must be
150C. See Hazard Levels, page 2.
If the heater has field-installed options that require electrical connections, consult the instruction sheet and wiring diagram supplied in the
option package.
Specific wiring diagrams that include standard and factory-installed
options are included with the heater. Typical wiring diagrams are on
the next six pages, showing standard single-stage heating with standard match-lit pilot and optional intermittent spark pilot with and without lockout.
The operating sequence of the heater can be found on the heater wiring
diagram and is published in Paragraph 25, Check Installation and StartUP.
CAUTION:
FAN-TYPE MODEL FOR OPTIONAL 50 HERTZ OPERATION
A fan-type heater with Option AK11 is designed
for operation from a 220-240V/50Hz/single
phase power source. Connection to any other
voltage or frequency source may cause failure
of the equipment and/or damage to persons or
property.
In the event that this product is purchased or destined for export
markets, the buyer is responsible for meeting any and all local codes
covering installation and labeling of the product. The equipment
as provided by the manufacturer is A.C.A. design-certified and
comes with English-only labels and installation instructions.
4gure 13 - Electrical
Connections
434 Page I?
-- Pages 13 - 18
FAN-TYPE, GRAVITY-VENTED,
MODEL SIZES 25-400 WITH MATCH LIT PILOT, SINGLE STAGE
HEATING, NATURAL /PROPANE
Operating
Wiring Notes
Sequence
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
MIRE
CRIC
NUT
1EI)L.L
IAN
CONTmL
-_.ANU.L
--__-
W.D. 113192
REV *2
75
125
175
1 #18gauge
/ #18 gauge
I #14aauae
SINGLE
r2.E
IL
STAGE
I
CAUTION:
If any of the original wire as supplied with the appliance must be replaced, it must be replaced with wiring material
having a temperature rating of at least lOSC, except for blocked
vent switch, limit control, energy cutoff, and sensor lead wires
which must be 150C. See Hazard Levels, page 2.
j
;
I
LIWIT
150
250
350
RESET
__-__-
FAN-TYPE,
GRAVITY-VENTED,
MODEL
SIZES 25-400 WITH
OR WITHOUT
TIMED
LOCKOUT,
SINGLE
STAGE HEATING,
INTERiiITTENT
NATURAL
SPARK
/PROPANE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
fACTURY
YIRING
______
FIELD
-,
OPT.
WIRINQ
&oT1
220/!/50,
115/1/6G.
206/l/60
OR 230/v/60
OPTIONAL
s/w SYITCN
t ckcs J
FAN
ROTOR
rxPDY
n
.
MIRE
CR:IlP
NUT
FAN
TERNINAL
ISEE
CONTROL
NOTE
CONTROL
TRAMSFORRER
YJ
Y.R.
OR
ROBERTSHAY
REOUNOANT
GAS VALVE
REV
d.D. 113201
434
Page
14
WITH
Wiring Notes
Berating Sequence
. Set the thermostat at its lowest setting.
2. Follow lighting instructions
and establish pilot.
3. Turn on power to the unit.
4. Set the thermostat at desired
setting.
5. Thermostat calls for heat, tir:
ing unit at full rate.
6. Fan control senses heat exchanger temperature, energizing the fan motor.
p-
PILOT
#2
OPT.
AH2
OR
AH3
ALTERNATE
HONEYYELL
REDUNDANT
GAS VALVE
BLOWER-TYPE,
STAGE HEATING,
GRAVITY-VENTED,
MODEL
SIZES 25-100 WITH
NATURAL
/PROPANE,
DIRECT
DRIVE
perating Sequence
I. Set the thermostat at its lowest
setting.
2. Follow lighting instructions and
establish pilot.
3. Turn on power to the unit.
4. Set the thermostat at desired setting.
5. Thermostat calls for heat, firing
unit at full rate.
6. Fan control senses heat exchanger temperature, energizing
the blower motor.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
MATCH
LIT
PILOT,
SINGLE
Wiring Notes
The following controls are field installed options: thermostat.
The following controls are factory installed options: summer/winter switch
Dotted wiring installed by others.
Warning: An EC0 circuit interruption is a major failure caused by amalfunction of the primary safety
controls or mis-wiring, and will required correction of the cause of failure and the replacement of the
fan and limit control wiring before the unit can be returned to service.
Caution: If any of the original wire as supplied with the appliance must be replaced with wiring
material having a temperature rating of at least 105C, except for energy cutoff. iimit control, and
blocked vent switch wires which must be 150C.
Use 14 ga. wire for blower circuit wiring on the unit.
Use 18 ga. wire for all wiring except blower motor circuit.
Line and blower motor branch wire sizes should be of a size to prevent voltage drops beyond 5% of
the supply line voltage.
Three-speed motor
connections are as
follows:
* Factory-wired
speed
FACTORY
______
FIELD
.-
OPT.
6LOUER
MOTOR
UIRING
UIRING
XX
YIRE
CRItlP
NUT
TEAPIINAL
FAN
CONTROL
aLK
LINE
BLU
c?
RRN
ZYV
OPTIONAL
s/u SWITCH
yJ,-BL!.
PYR
AMAL
1
RESET
lo
YEL
GROUND TERR:NAL
(TERIIINAL
STRIP)
BAN
cLEAY
fLK_&
BRN
SINGLE
GAS
LIfiIT
CONTROL
ENERGY
CUT-OFF
(SEE NOTE
STAGE
VALVE
BRN
Yl
..
W.D. 113217
434
Page
15
BLOWER-TYPE,
GRAVITY-VENTED,
MODEL
SIZES SO-250 WITH MATCH
LIT PILOT, SINGLE
STAGE HEATING,
NATURAL
/PROPANE,
BELT DRIVE (Note: Belt drive is standard on Sizes 125400;
,,r;?Otional
on Sizes 50-100.)
Wiring Notes
vperating
1.
2.
3.
4.
Sequence
FACTORY
YIRING
------
;;g$G
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
&I
115/l
OPT.
S/U
RELAY
CONTACTS
2
Y
tKc
5LK
/60,
208/!
/60
sil
OR 230/l/60
GLOWER
_ 5LK
HOTOR
UIRE
NUT
I
CRIRP
TERMINAL
B
x
+
FAN
..
._
CONTROL
BLU
I
DI
/-.
::
c
-;
BRN
2YV
GROUND
CTERttINAL
F
%
E
:,
7
TERMINAL
STRIP)
SINGLE
GAS
STAGE
VALVE
;-.
W.D. 113218
434
Page 16
BLOWER-TYPE,
GRAVITY-VENTED,
MODEL
SIZES 165400 WITH MATCH LIT PILOT,
STAGE HEATING,
NATURAL
/PROPANE,
BELT DRIVE, BLOWER
MOTOR
CONTACTOR
contactor is standard on Sizes 300 and 400; Optional on other sizes.)
Operating
Wiring Notes
Sequence
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
( nldr)
FACTORY
UIRING
____-_
FIELO
115/l/60,
STANDARD
208/l/60
VOLTAGE
FOR
BLOWER
CONTACTOR
MOTOR
CONTACTS
(con1
OR 230/l/60
BY00
IS 230/t/60
BLOUER
0LOKR
t!OTOR
CONTACTOf
MOTOR
CONTACTS
UIRING
OPT.
.2
/*
::E:K
-n
.
UIRE
CRIMP
NUT
TERMINAL
BLU
0RN
2Ltv
GROUND
ITERtlINAL
YEL
GAS
YEL
BLX
STAGE
VALVE
RLK
>-
TE?MINAL
STRIP)
SINGLE
LIHIT
CONTROL
W.D. 113219
SINGLE
(Note: Motor
REO
ENERGY
CUT-OFF
ISEE
NOTE
BRN
tl
L
-l31 Page
17
BLOWER-TYPE,
GRAVITY-VENTED,
MODEL
SIZES 25400 WITH INTERMITTENT
SPARK PILOT
ITH OR WITHOUT
TIMED
LOCKOUT
(For line voltage wiring, refer to the corresponding
diagram
,.yL? ing match-lit
pilot.)
Wiring Notes
G t,iating Sequence
1. Set the thermostat at its lowest setting.
2. Follow lighting instructions
and establish pilot.
3. Turn on power to the unit.
4. Set the thermostat at desired
setting.
5. Thermostat calls for heat,
firing unit at full rate..
6. Fan control senses heat exchanger temperature, energizing the blower motor.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
$2
-u*bc,
WI
Fgg
OF
voltage
match-lit
Et4EgY
wiring,
pilot.
refer
to corresponding
&yLl-~~
5
BRN
$2;
m
Ot=TIONAC
S/W SWITCH
ELK
/
BLK
GROUND
(TERttINAL
sn&EikAY
TERHINAL
STRIP1
BRN
1- -
CHASSIS
Page
diagram
RED
434
..
For line
showing
4
;:
I_
L
GRD.
I
T(m
W.R.
OR
ROBERTSHAU
REDUNDANT
GAS VALVE
HONEYWELL
REDUNDANT
GAS VALVE
18
-.-.
.::
6L I
Figure
16
A thermostat is not standard equipment but is an installation requirement. Use either an optional thermostat available with the heater or a
field-supplied
thermostat.
Install according to the thermostat
manufacturers instructions. Make sure that the heat anticipator setting on the thermostat is in accordance with the amperage value noted
on the wiring diagram of your heater.
Terminal Strip Connections - The standard heater is equipped with a
two-screw terminal connector strip (See Figure 14) for easy connection to the low voltage controls (24V).
Figure
- Wiring
5P-ST
(OPTION
REUY
CL211
14 -
Two Screw
Terminal
Connector
Strip for 24Volt Wiring
+dH+
-
MIT MIRE
FACTCRY
SP-ST RELAY
REZNOR P/H 98119
T O 6 TERHIHAL
ON TERINAL
SIOE OF TiiO
STAGE RELAl
COIL lEROYNl
rERnINIL
Figure 15 Optional
TERMINAL
TERMIhAL
STRIP
STRIP
Four Screw
Terminal
Connector
Strip for 24- \
Volt Wiring
OPT
*BF2
TERflINAL
CQ
STRIP
*CL1
OPT
*5F3
TERMINAL
^P
#CL9
STRIP
Adjusting
Belt.
Model Size
Speed
25
l M edium
Low
50
*High
Medium
High
75
*Medium
Low
*High
100
Medium
Low
:..
..
c
4. Cut the crimped cap from the end of the wire that you intend to use
and strip the insulation.
5. Disconnect the factory-wired connection and re-wire, using the
newly stripped wire.
6. Put a wire nut on the end of the blower motor wire that was disconnected.
7. Replace the heater side panel and turn on the gas and the electric.
1CAUTION:
An external duct system static pres- 1
sure not within the limits shokn on the rating
plate or improper adjustment of the motor pullev or belt mav overload the motor.
WARNING:
In the event the Blocked Vent
Sensor causes the heater to shut off, determine
and correct the cause. Failure to do so could
result in personal injury or death.
NOTE: Effective April 199 I. all gravit? vented unit heaters include a
blocked vent shut-off system. Vnits manufactured prior to April 1991
do not include a blocked vent shut-off system.
CAUTION:
The operating valve is the prime
safety shutoff. All gas supply lines must be
is ~n~pl~~\d
\en>inc
itlncticm.
.A Iou
voltape
23. Burners
These unit heaters have individually formed steel burners with accurately die-formed ports to give controlled flame stability without lifting
or flashback with either natural or propane gas. The burners are lightweight and factory mounted in an assembly which permits them to be
removed as a unit for inspection or service.
down from the front.) The adjustment screws for the air shutters are
visible at the rear of the burner rack. See Figure 18.
When making the adjustment. close the air shutters no more than is
necessary to eliminate the problem condition.
Observe the flame for yellow-tipping.
A limited amount of yellowtipping is permissible for liquefied petroleum gases. Other fuels should
not display any yellow-tipping.
Two adjustment screws are used (See Figure I8 ). Rotating the screws
clockwise closes the shutters. reducing the primary air supply. Counterclockwise rotation opens the shutters. increasing the primal?; air
supply. The two adjustment screwi should be rotated alternately to
open or close the shutters. Attemptin, 0 to gain adjustment by not alternating between the two screws may cause the shutters to bind.
After proper adjustment has been completed. eliminating the problem
condition. close the bottom panel and replace the retaining screws
prior to start-up:
Requirements
are shown in
aCheck
vent system to be sure that it is installed according to the
instructions in Paragraph 10.
q
q
Check piping for leaks and proper gas line pressure. Bleed gas lines
of trapped air. See paragraph 11.
Check electrical wiring. Be sure all wire gauges are as recommended.
A service disconnect switch should be used. Verify that fusing or
circuit breakers are adequate for the load use.
Check that any field-installed
dlation.
DANGER:
Failure to install and/or adjust air
shutters according to directions could cause
property damage, personal injury, and or
death.
Start-Up
Typical Operating Sequence for Units with
Standard Standing (Match-Lit) Pilot:
1. Turn on the manual gas valve.
2. Follow the lighting instructions and establish pilot. To light the
pilot. either use the lighter hole in the bottom panel of the heater
(Figure 19) or open the bottom panel (Figure 20).
To open the bottom
panel, unscrew the
two
sheet metal
screws located at the
rear of the bottom
panel.
The bottom panel will
hinge down from the
front of the heater.
Close the bottom
panel after establishing pilot flame.
Figure 20
0 With the unit in operation. measure manifold gas pressure. Manifold pressure for natural gas should be 3.5 W.C. and 10 W.C. for
propane gas. See Paragraph 11.
0 Turn the unit off and on. pausing t\vo minutes between each cycle.
Observe for smooth ignition.
q
q
Blower itfodel - Check motor amps with an amp meter. The maximum amp rating on the motor nameplate must not be exceeded.
DANGER: The gas burner in this gas-fired equipment is designed and equipped to provide safe
and economically controlled comnlete combustion. However, if the installation does not permit
the burner to receive the proper supply of combustion air, complete combustion may not occur.
The rest&is incomulete combustion which produces carbon monoxide, a poisonous gas that can
cause death. Safe oneration of indirect-fired pas burninp eauinment reauires a nroperlv onerating vent svstem which vents all flue nroducts to the outside atmosnhere. FAILURE TO PROVIDE PROPER VENTING WILL RESULT IN A HEALTH HAZARD WHICH COULD CAUSE
SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY OF DEATH.
Always comply with the combustion air requirements in the installation codes and in Paragraphs
6 and 7. Combustion air at the burner should be regulated only by manufacturer-provided equipment. NEVER RESTRICT OR OTHERWISE ALTER THE SUPPLY OF COMBUSTION AIR
TO ANY HEATER. Indoor units installed in a confined space must be supplied with air for
combustion as required by Code and in Paragraph 7 of this heater installation manual. MAINTAIN THE VENT SYSTEM IN STRUCTURALLY
SOUND AND PROPERLY OPERATING
CONDITION.
OPTIONAL
EQUIPMENT
CAUTION:
To avoid getting burned, adjust
louvers prior to heater operation.
If louvers
options.
NOZZLE
OPT.
CD2
AND
CD4
OPT.
CD3
AND
CDS
-I
OUTlET
NOZZLE
Sizes
25-125
165-400
P z
--J
434
A
Page
24
j+---
Figure 22 - Optional
Downturn Nozzles
A
16-l/2
23-l/2
Range of
Air E)eflection
w-90
SO-90
The option package includes complete installation and wiring instructions. The venter is wired so that when the thermostat calls for heat,
the thermostat contacts close the circuit which. after a delay of approximately 40 seconds. starts the venter. When the venter starts, air
from the venter blower closes an air flow switch that is built into the
venter. The closing of the air flow switch completes the electric circuit
to the burner controls. opening the gas valve. When the thermostat is
satisfied, the thermostat closes the gas valve and de-energizes the time
delay relay. Approximately 40 seconds after the thermostat is satisfied, the air flow switch resets to the open position.
The addition of the optional power venter changes the vent size
requirements of the heater. The vent sizes and allowable vent lengths
are listed in the installation instructions included in the option package.
The option package also includes two hanger brackers to convert a fantype heater to four-point suspension. Four-point suspension is required
to maintain the unit in a level position without putting stress on rhr gas
valve or piping.
Blower
Model Size
Height
Width
The
flange option is
duct
Duct Connection
25-50
75
designed
Sizes
(inches)
with
Optional
Duct Flange
250-300
400
100
125
165
200
75-7~8 75-718 75-718 23-718 23-7/a
72-3/4 14-3/4 20-l/2
17-l/2 20-112
75-m
70-3/4
23-718
26
23-7/a
34-l I4
30. Optional Polytube Adapter - Options CD6, CDS, and CD11 (Blower
Models only j
The polytube adapter option is designed to adapt this
blower-type heater for use with polytube ductwork. The
use of polytubes for air distribution is common in greenhouse applications and some industrial applications. A
polytube distribution system delivers warm air to a specific area, reducing the need for complete area heating.
The polytubr: adapter ia abaii;tbir: in three installation
designs making it adaptable to many applications and
building structures.
t
WARNINGS:
This adapter is to be
used only on units equipped with a
blower. At no time should the free
area in the polytube be less than the
listed minimum.
Failure to comply
with these warnings could result in
severe personal injury, death and/or
property damage.
The following w chart shows soecil
L fication information
CFM AT
25 ESP
MODEL
HOLES
\EE;
10
18
145
125
1540
16
185
2035
24
240
200
2465
300
250
3085
360
400
Number
Diameter
Spacing
110
1235
300
(I
(INCHES)
100
165
!i%K:
925
75
covering the
MINIMUM
FREE AREA
3700
4935
5Opairs
l-112
12
40 pairs
l-7/8
15
50 pairs
) l-718
Spacing
Number
12
42 pi
Diameter
Spacing
Number
Diameter
2-111
14
40~
2-1/:
15
75 pi airs
2
9
60 oi airs
)
550
24
I
Number
Diameter
Spacing
Number
Diameter
Spacing
Number
Diameter
Spacing
Number
Diameter
Spacing
Number
425
/ 50pairs
l-112
18
60 paws
l-112
15
50 pairs
..
75pain
2
10
. .
; 60 pairs
1 2-l/2
1 15
1 100 pairs
1
12
94 pairs
1
! 76
125 pairs
1
12
75 pairs
l-1/2
60 pairs
l-1/2
20
75 pairs
l/2
--
--
1 75pavs
12
I 1R
.-
/ 6Opairs
( 2-l/2
I 20
75 paws
2
-xl
I
--
! 100 paws
/ l-7/8
) 15
unit heaters.
1 15OFT.
(
j
.-
! 75 paws
I l-1/2
-: 75 pairs
12
1 74
-.
! 100 paws
! l-7/8
! 18
The polytube adapter option package does not include polytubing. Polytubing can be obtained from a apply distributor zuch as FOF Products.
Inc., P. 0. Box E. 1505 Rucine Street. Delevan. WI 5.3I 15: hC%IE Engineering Co.. P.O. Box 97% Mu&x+!.
OK 7LW: or any Iucal greenhouse
supply distributor. Some local code authorities require the polytube mntrtial
to be ;I listed
nxwriul.
Consult ~<xk :illthorir\
ha\ inp jurl\cfiction
und
tht: polyt&
wpplicr
to dstrrlnine
the: nppropriatct
polo
tnbr
msreri~l
and
rccomrncnd~d
nwthod~
of w\p~n~irw.
4.31
Page
25
Figure 25 - Optional
The multiple heater control options are designed to permit the control of up to six
heaters (one master and five slave units) with a single thermostat or a time clock and
single/multiple thermostats.
Figure 26 - Multiple
and/or CL32
Guards
Optional
Belt
Guard
Optional
Blower
Inlet Guard
Installed
Figure 27 - Optional
Field-Installed
Blower/Filter
.--
2 I - --) 20x25
1 101610
c-ic.
1 101623
Cabinet
434
Page
26
NOTE:
replacement parts.
visible.
Do rhe
following:
(a) Disconnect the
pilot tubing from the
pilot burner.
4
(b) For standing pii .
lot. disconnect the
thermocouple from
/
Pilot
the valve.
Thermocouule p
Tubing
(c) For optional
(standard piiotj
spark pilot, disconFigure 29 - Pilot Location
nect the flame sensing wire and high tension (spark) lead from the ignition controller.
BurnerRack Support
with Indexing /
\ Screws /
three) that hold the burner rack support. (For screw location. refer
to Figure 30.) Remove the burner rack support allowing the burner
rack assembly to swing down (See Figure 3 1).
7B. Heatersmanufacturedm-iorto S/91 (Serial No. Date Code XQH)
Loosenthe sheet metal screws (two or three) located at the front of
the burner rack assembly. See Figure 30. These screws retain the
burner rack support. While supporting the burner rack assembly,
slide the burner rack support and remove it from the screws. allowing the burner rack assembly to swing down (See Figure 3 1L
8. To Remove the Burner Rack -- With the burner rack assembly
hanging down, lift up on the rear and slide the assembly up and
out of the manifold support brackets.
Hinged Down
(contd)
Figure 35 - Pilot
Removal
Orifices
Standard >Iatch-
Ontional SDark
Burner
Assembly
Sup$o~? Brackets
Burner Rack
Completely
Removed
9. To remove the individual burners:
a. Remove the flash
carryover (one screw
er burner).
Figure 34 - Individual Burners
4ith the burner rack
upside down, remove
the sheet metal screws
(located at the rear)
that retain the burner
holddown.
c. Lift the rear of the
bumer upward slightly
and pull back, removing the individual
burners.
d. To replace individual burners, reverse the above procedure.
10. To replace the burner rack assemblyand the bottom panel, reverse the above procedure (Steps l-8).
Individual burners may be cleaned using air pressure. Use an air nozzle
to blow out scale and dust accumulation from the burner ports. Alternately, blow through burner ports and venturi.
c!.:.:
,T---%
CAUTION:
Eye protection
@
Optional Spark Pilot
If the heater is equipped with an optional spark pilot. check the spark
gap. Spark gap must be maintained to. 100. (See Figure 37.) When reinstalling the pilot of a heater with optional spark ignition. be sure to
include the pilot hole cover plate (See Figure 3.5).
100
SPAFiK
Gi,P
Pilot Burner
is recommended.
Use a fine wire to dislodge any stubborn particles. Do not use anything that might change the port size.
When any service is completed, be careful to reassemble correctly to
ensure that no unsafe conditions are created. When re-lighting. always
follow the lighting instructions on the heater.
/-Y=
System
CAUTION:
Due
to high voltage on
pilot spark wire
and pilot
electrode, do not touch
when energized.
See Hazard Levels, page 2.
CAUTION:
Wearing eye protection
cleaning this heater is recommended.
I
Ignition Controller for
Optional Spark Pilot
25
,1 -51.--
50
47
75
100
45
44
125
44
165
200
35
35
250
1 300
400
Pdot
. .
1, 396501 _
, 2 1
60
1 848531 3 1 1.2MM
38678
4
1.3MM
11833
5
55
11833
when
55
~ .,..
1959361
, 2 1
1 63003 1 3 1
64676
4
11830
5
11830
5 1
6
8
9 ]
12
WARNING:
Do not use this table for gas conversion.
Additional parts are required; contact your Reznor
Distributor.
Flash
Carryover
!
*
5
/
Faln
Motor
-,
c----&
---y;:
:
---A --?
Fan Hub
.?-
I
Be sure
7_
(
the
fan
Model
Size
I
q ectrical
SUQQIY
.. .
blade is in proper
25
(
60
Hz
position on the
50
I
60Hz
-shaft. Position the
1 60Hz
fan as shown in / 75
-~----.cFigure 40 accord- 25.50.75!
50 Hz
ing to the than on lOO-125i50or60i-l~
165400~5Oor60Hz.
the right.
Set Screw
Torque In-Lbs
/ 80+or-10
II 8O+or-10
A
/
:
! 80+or-10
1 80iOf-10
l20ior-10
150+or-10
/
i
!
Hub to
Motor
l-114"
3X
l/8"
3-114"
2-l/2"
2-112"
t
4
Check the vent system at least once a year. Inspection should include
all joints, seams, and the vent cap. Rrplxr
any defective
pans.
-.ition
the assembly on the heater. Attach the fan guard at the center
ants. (IMPORTANT:
If replacing the fan guard, use the screws
mat held the original fan guard. These specially designed screws will
cut through the coating on the fan guard to provide a ground for the fan
motor. )
Rotate the fan blade to check for adequate clearance. If adjustment is
required, loosen the mounting screws, re-position the fan guard, and
tighten the screws. Rotate the fan blade and re-check for adequate
clearance. Repeat this procedure until the assembiy is positioned properly.
5. If necessary, drill the required upper and lower fan guard mounting
holes. Attach the fan guard at all upper and lower mounting points
using either the screws removed or field-installed sheet metal screws.
6. Reconnect the fan motor wires and replace the outer side panel.
7. Restore power to the heater and turn on the gas. Light, following the
instructions on the lighting instruction plate. Check for proper operation.
41. Operating
WARNING:
An EC0 circuit interruption
is a major failure caused by a malfunction of the primary safety controls
or mis-wiring, and will require correction of the cause of
the failure and the replacement of the fan and limit controls and wiring before the heater can be returned to service. See Hazard Levels, page 2.
Limit
Control
Fan
Control
EC0
Device
Page
30
Gas Valve
44. Troubleshooting
IPROBABLE
CAUSE
II. Pilot cock turned off.
2.Air in gas line.
Z&Incorrect
liqhtinq procedure.
4.Dirt in pilot orifice.
S.Extemely
hiph or low qas pressure.
6.Bent or kinked pilot tubing.
7. Failed E.C.O. device.
1. Manual valve not open.
2. Atr in qas line.
3. Dirt in pilot oriiice.
4. Gas pressure
too hiqh or too low.
5. Kinked
pilot tubinq.
6. Pilot valve does not open.
7. No spark:
a) Loose wire connections
b) Transformer
failure.
c) Incorrect
soark gap.
d) Spark cable shorted to ground.
e) Spark electrode
shorted to qround.
f) Drafts affectinq
pilot.
g) Ignition control
not grounded.
h) Faulty ignition
controller.
TROUBLE
Pilot will not light
(match
lit system)
I. .:
6. Opttonal
lockout device
interrupting
mntrol
0v above causes.
9. Activated
blocked vent switch.
Pilot
lit but gas Valve will 11. Powernot
turned on or thermostat
not calling
not own.
for heat.
(All manual
valves
2. Circuit to maqnetic
valve open.
are open)(Match
lit
3. Faulty transformer.
4. Faulty or dirty thermocouple
or safety pilot
sys@m)
switch. or failed E.C.O. device.
5. Faulty thermostat
(See manufacturers
instructIons.
6. Faulty magnetic
valve.
7. Hiqh gas pressure.
6. Activated
blocked
vent switch.
Pilot lights,
main
1. Manual
valve not open.
valve will not open
2. Main valve not operating.
(Spark
Ignition
system)
a) Defetiive
valve.
IREMEDY
II. Open valve.
2. Disconnect
ptlot line at shutoff. Bleed air from qas
3. Follow instructions
on the heater.
4. Remove
and dean with compressed
air or solvent
5. Check line pressure
(See Paraqraph
11).
6. Rephce
tubinq.
7. Reolace
E.C.O. device (See Paraqraph
42).
1. Open manual valve.
2. Bleed qas line.
3. Remove
and clean with compressed
air or solGent
4. Adiust supply pressure.
(See Paraqraph
11).
6. Replace
tubinq.
6. If 24 volt available
at valve, replace valve.
7.
a) Be certain
all wires connections
are solid.
b) Be certain 24 volts is available.
c) Maintain
spark qap at .lW.
d) Replace
worn or grounded
spark cable.
e) Replace
pilot 1 ceramic
spark electrode
IS cracked
0 Make sure all panels are in place and tiqhtiy secured
g) Make certain
iqmtion control
is qrounded
to furnace
h) If 24 volt is avallable
to igmtion mntroiler
and all
reolace
ianition
control.
6. Reset lo&out
by interrupting
control at thermostat.
supply
line.
or grounded.
to prevent
chassis
other causes
drafts
have
at pilot.
been
eliminated,
cwcud
No heat (Heater
Operating)
Cold
air delivered
. ..On
. .. . ..Start-up
... .. .. . . . . .. .. ..~.............
Durmq
Operation
Motor will not run
Motor
turns
on
Fan motor
cuts
out on overload
Blower
motor
out on overload
cuts
(See
9. COKeCl
Ventlna
II. Turn on power,
problem.
Reset switch (See paraqraph
check fuses, turn up thermostat.
at transformer
meter
19).
and :hermostat.
or test kit.
Replace
defective
part.
thermostat.
Replace
valve or magnetic
head.
Maximum
qas pressure
8 oz. or 14 W.C. (See Paragraph
Correct ventinq
p roblem.
Reset switch. (See Paraqraph
Open manual valve.
If 24 volt is measured
at valve
connections
and vaive
11).
19.)
remains
dosed,
replace
valve.
valve.
,-
Name
Address
Phone
SECOND:
THIRD:
Contact:
Model No.
Unit Serial No.
Date of Installation
7iiomasUetis
;*cL0199~LThomas
& Betts Corporation.
All rights reserved.
MANUFACTURER
OF GAS. OIL, ELECTRIC
HEATING
3OM-295
434
Page
32
Form 434-A
VENTIL;\TING
SYSTE%
APPENDIX
VENTILATION
X
LOUVERS
SUBMITTAL
.O.
BOX
#-
T:
666
MARIETTA,
OHIO
COVER
TELEPHONE
45750-0666
ROUNDWATER TREATMENT
SHEET
PLANT
AIROLITE
NORTHFAST
3EPRESENTATIVE:
CONSTR.
KUFSTER
JOB
CUSTOMER
CO.
SAI FS CO,,
TELEPHONE:
CUSTOMER
704.i
FAX
6?4,373-6666
6/l/95
DATE:
4RCHITECT:
ZUSTOMER:
6141373-7676
NO:
P.O.
NO:
FAX:
334-7764
lfla/
177-qlc;q
NOTE
31op drawings
are submitted
for your convenience
in securing
(I) design review and approval,
and (2) field verified quantities
?nd sizes.
Airolite
cannot
begin fabrication
until each of the following
sections
is completed
and executed.
Changes
made
after fabrication
has started
will result in additional
charges
for interruptions,
delays, and labor and material
costs incurred
lecause
of the change.
DESIGNER
Fabrication
professional
Cl
cannot
begin
and returned
APPROVAL
until
this
section
is executed
to The Airolite
Company.
0
Approved
Approved
BY
AND
REVIEW
by
as Noted
Date
N"-tKT'ION
CO.
POSTONCE BOX 548
A=-,
NC 2854X-6545
Approved
d
Approvedas noted
fl
IJ
authorized
Revise
design
and
___-_--_
Resubmit
~.
-..-..--
b(
/t
wa-?Q-
s
**
APP~OM~
~OCSnot relievesupplieror
fJuhWctor of his obligation to
the
- FIELD
VERIFIED
QUANTITIES
AND
SIZES
COnir;tc?~r~tp!ansandsPcr;ificz:ions.
Submittal
details
reflect
Airolites
best interpretation
of the contract
documents
provided.
All quantities
and sizes must be field verified
to ensure
coordination
with field conditions.
until
this
section
is completed
by an authorized
field
Fabrication
cannot
begin
representative.
Execution
represents
that quantities
and sizes are field verified
and that
Airolite
is authorized
to fabricate
in strict
accordance
with
these
details
and any
corrections
noted.
Cl Release
___--
Date
BY For Immediate
Fabrication
i Hold
Fabrication
Until
Further
.-..Notice
SHEET
OF
1 l-94
LOUVER
.
NOTE:--A-i-c
QUANTITIES
AND
DIMENSIONS
MUST
SCHEDULE
BE VERIFIED
IN FIELD
NOT
BY THE
AIROLITE
COblPANY
.;
_ ___.
:.
:;
:,
,fi;
j,*
'2
Q(J/?N
TYPE
K609
K609
&
$. i\!aTES:
k\
LOUVER
WXH
9
wide
q"\ A"
+?
wide
1) Please
2) Review
advise
above
SIZE
; SECT /
: QUAN;
SECTION
WXH
SIZE
OPENING
SIZE
:kW X H
LOCATION
2ESIGNATiOb:
x W'high
sa-2
x W
high'
color
louver
selection
from attached
and opening
dimensional
chart
8
%
$
L.
4
LOUVER
4
2!
:;
i
NATURAL
PRIME
2
>
fl
EAKED
SPECIFY
1
i
1
;
FINISH
INSTALLATION
0
kl
COAT
-
&
1.e. KYNAR
SPECIFY
METHOD
ENAMEL
COLOR
500
0
COLOR
SELECTION:
KYNAR
500
SELECTION:
XL
NOT BY AIROLITE
INTERIOR
l-l/Z
LONG
CLIP ANGLES
APPROX.
20 O.C.
0 HOLES
IN JAMB
0 INTERIOR
l-1/2
FLAT FLANGE
El EXTERIOR
l-1/2
FLAT FLANGE
0 INTERIOR
l-1/2
ANGLE
0 EXTERIOR
l-1/2
ANGLE
c]
O?ERATiON
SCREEN
0
0
0 NONE
a INTERIOR
Cl EXTERIOR
MESH
d
0
0
INSECT
112 MESH
114 MESH
BIRD
BIRD
MATERIAL
0
ii
cl
CALV.
STEEL
EXPANDED
ALUMINUM
ALUMINUM
HAND
WI,NG NUT
CHAIN,
SPECIFY
CHAIN
LENGTH
BELOW
LOUVER
C CHAIN
W,FUSIELE
LINK.
SPECIFY
CHAIN
LENGTH
BELOW
LOUVER
@ CRANK
PER DRAV.!ING
C MOTOR
VOLTAGE
c; SPRING
RETURN
0 POL\E% DRIVE
50;s
DIREC;IONS
0 MOG~L,;TiI:G
.15-Rl
2
:!
:;
FINISH
AVAILABLE
LOUVERS
OKLY
FINISH
ON ALUMINUM
I&% NATURAL
0
;I
I3NATURAL
ci
JAMB
HORIZONTAL
SECTION
HOLES
FOR
CONDITIONS
BY
AIROLITE.
ATTACHfM4T
DRILLED
ANCHORS
\
.
\
VIEW
INTERIOR
1
X 1 112
20
O.C.
ALL
LOOSE.
1 l/2
AROUND
SHOWN
SIDE
IS
OF
FROM
LOUVER,
LONC
SHiPPED
MATERIAL
ALUM.
CALV.
NOTE1
LOUVERS
LOUVERS
12
16
GA.LO81I
GA.c.0631
1 X 1 t/2
X
AROUND
LOUVER.
ATTACHMENT.
THE
WALL
NOT
BY
AIROLITE.
ANGLES
SUPPLIED
WITH
(2)
-i/32
DIA.
HOLES
AND
S/8--,lO
IND.
HEX.
WASHER
HERO
S.M.
SCREWS
FOR
ANGLE
ATTACHMRT
TO LOUVER.
LOUVER
ORILLEB
IN FlELO
NOT
BY AIROLITE
USlNC
HOLES
IN CLIP
ANQLE
AS TEMPLATE.
L-
TO
FIELD
NOT
IN
AIROLITE
MARIETTA,
COMPANY
OHIO
1 l/2
SHfPPED
ALUM.
GALV.
STEEL
CLIP
ANGLES.
LOOSE,
FOR
FORM
623023
NO.
ALL
F&ELI:
7
zz
K609
Extruded
Architectural
K638
Aluminum
Louvers
Stationary
louvers
with
visible
mullions
may
be joined
with
an extruded
aluminum
I
connector
as detailed
on page 15. Continuous blade
louvers
utilize
concealed
blade
braces
and hidden
vertical
supports
in place
of jamb frames
to present
uninterrupted
horizontal
blade appearance.
Visible
Louver
Mullion
Types:
K609
Continuous
Blade
Louver
Types:
Material:
Blade:
Frame:
Louver
Depth:
Blade
Percent
Extruded
(Alloy
Beginning
of Water
Penetration
.Ol or./sq.
Free Area:
.081
(2.06mm)
.081
(2.06,1,,)
(2.06mm)
.081
(2.06mm)
.081
(2.06mm)
4 Pm.
AY
ALL- WELDED
TELEPHONE
614-373-7676
ASSEMBLY
FAX
-j;;ij
614-373-6666
(101.6mm)
45
7.96
Point
ft.
45
3G
Tested
Licensed
7.96
sq m)
sq m)
52
770
FPM
(235 m/min)
740 FPM
(ii_70 ,iil:llii;
6,129
6,564
CFM
(1 86 n,nlin)
0.09
H,O
CFM
m!mln)
0.08
H,O
(174
0.08~~H,O
H,O)
(2.0mm
H,O)
(2.3mcn
(101.6mm)
/
-.-.-k-.
-4,
H.0)
9r p
K638
f---4-
500
8.87
sq. ft.
,f) <3,.: ,L: .,
50%
770
FPM
(235 m/min)
6,129
CFM
(174 m/min)
to A?VlCA
Standard
sq. ft.
(0.740
50%
(2.0mm
4 (1 Oi .i;mm)
AMCA
sq. ft.
(0.740
Area:
Alunxx~m
6063-ii)
(2.06mm)
6063-TS)
Extruded
(Alloy
.081
AMCA
Licensed
Free
CB666
Alumlnurr
.081
Angle:
K666
CB638
Aluminum
6063-TS)
4 (101.6mm)
Performance
Ratings:
Recommended
Specification:
Furnish
and install
architectural
blade Louver
Type K638
as descgned
and manufactured
by The Alrolite
Company,
Marietta,
Ohio USA. Louvers
shall be constructed
entirely
of extruded
aluminum,
alloy 6063-TS.
Blades and frames
shall be mlnimum
,081 (2.06mm)
wall thickness.
Louver
assembiles
shall be 4 (101.6mm)
deep with 45 degree
stationary
blades.
Each louver
shall be fitted
with
%
(12.7mm)
mesh x ,063 (1.60mm)
diameter
aluminum
bird screen in a rewlrable
extruded
aluminum
frame.
CB609
Extruded
(Alloy
Stationary
K638
_-. A-_,
(101.6mm)
APPENDIX
ROOF INSULATION
cj
Table 1
Roof lnsuiatlon
is a
uniform density non-asphaltic board with good insulating
properties composed of interlocking fibers produced by
mechanical fiberizing of a blend of strong natural fibers and
treated for additional strength and moisture resistance. The
board is further treated on the top face to reduce asphalt
bitumen absorption.
is for
use under fully adhered, loose-laid and ballasted or mechanically fastened single-ply roofing systems. It can also be used
as a general-purpose roof insulation under conventional builtup and modified bitumen roofing systems, and as a separation layer over existing roofs in reroofing applications.
In reroofing application, Celotex requires that all wet areas
in the old roof be cut out and replaced. Also, before High
Density Fiberboard Roof insulation is installed, remove
all loose and protruding gravel. This procedure prevents damage and maintains the integrity and insulation value of the insulation board.
Do not apply flame directly to High Density Fiberboard Roof insulation when lnstaiiing a modifled bitumen system.
Can be used over foam plastic roof insulation, as recommended by NRCA Bulletin No. 9.
ADVANTAGiS
Structural Rigidity Increases strength and rigidity of the entire roof structure. Dimensionally stable. Resists cracking,
warping and buckling. Uniform in thickness and density.
Rugged, Crush-Resistant.
.J ibof Insulation
THERMAL VALUES
c-valwc)
1
R-&II&I
VALUES
.
rs2
1
Maxln?ul?l
Flute
spanabilitj
0.77
13
1%
0.53
1.9
2w
2w
I*
0.40
2.5
Iw
0.26
3.8
4w
0.20
5.0
4w
(I)C=BtuiF*fP*h
(2)R=F*R*h/Btu
Table 2
TYPICAL PHYSiCAL PROPERTiES
PROPERTY
Water Absorption
Weight/Sq.
Linear
TEST METHOD
VALUE
ASTM C208.009
7%VolumeMax.
FL, IThick
Expansion
IdtiM&.
ASTM C208, UJ9
05%
Maw.
Underwriters
Factory
Cautions
and Storage
-,
07220/FqAA
BuyLine 4892
R - Install it
with pride. It
will perform.
DelivetyL
from 3
ptants
across
the U.S.
P
I
!i
.____.
._i
-.
.,-I
!-
.;
I,
Max -Made to
exacting specifications.
Maximum
amW
oo.
pogfoFFimBaxB16
dAcg8om
NC m641-
:i
i Ii:1 R
iaximum MMXO
+-,__.,
+
Value. It3 in our name.
t
Agqroved Ef
&prod doesnot relieveSuppliafW
~&~ntmct~r
of his obligationto
fun&h atxUof installthis IWWial in
~~~~tjf&ntgwith requirementsOf the
ummdml~lansandsgecfficatiorul.
4 ..- ..^
MUL-MAX@
FA
Roofing Insulation for Single Ply, BUR, and Modified Bitumen Systems
Product Description:
3max Multi-Max
FA is a highly efficient thermal insulation board corn
)(1s8d of a rigid closed cell polyisocyanurate foam core bonded to glass
iber mat facets.
Compliance&
EDERAL SPECIFICATION - HH-I-1972/2
:ACTORY MUTUAL - Class 1 Roof Insulation per FM Standard 4450,
subjectto the conditions of approval as a Roof Insulation when installed
%sdescribed in the current edition of the FMRC Approval Guide.
JNDERWRlTERSLABCRATORIES-Classified(ClassA)FoamedPlastic
%SrOof deckconstruction
material. Meets UL Standards 790,1256 and/
~263 - Contact Rmax Sales for latest information.
Applications:
hoax Multi-Max FA with glass fiber mat facers is superior for use with
he many types of single ply membranes, built-up and modified bitumen
membranes and metal panel roofing systems available. Multi-Max FA is
spproved for use in new roofing constructions and limited retrofit recover
ooftngconstructionsoversteel,wood,
non-combusttble,andcertaintypes
,f nailable roof decks. Designers and installers of Rmax Multi-Max FA
eofing insulationproductsarerefenedto
RmaxpublicationTR-0101
A,
General Notes for Use and Installation of Rmax Roofing Insulations for
jetails not covered here.
Multi-Max FA is recommended for use under built-up bitumen, either asphalt or coal tar, membranes when the insulation is secured to the roof
deckbyindustryacceptedmethods.
RmaxrecommendsthatwhenMultfMax FA is used under a BUR membrane system, it be protected by an
overlay of mineral fiberboard, wood fiberboard, perlite, or aventing base
sheet as specified in the NRCA Technical Bulletin #9.
L
Thermal
Value
Thickness
1.5
.-I
,
C
.I0
no
R
10.0
.-
..L
----
Bundle
TnJckfoad
(Ibs.)
Pieces
Sq. Ft.
Pieces
Sq. Ft.
Flute
spenablW
25
37
32
30
1,024
960
704
660
.-.,A
22,528
21,120
.0,3114
3 %
3w
n 3, I
3Q6
74
52
08
66
64
14,080
13,376
12,672
11,968
11,264
9,656
9,152
8,448
3 U
3w
3 %
3 %
3 %
3 %
576
..-
1. Thermal vafues may vary for California shipping zone, consult Rmax for latest information.
PThermal valuesdetermined
by using ASTM C518 test method at 75 degrees F mean temperature
.2
on
Per sq.
Nominal
Systems:
B&It-Up
on material conditioned
Procedure
101.
APR-17-1112
07:41
FRCU
11-K.
TQ
19104551449
P,02
INTROl?JCTlON:
Firestone MB Base Sheet is a high-performance
asphalt saturated fiberglass reinforced roOfing base
ply which has been designed to provide superior durability and ease of application. By using only
pure rwfi g grade asphak without any flfl@r& Firestone MB Base Sheet of&8 greater kibilii
snd
better wo ability than typical base 6heet8 which Gontain large amounts of mineral fillera, By using 8n
extra hea fiberglass mot, Firestone MB &se Sheet provides twice the breaking strength (44
Ibf/in,) as 3 ompared to typical ASTM D-465 : , Type I base sheets (22 Ibf/ln.).
Firedone MB Base Sheet may be att=ha;a to an am$ptable roofing substrete with either FireeMne
Insulation Plates and Fasteners with a minimum 25# mopping of Type Ill or Type IV Asphalt.
Firestone MB Base Sheet may be u$@Y as a base ply under eithsr torch-applied APP or mop-applied
SBS madrfied bitumen mQmbtine8,
offering the following superior performance fe8tures:
* SUPERloR
9 EASY,ll
STRENGTH;
Y-OUT:
PRC)DUCT TECHNICAL
ASTM
$PE@OFlCATlONS:
Minrmum 44 Ibflin. when tested in either machine Or cro86 dire&#L
No Mure when tested over a l/s radius per ASTM D-146.
NO f#ers used in asphalt saturant.
Maximum 150 73OF.
Minimum 1.7 IbsllOO sq. ft. p&r to WtuKltiOt?.
Underwriters Laboratories classified Q-2 base sheet,
PACKA
Roil wid
Roll Leng !
Roll Area:
Roll Weig
Rolls Per
Pallet Pa
Roils Per
I
t:
alet:
kaging:
ruckload:
38 inches.
TO8feet.
324 square feet (3 square
Approximately 82 Ibs. per
16 roll8 with cores in each
$tretGll wrappod on 37 X
580 rolls (35 pallets).
coverage).
HI.
comer.
37 4-way
pd8tB.
626 Congressionalhiward
l Catmel, IN 46032~5f507
1.800-4284442 1-317-!s7!+7000
Fax: l-317-575-7100
-------_---------------
---
TOTRL P.02
-----_______________-----._.
.~..
_,
ideal conditions in
- Manufacturedunder
computer-controlled,
state of the art plants,
resulting in the most consistent quality.
,-sfr6Sma-w
BUILDING
\_u
PRODUCTS
XVERS
YOU BETTER.
leS.1
i,, :rwil
Property
Thickness
Breaking Streligtr!
Ultimate Elonga!ion
Water Resistance
N it
A:; i M-D-412
A:jTM-D.412
ASTM-D-618,
D-570
CGSB 37-GP-56M
ASTM-E-9 5
Dynamic Impact
Static Puncturing
Lap Joint Strength
Accelerated Wea!he:ing
CGSB 37-GP-56M
CGSB 37-GP-56M
CGSB 37-GP-56M
ASTM G-23,
D-2565
Proposed
CGSB 37.G?-56M
AS manufactured
r#3
jtjur;uay
s; 5
--
-&T 5
;- u
c c _
BUILDING
PRODUCTS
~rJvER,N
1 \c
i--4
r-c.
Ldxjtcmy
proven.
Jo& aisirre co&tent quo&
wry Trwibull plant .jSs &&in9
ruwnatefiak and outgoing fbished
pioduds ti, an &ffte iabarotolv.
Smpies * ilIen Wed at our
u5rtojitechniad klbomfoff.
~~bfosektgfoupbflobsin~
nationlo be certifiedby the Am&can bsociaho;i 9th Highivoy
TestingOfficiok
inassociationwith
the National Bureauof Stondaf+.
:
:.;
.:
A Cominitment To
summit,
Adymced Teehndogy.
bwing researchand devefopment
hos mbde Trumbull l?iv&n the
unchoflengedlea& in the +dustrial /
asphalt industry,This posrtlonis
,_
.....
.
.
.?
.:-:;
.:
9: :ndardTrumbufi
As halt
s&fh#ion.
Spkficcltion.
temperarureof poinr ci
appl$cticn should be necf the
lcw end of the fVl range.
3. Heafing Instructions.
A. Do not heat the asphcif
closerthan25Foi the
moteriaii flash point, GS
noted on the cartonsor bill
of lading (for bulk aspholr:.
from
:f-
EquL :3u5Tzmperotire
pl?rSoi
mina:3*i ,vili vieidthe bw
:jsci::.. ijt point of oppliccticr!
to ES !e proper odhe:isn,
water: 2ziing end appiitotion
rote. ,: $orion conditionson
the rc\ tied. wiii vorf with
amb!e: tmperoture ond wind
condit;,.X. In told conditions,
(either :mbient temperature or
wind ci il factor), the temperoture at rjint of application
should :? near the high end of
ihe i\? ange. In worm conditions, :a~her ambient temperoture or i- qh SIN load), the
3. 70 minin~ize!oli Seek,
kE2p liquid GSphCItat the
lo;iesi possible temperWe
end for :he shortestperiod
of time prior to application.
Gk!elines or, this are;
1. Maximum heating
iemperotufe 500F.
2. Mever moiniriin maferinl
dove 475F for 4
hours 8 mor2.
3. Prolonged sioroge
tenpeictur$ should not
exceed325F.
b. Storage Precovtions.
The Trumbull tontoiner is meant
8. Providesuifirient vsntilation
ro cvoid excessivebeat build.
up in dosed storage 0~0s.
C. All asphalt containersmust
be stored upright and out of
water.Any ospholt containers
that tip over will fiow, This
is true of TypeIV 0s id1 as
dead level. The hotter :he
weother,the quitker tks
asphol: will flow.
0. Do not stock fiber corfoned
osphah. Asphaltsteej drums
may bejo~ble stockedif
pallets are used fo separate
the stacks.
5. Generub
OWENS-CORNING
WORLD HEADQUARTERS
FIBERGLAS TOWER
TOLEDO, OHIO 43659
c.
It includesour Ce&edRo&g
Cufltiuctufs(CRC)- a f&e of
specially trained installers. Each
roof they install is inspectedby
on independentauditor to assure
they meet the most exarJing
industrystondords.
And it includest&e shongest
warrantyprcgrumin tile industry.
Consistent Quality.
Trumbull Divjgionscdvonc~
processingwthods meet ASTMand
roofingmonufocturecsspecifications
relativeto u/l feedsrockrypesdespite
potentiul Iuctuotions In ?!pe or
gradeof rowmo:aricis.
Features.
Owens-Cornings
commitment to
qualify rbsfingsystemsextends
beyondour TrumbullDivision. Ir
inciodesour fibergW Roof fnsulotion and BUR felts for use in conjunction with our asphalt.
Benefit:
KGftOS.
17 Plaits.
PAC4LAD
AvaifaMlity
PA&CLAD
Steel
f---
Technical
Data
Color Consistency:
Will not
change color more than (5) NBS
Units per ASTM D 290.578.
Cement or Mortar: Will noi
adhere or mar the finish.
Hardness: F Minimum-Naf:onal
Coil Coaters Association Tecr-inical
Bulletin No. 11-12.
Adhesion: Cross Hatch l/6
(no removal)-National
Coil
Coaters Association Technical
Bulletin No. 11-5.
Formability:
Can be formed without film fracture using normal metal
shop practices to a 1 to 2-T bend
radius (depending on base metal
and gauge) with no cracking or
finish removal per ASTM D 1737-62
(1973).
Reverse Impact: No removal
when taped. National Coil Coaters
Association Technical Bulletin No.
11-6 impact force 70 inilbs.
Humidity: Accelerated Tests:
,*,OOp
hours at 100% relative
umldlty vaiue acceptable per
ASTM D 714.56 (1974) and ASTM D
2247-68 (1973).
Life Expectancy:
20 years plus.
Architectural Tests. Weatherometer
Method 6152 after 5,000 hours
exposure value, acceptable per
FED TEST METHOD 141.
PAC-CLAD
Alumhum
...STaNE WHI7E
PAGCLAD
Metallic
Colors
lnsta/lation
PAC-CLAD can be cut, formed,
nailed, screwed, or riveted using
hand or power tools. Fabricate
and install in accordance
with
drawings and normal sheet metal
practices using hand or power
tools. Keep cutting edges sharp,
clean, and properly aligned.
Exercise care during fabrication
and installation to avoid damage.
PAC-CLAD
METALLIC
extra cost. PAC-CLAD
l
Denotes
from
stock at a moderate
finish.
stock
Maintenance
Samples
Textures
PA&CLAD
is available with a
smooth texture or a standard E-5
stucco embossed
pattern, availab!e at extra cost.
pqlEE&
Headquarters
9060
yTfj.fj~;;r7
g3gk%;
Junction
Drive
trademark
4295
Hays
$~~gg5g2
of the
Drive
Kynar
100 pre-finished
for roofing,
curtainwall
SANDSTONE
MILITARY
MUSKET
BLUE
GRAY
galvanized
steel
and storefront
MANSARD
BROWN
SIERRA
COLONIAL
RED
m
BURGUNDY
SLATE
TERRA
GRAY
INTERSTATE
BLUE
and aluminum
applications
-,
TAN
COTTA
m
FOREST
GREEN
ARCADIA
GREEN
*Chips represent
colors on 24
Ga. galvanized
steel only. Consult actual samples
for these
colors on aluminum
sheet.
TEAL
STONE
WHITE
PAC-CLAD
m
CARDINAL
MetalRk
RED
Kgnar
5OOColors
~~^
ZINC
SILVER
COPPER
PAC-CLAD
METALLIC
extra cost. PAC-CLAD
PENNY
AGED COPPER
stock at a moderate
finish.
chart
on reverse
side.
dvantages
and F atures
Shown with
BllcoLadderUP
5afely Post
SPRING
I!!!
LATCH
WITH
INSIDE-OUTSIDE
AND PADLOCK
HANDLES
HASP
SAFETY
POST
(BY BILCO)
II
1 FIBEROI-ASS
INSULATION
4
STANDARD
PADLOCKHASP
METALS
Galv. (paint bond) (Red Oxide Primer)
Aluminum, (Mill Finish)
.^
r. I I
1r,cropper, (Lopper
Lacquer wsnj
.._a..
. ..-.-.--.----.-i\l
1 FUGID FIBERBo*Ro
INSULATION
ALL AROUND
OUTSlOE
OF CURB
(See following
TYPES
Type Wt.
No.
Lbs.
s-20
170
s-50
100
e-J,l
a-7
o-/u
toI
TYPE GS
Type
Wt.
No.
Lbs.
GS-50
,
f.=~,Q(3MECHANISM
TYPE
Type
No.
NB-20
NB-50
152
I
TYPE L
Type Wt.
No. Lbs.
L-20 408
L-50 225
I
I
__.. --_--._
APPENDIX
AUTODIALER
USERS MANUAL
version
0.30 ds
11~1m8mmmmm8mmm
Contents
CHAPTER
1: INTRODUCTION
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..*..................*....
PROGR,MMING
EXPRESS II .......................................................................................................................................
ABOUT THIS MANUAL ..................................................................................................................................................
CHAPTER
2: INSTALLATION
1
1
................................................ 4
OPERATING
ENVIROINMEANT
......................................................................................................................................
MOUNTING
Express II .....................................................................................................................................................
STFbiIN RELIEF ...............................................................................................................................................................
POWERING
UP .................................................................................................................................................................
GROUNDING
AND POWER SURGE PROTECTION
.... ..I............................................
............................................
BACKUP BATTERY .........................................................................................................................................................
......................................
TLRVING
Express II ON ........... ....*.........................................................-.................
POWER SUPPLIES .... .......................................................
......................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
FCC REQUIRE&IENTS
..................................
NOTICE ..~..~.................~.......~-.....~..............................................~.........................~.............~..
3
3
4
4
4
4
5
6
6
7
CHc4PTER
3: INPUTS *...............*...*..........*...................*............ 9
WORK .*....................*............................................................................*......................,..................
9
IO
..................
.....*.....~...*-....................-................................................................
............................................
10
CONFIGURING
THE INPUTS ................ ..I...................................................................
11
WIRING THE INPUTS ....................................................................................................................................................
.............. 14
STR4iN RELIEF ............ ...............................--..--..-............................~*.~......
14
SHIELDED
WIRE ............................................................................................................................................................
..-. .......................................... . _.....-..._.........-.-...................................... 14
WXRE LENGTH --..-...15
INST.4LLING
IXPLT EXP.43SiO.I:
CARDS ...............................................................................................................
...........................................
16
. - ....... ..***.............................................................................-...XVVT
..
SPEC;C4TIOiS
....
17
2.8K THERMISTOR
LOOK-UP TABLE ......................................................................................................................
17
.............................................................................................................................................................................................
18
10K THERMISTOR
LOOK-UP
TABLE .......................................................................................................................
T--el Fr3E
...............................
NOTES ... ....... ..... ..... ...... ...... ... ....... .. ..... ........... .......... .......*................................. 19
CHAPTER
4: OUTPUTS
CHAPTER
5: PROGRAMMING
21
21
21
22
22
............................................ 23
.................................................................................................................
PHONE PARAMETERS
Calling Schedule ...............................................................................................................................
Phone Contacts .................................................................................................................................
Special Dialing ..................................................................................................................................
DT2?L_ OuT - PA
__~
..............
..*-.-.*.*-...L-..m.............*.......*...................
-*-- F@,JbllT~~
Diaiing Method ._U--*..-U....*
.......................................................................................................
Retries on Busy- .................................................................................................................................
Message Repeats: ..............................................................................................................................
Maximum Number of Cails- .............................................................................................................
Call Delay Time: ...............................................................................................................................
Intercall Delay Time- .........................................................................................................................
DI.4L. IN PARAMETERS
................................................................................................................
24
24
26
27
25
28
28
28
29
29
29
30
5:
BPE~RATIUN
...........................................................................
CHAPTER
CHAPTER
p
A7
i I
41-:
7: REACHING
EXPRESS II BY TELEPHONE
.................... .53
8: OTHER KEYPAD FUNCTIONS .......................................... 55
30
30
32
33
33
33
34
35
35
35
Y
26
36
36
36
36
26
37
-I3 ;
33
35
-.
?a
_
?a
33
*
39
39
..
31
42
42
42
43
43
43
43
43
43
44
44
45
45
AT
.-
55
->>
-35
/-
,-..
8888888888888888888888888888888888888
CHAPTER
I : INTRODUCTION
PROGRAMMING
EXPRESS
is ex-
II
.=Y,
.a*...
*-.
. .._
completeiy voice guided in a menu-style foma!.
parameters
you want
tc prqrarr!
2nd e;:er
values
as prcmp:&.
A:!II )-LJa:,?,.t.~~y
nmnr---inn
p-5 Y
ha
Udll
Phonetics, Inc.
901 Tryens Road
Aston, PA 19014
Phone: (610) 558-2700
FAX: (610) 558-0222
Chapter f:
Introduction
NOTES
Sensaphone
Express
II Users
Manual
CHAPTER
This chapter provides information
chapter before starting.
2: INSTALLATION
Registration
is explained
Express
CAUTION:
Express II is a sensitive electronic device. Personnel and work area should be
grounded before handling this device. Do not install Express II near strong electrostatic,
eiectromagnetic,
magnetic or radioactive fields.
OPERATING
Exp;ess
Express
freezing.
ENVIRONMENT
MOUNTING
Express
II
When you receive Express II, carefully remove i?fro7 :!z bcx. 3n t?e !zp and bottom of the
enclosure
are mounting holes to attach the unit to the wall. Mount Express II in an upright
position on a wall so tha t y oc can easi!!y gain access to the front panei. There must be a power
outlet nearby. The dimensions
of the enclosure are: total width = 12.40, total depth = 7.94,
total length = 15.96. Decide where you will be mounting Express II and drill holes according to
Figure l-below:
Figure 1: Mounting
dimensions
STRAIN
RELIEF
Strain relief clamps are provided on the Express II enclosure to prevent wiring from being pulled
from the circuit board or damaged when passing through the enclosure.
To use the strain relief,
thread wires through the clamp and the clear rubber bushing. Position the bushing in the clamp
and tighten the screws on either side so that the wiring does not move. See Figure 2 be!ow:
top plate
clamp
screw
bonom plate
clear rubber bushing
wiring
POWERING
UP
,-,
GROUNDING
AND POWER
SURGE
PROTECTION
The Sensaphone@Express
II can be damaged by power surges and lightning through the telephone line and the power supply. Although Express II has built-in surge protection, we strongly
recommended
that additional protection be obtained for the unit and for any electronic equipment
that is attached to your power supply and telephone lines. Power surge protection is especially
important if you live in a lightning-prone
area. Surge protection is available through Phonetics.
Call for details.
BACKUP
BATTERY
Sensaphone@
Express
II Users
Manual
in.
mammmnmmmmmmmmmsmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmm8mm
Also included
programming.
TURNlNG
Express
messages
and
Ii ON
II has power,
the ON-OFF
switch
When the unit is turned off, it is disabled, but your voice messages and programming
are retained
by the 3V lithium battery. When in the off position, the 3V lithium battery is in use, but the 12V
battery is not
I
j
i
I
iI
I
I
On/Off Switch
0.
Location
Chapter 2:
Installation
CAUTION:
Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm. Never install telephone jacks
in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations.
Never touch
uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected
at the
network interface.
Use caution when instaiiing or modifying te!ephone lines.
POWER SUPPLIES
Express Ii will provide battery backed
loops or other external devices.
FCC
4-20mA
current
REQUIREMENTS
PART 68 _ This equipmel! -,zn;fie+ wi:h 72~ 6s $f :t~e FfC r"lps. 82~I."%~'35 cf :np ~r=i~$';r~ ihere is 2 i&t: ihai
contains,
equipment.
among
You
other
must,
information.
the FCC Registration
Number
and the Ringer Equivalence
upon requ es?, provide
this infcrmaticn
!o your !oca! !e!ephcne
company.
Number
!RENJ
for tnis
The REN is useful to deiermiiie the quaniiiy of divites ihai yoti GTS~connect 3 ycur :elaphone
:ine ~6 s;;:: hs;e a:;
those devices
ring when your telephone
number
is called.
In most. but not all areas. the sum of the RENs of ail
R\ie (;,c;,
Tg bs .:e.+&c 0: $-,e sgrzbs:
gf jevices
that :;,c:i qdevices
connected
to one !ihe shcul;! nC( sxree.j
--+ to .zonta,;t 1
;,-? ;cpaj :e:fZi:.:?c
~.p~Ea:-ay t.2 ,?::=rz:cL
_r___._..,,_
5s :zaximc~?
RF3 cr ycur
connect
to your line, you may we:::
calling area.
This equipment
subject
to state
on coin
service
provided
by the telephone
company.
Connection
to party
lines is
Should
Express
II cause harm to the telephone
network,
the telephone
company
may discontinue
your service
temporarily.
If possible,
they will notify you in advance.
But if advanced
notice isnt practical,
the telephone
company
may temporarily
discontinue
service without
notice and you will be notified as soon as possible.
You will be informed
of your right to file a complaint
with the FCC.
The telephone
company
may make changes
in its facilities,
equipment,
operations,
or procedures
where
such action is reasonably
required
in the operation
of its business
and is not
inconsistent
with the rules and regulations
of the FCC that could affect the proper functioning
of your equipment.
If
they do, you will be notified
in advance
to give you an opportunity
to maintain
uninterrupted
telephone
serdice.
If you experience
trouble
with
this equipment,
or you need
information
to obtain
service
or repairs
please
contact:
PHONETICS.
INC.
901 Tryens
Road
Aston, PA 19014
(610) 5562700
Fax: (610) XXI-0222
for information
on obtaining
from the natwork
until :he
service
piOb!e;n
or repairs.
The telephone
has been co::eded
0: until
company
may ask that you disconnect
this equipment
ycd are sure that the equipmen:
is not rnarf~~nr+r*n;nn
Y,LY.m*J.
A.
Sensaphonea
Express
II Users
Manual
ci
NOTICE
The Canadian
Department
equipment
meets certain
ment does not guarantee
of Communications
label identifies
certified
equipment.
This certification
telecommunications
ne!work
protective
opera!ional
and safety requirements.
the equipment
will operate
to the users satisfaction.
means
The
that the
Depart-
Before installing
this equipment,
users should ensure that it is permissible
to be connected
to the facilities
of the local
telecommunications
company.
The equipment
must also be installed
using an acceptable
method
of connection.
In
some cases, the companys
inside wiring associated
with a single line individual
service
may be extended
by means
of a certified
connector
assembly
(telephone
extension
cord).
The customer
should be aware that compliance
with the
above conditions
may not prevent
degradation
of service in some situations.
ed Canadian
maintenance
Repairs
to certified
equipment
shculd
be made by an a&c&
supplier.
Any repairs or alterations
made by the user to this equipment,
or equipment
telecommunications
company
cause to request the user to disconnect
the equipment.
facility designated
malfunctions,
may
by the
give the
CAUTION:
Users
electric
inspection
should
:hemselves,
but
contact
lines
the appmpriats
Chapter
2:
Installation
NOTES
A:
Sensaphone@
Express
II Users
Manual
CHAPTER
3: INPUTS
Express II comes standard with 8 universal inputs. The input capacity may be expanded in sets
of 8 inputs. There are 5 sets for a total of 40 universal input channels that are possible.
The
inputs, both included and expanded, may be configured to accept the following type sensors:
. Normally closed dry contact (digital)
Normally open dry contact (digital)
Pulse count
4-20 mA (analog)
O-5 Volts (analog)
Temperature
2.8K F thermistor
(analog)
i.W
C thermistor (analog)
: OK i theimistor (analog)
7OK C thermistor (analog)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Time
~CCiiiiiiiiZ?Gi
The standard 8 input terminai biock is located to the right of the buiit-in keypad in the first card
sk:. Abc;e the term;-;Ina! yo& are a rc*$,!Cf, 8 !--FDS that ir.di:&e t+e sG:~S cf $2 inputs to onsj?=
*- reersor,nef.
/@-
Chapter 3: Inputs
l
A
increments
of .00122 Volts.
Input resolution
is 12 bits.
Thermistor
- Two kinds of thermistors
may be used with Express II: a 2.8K thermistor or a IOK
thermistor.
The range for an input measuring temperature
for 2.8k is +200 OF to -85 OF and for
10k is +300 OF to -80 OF. This configuration
type connects the input signal to a 5V reference
through a 6.34K pull-up resistor.
Time accumulator
- This mode will accumulate the total amount of time that the input sensor
in the clcsed position. This would be useful to maintain total run time for a device.
is
LEDs
Each input has a ccrrespcnding
LE9 that indicates inqu? status. The ?EDs are located above the
terminal block. When an LED is green, that indicates that the input is GK and no alarms exist.
When an LED is blinking green, alarm ECGgnitiOn
time is in effect
on the corresponding
input.
When an LE3 i s biinking red, tha? indicates that an una,k.p nr,,wi,,=,,
*fAnnA aiarm exists on the corresnondir.0 b ip-nc
r- !t When a.n LED is steady red! it indicates that an aiarm has been acknowledged
ii fh^
lnr,
j+ ic r;;c=+,i=-.+
in-lit
h! !? -.*..
ciil! -,..
ruic;z
5.: LEZ cces off for that input.
_.
..Pr.
. . ik=
.,~U r.zr-conrntiinfl
wr--J
..r-..
*a .,I.
LVS.
I- W,WU1UU.
.I-
CONFIGtiRiNG
THE ItuPUTS
To configure
To configure
(A position).
To configure
A8
Sensaphone
Express
II Users
the shunt.
Manual
WIRING
THE INPUTS
screw
of
COMMON
COMMOlv
on an input, you must supply power to it. You may power a 4-2LImA
II internal power supply, or you may wire the sensor to an external
NOTE: The number of internally powered sensors will affect battery backup time during a power
failure. To use the internal power supply, wire the positive lead from the sensor to the unit 24V
power supply. Wire the negative lead to a numbered input terminal screw.
See Figure 5.
Chapter
3:
Inputs
Inputterminal
IO
_,
I
n.
INPUT
COMMON
10
C
2-+C
4-20mA
INPUT
COMMON
INPUT
CCMMCN
:
i
sensor
To
INPUT
COMMON
10
INPUT
/COMMON
INPYT
<
I:OMMCN
using external
power
source
Input terminal
INPUT
COMMON
10
Q>
INPUT
COMMON
INPUT
@1
Common
--i
COMMON
j-I
Chapter
3:
Inputs
mmmammmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmm
STRAIN
RELIEF
Strain relief clamps are provided on the Express II enclosure to prevent wiring from being pulled
from the circuit board or damaged when passing through the enclosure.
To use the strain retief,
thread wires through the clamp and the clear rubber bushing. Position the bushing in the clamp
and tighten the screws on either side so that the wiring does not move. See Figure 8 be!ow:
bottom plate
clear rubber bushing
wiring
SHIELDED
/P-T
WIRE
Express II is designed to work in most installations without the need for shielded wire. However.
ah:
+--+*--L--r--L es 5.2
L,Ins dces :zt a;i;ry ic wi:e a-L7 ir; conduit that has other noise-generatip- 6,LJbL
IYVdI-li a -u-.
Hi AC. it is strongly recommended
that input wiring be run in a conduit separalad from AC
rb+Ap~ c)r o!f;l~t !jj+P
Whe2 wire runs are long or are in close proxim-ity ?2 iaz; pr::fr ccfsuming, power gener:ting
or power switching
equipment, it is recommended
that shielded wire
ha
YY IlC&-i
..I.
WIRE
LENGTH
Temperature
- It is recommended
that long wire runs be avoided when using a thermistor as a
sensor. A long run of wire could alter the resistance
of the circuit therefore providing an inaccurate temperature
reading of the input. Below is a chart of recommended
gauges and wire
lengths:
MIN WIRE GAUGE
#26
#24
#22
#20
MAX WIRE
250 ft.
700 ft.
1500 ft.
2500 ft.
LENGTH
Analog current - Long wire runs will not affect the accuracy
s:a,yt cu::e-+IIS L;?
ha;-- .A:*
fii,Jec th:c!;gh the sensor wire.
50 Ohms.
..<., uE;batiat;
L--e..-L---e i3
:- co;;of the input
iiieit:
Sensaphone@
Express
II Users
Manual
to avoid voltage
mmmmmmm8mmmmmmmmmmm8mmmmmmmmmmmummmmm
,:.->
NOTE:
All wiring
INSTALLING
should
INPUT
EXPANSION
17 of the UL requirements.
CARDS
card:
may occur to the motherboard
while
2. Remove the screws and blank plate oft he first available slot from left to right. See
Figure 9 below.
NOTE:
Always
install cards side by side--do
not skip a slot.
Figure 9: Remove
blank plate
3. Hold the card with the LEDs at the top, and line up the DIN connector
the DIN connector socket on the motherboard.
See Figure 10.
Chapter
3:
Inputs
plate screw
input expansion
card
i)lN cmnelcr
;iq
PIN come&r
sccket
c Replacethe
3.
socket
and press
down s!ight!y
to
screws.
i.
NOTE: When installing a combination of input and output cards, always install the input cards
grouped together in the left slots and the output cards to the right of them. If you install an input
expansion card after an output card has been installed, you must disconnect the output card,
install the input card in its place, and reinstall the output card to the right of it.
INPUT SPECIFICATIONS
Voltage Range:
Input Resolution:
AID Converter Typical Total Unadjusted
Accuracy (Temperature)
Accuracy (4-20mA)
Min/Max Input Voltage
Max Puise Frequency
Nnicca
.VV
A*
Filtorinn
. . ....-=
Sensaphone*
Express
11 Users
Error
0 to +5 VDC
12 Bit or 0.00122V
2 1 LSB
+l F typical using 2.8K temperature
+I .25%
-0.5VDC to +5.5VDC
1 .OHz
23OOHz !ow pass fi!ter
-2Odb/Decade
Manual
sensor
2.8K THERMISTOR
DEGREES
(Celsius)
-50
-40
-30
-20
-10
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
62
65
70
DEGREES
LOOK-UP
(Fahrenheit)
-58
-40
-22
-4
14
32
41
50
59
68
77
86
95
104
113
122
131
140
149
158
TABLE
RESISTANCE
(Ohms)
188.83K
94.47K
49.64K
27.21K
15.51K
9.15K
7.11K
5.57K
4.40K
3.50K
2.80K
2.26X
<.83i<
1.4%
?.22K
l.OlK
0.84K
0.7SK
0.58K
0.49K
Chapter
3: Inputs
1OK THERMISTOR
DEGREES
(Celsius)
DEGREES
-37
-35
-32
-29
-26
-23
-21
-18
-15
-12
-9
-6
-4
-1
2
4
7
i0
13
16
18
21
24
27
30
32
35
38
41
44
47
49
52
55
58
-35
-30
-25
-20
-15
-10
-"E
0
5
10
15
2n
mLZ
30
?F
ii
45
r_
ki;
85
90
95
100
105
110
115
120
125
130
135
140
145
150
155
160
165
170
175
180
;85
d ^ r:
l3;
65
86
es
91
94
97
Sensaphone@
II Users
RESISTANCE
1.3x
i.2 5 K
1.16K
G
200
205
Express
TABLE
203.6OK
173.6OK
148.3OK
:27.lOK
lC9.23K
94.07K
81.23K
7S.32K
6!.02K
53.rJiK
46.2X
40.42K
--;:a.""$
qcY
2- '!* I'2
nfiwi(I .
q7
L1 ."?1Y
ii\
24.06K
21.24K
15 7SK
16:65K
1 , _...I
:-i.: CT.
a-;c. .c,n
=.,
1'1
73u
. I..&..
A- .-r
1v.+tn
9.35K
R wy
V."".
7.52K
6.75K
6.08K
5.48K
4.95K
4.47K
4.05K
3.6%
3.33K
3.3lK
2.76K
2.52K
2.3OK
2.10K
1.92K
1.76K
1.6lK
1.48K
:;
.s2
65
70
--
:i
66
69
71
74
A;
(Fahrenheit)
LOOK-UP
1.07K
0.98K
0.9lK
Manual
(Ohms)
NOTES
Chapter
3:
Inputs
A
*
A8
Sensaphone@
Express
II Users
Manual
CHAPTER
Express II comes standard with one on-board
panded up to 16 relay outputs.
relay output.
may be ex-
WORK
4: OUTPUTS
equipment
to control in
This may
Auto - Outout zero is the only output with the Au?o cpticn avai!abie. When this option is progiZYi!ed.
output zero will activate when any aiarm 2 xists and wit: deactivate when the alarm is
acknowledged.
WIRING
THE OUTPUTS
All wiring
STRAIN
RELIEF
should
comply
with section
17 of the UL requirements.
Strain relief clamps are provided on the Express II enclosure to prevent wiring from
from the circuit board or damaged when passing through the enclosure.
To use the
thread wires through the clamp and the clear rubber bushing. Position the bushing
and tighten the screws on either side so that the wiring does not move. See Figure
being pulled
strain relief,
in the clamp
1 I beiow:
top plate
clamp screw
bottom plate
clear rubber bushing
Chapter
4:
Outputs
INSTALLING
OUTPUT
EXPANSION
the screws
Always
install
CARDS
card:
may occur to the motherboard
side by side -
3. Hold the card with he LEDs at the top with the DIN connector
the C1N connector socket on the motherboard.
in this chapter.
cr,e&+.-=-.
expansion
tha
.I I
a.-1
jL I-=
I<. _..-
1-n
,=,.
s!+s
-.s-d ,-
+ha
. . .-
n@r!e+
.!d 4.
rgrrlc bWC.
I
,a
.I I n,
.,U.!tn!
RELAY
OUTPUT
TYPE:
Related
Load:
SPECIFICATIONS
Carry Current:
Maximum Operating
Voltage:
Maximum
Maximum
Current:
Capacity:
See Chapter
5 for programming
.
l,\:L-i^:::-- IU a- LUI
-^--:--i:rVYItoI I :-II I~L~IIII
~IUI~IQCIUII of input ano output cams, ai.ways
*..+%*,firl
J.--y--
inctall
II ~Y.L.I.
as described
Operating
Switching
Sensaphone
Express
Latching, SPST
2A at 250VAC
2A at SOVDC
2A
250VAC
125VDC
2A (AC/DC)
500VA, 60W
II Users
Manual
t:, ~I-,P
1 Y rinh+
*JI/
:-e-e::
.i1t131clll
LIIe I,:- ql
rr: 4hc.41v1,1.
:c ,,-1.
.i ,
tn
b
thn
L. I
rinht
Iy
I. Inf
information.
:pcI^::
III...II
..
^
-ii
cars
:nc4
;;..+
CHAPTER
5: PROGRAMMING
PHONE
- phone contacts
20
30
DIAL IN - incoming
48
MESSAGES
method.
Programmable
information
ccmmunications
(call-in) communications
recsrdhs
50
INPUTS
- input configuration
6*
SOUND
- sound monitorino
70
POWER
- power
89
OUTPUTS
9.
00
SYSTEM
Programming
and listen in
low monitoring
- other system
parameters
All programming
actions
keys (listed above).
begin by pressing
the PROGRAM
key, followed
These two key presses lead directly to Express ils voice guided instructions,
accompanied
by text
seiections shown in the local display. From this point, menu selections
can be made by
pressing the number keys, followed by the ENTER key. Press 0 (zero) to exit a numbered-list
menu.
The CODE key allows you to navigate between menus during programming.
To repeat a menu while
programming,
press the CODE key once. To return to a previous menu, press the CODE twice.
To return to the main menu at any time, press CODE until the main menu is reached.
You may also make your programming
selections using the local display. Each option conveyed through
an audible voice message will also be listed as text on the local display. If you press the arrow keys on
the keypad, an arrow will appear next to a se!ection (if it is not already present, as in some seiection
listings). This arrow can be repositioned
next to any of the options by pressing the down arrow on the
ALARMS key. To move back up the ii%, press the up arrow on the STAT%3 key. Lvner! ine arrow ap. ..
pears nexl to ycur se!ecuofl. press th,0 WTER
+,
key.
In the demonstrations
while moving through
shows
how options
Chapter
are selected
5:
from a list,
Programming
Programming
5-i: Express
,=jr;.-r
L.aca; i%piaj
Calfing Schedufe
F--!fim=lhvs
vc.r,r Lbc,-C,:
-4 .-WV:!= -Aspecific calling groups
u!es. Time is measured
are 3 calling schedules
All, indicating that no
effect and that dial-out
times.
Calling
schedule
This schedule
Contacts that
day, or day of
Contacts from
day of week
Calling
FfiCNE
A1
C,,!CPts
- -. ..IYLC
2) Press PHONE.
1 -All
FARAMETERS
schedule2
II
and Kqvpad
ICciA~,ii
a,. :.u-;
n:nht
.J.
tr.
.-
hf.-.nr-lo;;
ii.& .._-;
ri;,nrt,lr.n!
. ..i . . . . -..
-s
for
Press 1 for Ca!l Schedule.
Calling
schedule
Press 2 if selecting
Programming
Times
24-Hour Time:
l:oo pm eqxtl
13 hours
tc
2:oo
3:00
4:oo
pi!
pm
pm
ec.yal
ecpai
ecxuual
to
to
to
5:oo
pm
equal
to
6:OO
pm
eq,uIual
to
14 !ln~S
i5hours
16 hours
17 hours
18 hours
PM Conversion
ii
7:oo
B:OO
5:oo
lo:oo
11:oo
pm
33
pm
pm
pm
equal
eqti
equal
epua1
ecrual
to
to
t5
to
to
19
20
21
22
23
hours
hours
he=:*
hours
hours
(I
Chapter
5:
Programming
Phone Contacts
Express II can store up to 48 telephone numbers, with up to
40 digits permitted for each. These numbers will be dialed in
the event of an alarm. Special dialing codes that use a
pause, pound, asterisk or other code may be incorporated
into the telephone number as required, to access various
phone and beeper systems. (Refer to this chapter, Special
Dialing section.)
CommunicationsType
Express II is capable of diaiing out over standard teiephone
lines in either Voice or Beeper mode. When diaiing out in
Voice mode, Express !! wiii recite the prerecorded a!arm
message
when its cutgcing
caii is answered.
Wher: 5iaiics
--^--3^
I.dlil:,I tit:
L- .r=,p+yJ
-rL.r.
CL< I,lr.I Eye.
k--c-r
--.,A..lbiZ,
;3-i;; ;;i==acl$=
-....--.
i 3i= Cl-I..,,
i;=i^ii: ,I+
settin
ic
\/nicn
..,a 1y 6 . 8.
Phone
Contacts:
1)
A.
Special
Dialing
Special dialing consists of dialing codes that are commonly used when accessing
a beeper or pager system,
or in order to reach a dial tone for connection to an
outside line. To incorporate
a Special Dialing code,
press the CODE key, followed by the number key shown
below. Insert the code or combinations
of codes where
required in the tetephone number.
Code
2) Allocate a number
assigning then a
calling schedule.
contact a position
Enter the number
that position using
to each contact,
position in the
Assign phone
number (l-48).
corresponding
to
the number keys.
1;
Generates
a two
second pause.
Code 2
.-ic
Code 5
Sends two digits to appear on the display of a beeper or
pager, indicating which input is in aiarm. (ln the case of
multiple alarms, only the first aiatm is displayed.)
Code 6
Sends the pound (#) , as required in some dialing
sequences.
Code 7
Sends the asterisk (*), as required in some dialing
sequences.
Note: (Code 3 is not available.)
Chapter 5:
Programming
DIAL OUT
The following parameters
control how Express
municates when it dials out for an alarm.
II com-
A:
Dialing
Method:
1) Press PROGRAM.
2) Press DIAL-OUT.
Retries on Busy:
Return to Dial-Out menu.
1) Press 2 for RETRIES
ON BUSY.
seconds.
Maximum
Number
of Calls:
of outgoing
calls alloted for an alarm.(prior
to
acknowledgement)
2j Ester Hsixs.
3j E,qter iligL<trs,
4 j Enter Seconds.
Intercall
Delay Time:
,<-.
2) Enter Hours.
CEsY
3) Enter Minutes.
4) Enter Seconds.
Chapter 5:
Programming
A
l
DIAL IN
The following
communicate
DIAL IN PARAMETERS
parameters
determine how Express
when the unit is called.
It will
riat~ilarl
, cI.UIII
7-e
,I:=
connected
i-
T&
ihl
nn
l.
thic
..*I-
Rings
Until Answer:
1) Press Program.
i
Ku
ITSTP
VJ.,.
JUNG TAD:
Dy enat;!;II 2 this feature ) you will be able to bypass !he
answering
device and access Express II for a status report
or programming.
If there are no other devices hooked up to
the phone line, this feature should be disabled. The default
is disabled.
1) Make sure the TAD feature is enabled. The default
setting is disabled, so you must enable it initially.
2) Determine the number of rings your telephone answering
device uses to answer the telephone.
Most answering
devices require 4 rings; others are selectabie.
3) Program the Express II RINGS UNTIL ANSWER to a
greater number than that of the number of rings set on
your answering
device.
Example:
Telephone
Express
answering
II: RiNGS
device:
rings = 4.
UNTiL ANSWER
= 6.
A@
I ~^ ,. ^.
1) Press 2 for TAD.
2) Press 1 to enable.
Press 2 to disable.
on locai
operate
normally.
Explanation:
The pattern of one ring, followed by a
second call (within 30 seconds), signals the Express
II to answer your incoming call, excluding the
telephone
answering
device.
NOTE:
If the Express II unit shares the same
telephone line with a telephone answering
device, and
during certain time periods, frequent, incoming calls are
expected on that line, then you may want to temporarily
disable the TAD feature. If you leave the TAD enabled,
it will not adversely affect normal operation, but if two
outside telephone calls are received within the same 30
second time window, the Express II unit will interpret this
pattern as a signal to answer the telephone.
If this
occurs, press ALARMICANCEL
key on the unit to hang
UP.
Chapter
5:
Programming
mmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmm8mmmmmmmmmmmm
MESSAGES
MESSAGE
Messages:
Message
length
PARAMETERS
1) Press Program.
2) Press Messages.
Express
II and service
parscnnei.
when an
Express
!!.
-IFr?nr1.11
tha
\..-
.,i?n!!t
r...
.r!l!m-!h
.-...--. P
?n
-- rr;hlrk
....,_
i: t!?
:..e
message corresponds.
Speak message after beep.
6) Press 3 to record output message.
Enter the output number to which the
message corresponds.
Speak message after beep.
7) Press 4 for message length.
Enter 5, 7, or 11 .(the default is 5)
Messages can be cut short by
pressing Enter during recording.
Sensaphone@
Express
II Users
Manual
mmm8mm8mmmmmmmmmmammmm8mmmmmmmmm8mmm
INPUTS
INPUT PARAMETERS
to
1) Press Program.
2) Press Input.
Press Enter.
3 = Pulse count
4 = 4-20 mA (analog)
5 = O-5 Volts (analog)
6 = Temperature:
1) 2.8K F thermistor (analog)
2) 2.8K C thermistor (analog)
3) 10K F thermistor (analog)
4) 10K C thermistor (analog)
7 = Time accumulator
The default input type is 2 (normally open dry contact)
High and Low Limits - Express II allows you to program
high and low limits for inputs defined as an analog input type
or pulse count. Inputs defined as normally open or normally
closed cannot be programmed to have high or low limits.
During voice prompted programming, high and low limits will
only be prompted when the input is defined as an analog
type or pulse count. The limits are -9999 to +9999. Express
II defaults to these limits.
timp
1~ thp
lnpu? RecognitloR ikx?- Thp
. iv innlit
.i i. irprnnnitinn
-=li..s.
. . . . .Y
\. 3
length of time an input must have an alarm continuously
before Express ii wiii recognize the condition. if an alarm is
tripped and then clears within the recognition time, it is not
recognized as a valid alarm. Express II will not dial out.
,jl
,.
_,.
Enable/Disable
lnpufs:
Input Type:
;
piess
,.. .i^
a, UC
c --...
Ii r
- ^I..
.,.=.;..;
i^ii
^^i
^^i
z=:ed
Chapter 5:
in Enableidisabie
Programming
iqurs)
.-..
_..ra12^__.._,~n
~.I
. _.<_
._f..*
pFjz=q
-a.\
.,.m,.xx.
I~
.I
~.
Input type.
is 2; normaily
1 for ncrmai!y
open dry
cicsed.
p*ps<
m-t=?
:- - -3 f-.7
.L ----~!I.:
:!:-;
VT
_,,.
.
p:es-, 2 7;; jxxe CSUK
Press 4 for 4-2G miiiiamp.
-2zer
-En&i
,....
for
1 OK OF CiS~KiSiGi.
Recognition
Time:
Time.
2) Enter hours.
c==^.-r _: _..._^
Press 3 for
High/Low
Limits:
Press 4 for
Press 5 for
2) Enter hours.
Enter minutes.
Enter seconds.
Erter
Press individual
(1-46)
position
numbers.
Press Enter.
4) When all position numbers in list are
entered, press Enter again.
5) The default
is all contacts.
NOTE:
Each inputs set of parameters can
be programmed
independently
of the
other inputs. But, the input number
must be entered before ptogramming the parameters.
Chapter 5:
Programming
mmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmm*mmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmm
SOUND
SOUND PARAMETERS
1) Press Program.
2) Press Sound.
Enableldisabie
sound monitoring
- This parameter
determines whether Express II will initiate the dial out
sequence if it detects a high sound. If the sound is enabled,
Express II will diai out. if the sou&
is disabied,
Express
II
.I.
Listsn-in
The:
Time.
2) f=nt;r cnrnnrlc
.+1-.2\ 1,7-?:E;G.?
h,
Sound Monitoring:
1) Press 2 for Sound
Monitoring.
2) Press 1 to enable.
Press 0 to disable.
Sound
Sensitivity
Sensitivity.
2) Enter value.(O-100)
Recognition
Time:
Reset Time:
A.
n mmmmmmmmmmmmmm8mmmmmmmmmmmmwmmmmmmmm
2) Enter hours.
Enter minutes.
Enter seconds.
positicn ,a nurzbe-s I .
at
2) Press 1 to disable.
Press 2 to enable.
Chapter
5:
Programming
n mmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmammmmmmmmmmmmmmwmmm
;-
POVVER
POWER PARAMETERS
Express II monitors AC power failure and low battery condition. Power monitoring and low battery monitoring is explained below.
AC POWER
Power
1) Fress Program.
Failure
Power monitoring
enable/disable
- This command enables
or disables the power faiiure detection. When enabled,
Express II will monitor power and dial out if a valid failure
occurs.
When disabied, Express II will not dial out for a
power failure. 1 = enabied, 0 = disabied. The default is
enabled.
Power recognition
time - The power recognition time is the
length of time ihai a power failure must exist continuously
before I Express ii wiii recognize it as an actual alarm and
-I a
c; v-t, LiII *E-e
,!l,c; :,m)
initiate the dial out 111..^..
3GuuG:I ce. Po*fler rhcmCmi+iAe
---=-r
+-*
be prog:~r,;;,i~,,
12vti: 9 seconds to 12 hours. The default is
5 minutes.
Alarm reset time - After power iai!nre is acknow!edged,
Express II stops the diai out sequence.
iiowever,
the power
failure cond$io,y t&ii &iii exjsi , IUII,I.
3niii
mmtarcr is3 rclsdcrer,
TV..
!U
. . 0ii he
L,
^%a?
c
-mm,
^C +:mp
plp~
is :m-i
:.<: :cq=&mcAi
--: .-.:u a;
i-, f- bef,a:n
c,, lvili,r+,&vi
ifi .,_, Expiess
II,, cap, he ymmmnr(
tn
the
dial
out
sp~tidn~ce.
This
_ -.,...
I-.u rnctae
4-w.
.I,
l.
s tailed the aiarm reset time. This parameter
programmed
from 0 seconds to 12 hours.
may be
2) Press Power.
..
..0.
m
Power monitoring:
4a,!
: I9-z::
1 . -.l cailzre Monitoringat the
AC Power menu.
Sj Fress i to disabie.
Power Recognition
Battery
Low
Battery
monitoring
Press 2 to enable.
Time:
2) Enter hours.
Enter minutes.
Enter seconds.
enable/disable
- This command
enables or disables the battery low detection, When enabled, Express II will monitor battery condition and dial out if
it becomes low. When disabled, Express II will not dial out
for a battery low condition. The default is enabled.
A;
Sensaphonea
r-. ZL,-h=mari
I-, Jyu
after
a c-+.ai~
II can be programmed
to restart the
is called the alarm reset time. This
Express
II Users
Manual
-??:,I
UIZZJ
fir:&
vu:
S&.&on:
n mmm8m8mmDmmmmmmmmm8m8mmmmmmammm8m8m8
parameter
may be programmed
2) Enter the list of position numbers, (l48), for those contacts to be dialed
by Express ii in the event of AC
Power Faiiure.(Failure
monitor must
be enabled.)
3) Enter list of dial out selection.
Press individual
(l-48)
position
numbers.
Press Enter.
4) When all position numbers in list.are
entered, press Enter again.
5) The default is ail contacts.
Press 9 Cfor the default.
BA TTER Y
:j
Press 2
Battery
Monitoring:
at the
2) Press 1 to disable.
Press 2 to enable.
Press 2
2) Enter hours.
Enter minutes.
Enter seconds.
at the
,- p-a-,,
::,:iu_
2) Enter the list of position numbers, (l48), for the phone contacts to be
Chapter
5:
Programming
A
l
position
numbers.
Press Enter.
4) When all position numbers in list are
entered, press Enter again.
5) The default
is all contacts.
A64
Sensaphone
Express
II Users Manual
,:;-\
OUTPUTS
Up to 16 outputs
Manual
user.
Auto-any
OUTPUT
may beinstalled
in Express
II.
PARAMETERS
1) Press Program.
by the
2) Press Output.
.:
&II
aiarm.
,-
Chapter
5:
Programming
A
*
,-
DATA LOG
Express It has two logging features, the Input Log and the
Activity Log. The data log features are used with a printer
hooked up to the serial port. If either data log is enabled,
Express II will send information to the serial port to be
printed.
Input Log:
1) Press Program.
basis.
..*
m
2) Press 1 to enable.
Press 2 to disable.
Sensaphone@
Express
II Users
Manual
,-
SYSTEM PARAMETERS
SYSTEM
The following parameters
various system features.
determine
the functioning
1) Press Program.
of
Password
- The password
is a security feature that you may
program to prevent unauthorized
access to Express IIs
programming.
The password
may be any combination of up
to 6 digits.
Acknowledgment
code - The acknowledgment
code is the
number, up to 6 digits, you enter when you acknowledge
an
alarm using a Touch-Tone
phone. This code is also used
when you call Express II back using a Touch-Tone
phone to
acknowledge
an alarm. NOTE: This code cannot be used
from a pulse (rotary) phone.
Halt mode delay time - Halt mode allows
you to disable all
time.
inputs and prevent diai out for a user-programmed
-f.,!
If.
,i,
r,:v-!
Ha!! mode is us=.:&;t
:: ;I.,,
_.._ :- nprf
r- .or? periodic tests or
other activities that would trip false aiarms and initiate dial
out. Halt mode can be programmed
from 0 seconds to 12
hours.
NOTE: If you prcgram th 0 ha!t moda
I +;F=
,l I, to zero, the halt
mode feature is disabled.
The default is 1 hour.
p-
Callback acknowledgment
- This parameter
determines
whether you can simply call Express II back to acknowledge
an alarm or if you mus: also enter the acknowledgment
code. When callback acknowledgment
is enabled, you may
acknowledge
an alarm from either a pulse or Touch-Tone
phone. No code needs to be entered, you just call the unit
back after receiving the alarm call. When callback acknowledgment is disabled, you must use a Touch-Tone
phone to
acknowledge
the alarm by entering the acknowledgment
code, or acknowledge
the alarm locally.
Call cancel - This feature determines
whether Express II will
continue dialing out for an alarm after the alarm has physically cleared. When call cancel is enabled, Express II will
stop the dial out process when the alarm clears, regardless
if the alarm has been acknowledged.
When call cancel is
disabled, Express II will continue dialing out for the alarm
until it receives acknowledgment,
even if the alarm clears in
the meantime.
AL1?3 ?es! - This fea!ure a!!ows you !o simulate
an input to test the dia! out procedure.
NOTE:
make
a-@z-tru.5,
m-ih.er.a
p,
I, I
?-IICilD
\fn
specifications
you programmed.
alarm as if it were real.
P.-~i-cfs
V,
arci
an a!arm cn
Auto test will
using
the
the
2) Press System.
.^__,..
x.,...\.,-..__..,,
.-._-.I1
,L ^,
. jx ^. ,...,X.^,
;I
Pass word:
1) Press 1 to program password.
2) Enter password.(up
to 6 digits)
Acknowledgment
Code:
Code.
Callback
Acknowledgment:
Chapter
5:
Programming
A
1
nmmammmmmmmmmmmmmmmammmmmmmmmmmmmmm
2) Enter 1 to enable.
En!er 0 to disable.
Call Cancel:
1) Press 6 for Call Cancel enabling.
Auto Test:
1) Press 7 for Auto Test.
2) Enter input number.
A44
Sensaphone*
Express
II Users
Manual
SECURITY
SECURITY
Lock:
PARAMETERS
1) Press Program.
2) Press Lock/Unlock
key.
you must
The
if it
Unlock:
REPEAT LOCK
INSTRUCTIONS
NOTE:
Programming is allowed only when
the keyboard is Unlocked. System
Inquiry will not include password.
Chapter
5:
Programming
A
1
.,n..
NOTES
A.
CHAPTER
6: OPERATION
Alarm
Generally,
Detection,
Dial-out
in the following
I.
Express
II.
Ill.
Dial-out
II detects
and Acknowledgment
manner:
begins.
The following table explains the alarm detection, dial-out and acknowledgment
important variable factors affecting their operation.
Chapter
features
6:
Operation
and lists
A
4
mmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmammmmmm8mmm8mmmmm8
I.
Express II Detects
il.
at the Sensor
A Vaiid Aiarm
Sensaphone
Express
II Users
Variable
Manual
Factors
Indicator
tight
Changes
from
steady
green to
blinking
green
RecogMion
Tme:
Activated
Variabie
is Recognized
A:
a Change
Factors
Recognition
tir2r:-YIL.,
Time:
Call Delay:
Acfivafed
Alarm Message:
Audible, On-site
Activated
III.
Dial-out
Begins
Variable
Factors
Call Delay:
Expired
Call Progress:
Ac!ivated
Aarm Messages:
By Telephone
Voice Repititfons:
Activated
lntercall
Time:
Activated
Max Calls:
Indicator
Light
Red light
continues
blinking
Activated
Red Ijght
continues
blinking
Chapter
6:
Operation
A
1*
IV.
The Alarm
Variable Factors
is Acknowledged
Local, On-site
Acknowledgment
Tcud-Tone
Acknowledgment:
F2s: Code 555
Toxh-Toone
Acknowledgmen::
Default Code 555
If the Ev-vss
II does not receive the
i-
Touch-Tone COtiS, ii idiES
iiiB fd!Dvvi~~:
until alann
is 2ckncwMged
OK.
No Acknowledgment.
.
Press
any
period, it says:
A8
,$zator
Tone or P&e
Callback
Acknowledgment:
Within lntercall
Time
IV.
The Alarm
is Acknowledged
Callback:The
Express II waits 10 rings
before answering to guard against random
acknowledgment.
If an answering device
is connected to the same line as the
Express II and TAD is enabled, the
Express II will answer on the first ring.
Once answered, the Express II will recite a
status report and say:
Variable
Factors
Indicator
I Light
Red light
blinks until
alarm is
acknowledged
Tone or Pulse
Callback
Acknowledgment:
TAD Enabled
C.+a,-qes frcrn
biinhg
Ed to
sready ret .Y
acknowledged
and alert
mndifion
sfiil
exisis.
Max
Calls
Acknowledgment
Changes from
steady red
back to
b/inking red
when
Reset Time
reactivates
If an alarm is acknowledged
by telephone
or at the local keypad, yet the alert
condition continues to exist, the Express II
will reactivate the dialout process,
following a programmable waiting period,
or Reset Time.
If Reset Time is set to zero, the dialout
process will not be repeated for that alarm.
Sa!a!=u:.
Reset Time
I
1
Changes from
blinking red to
steady green
.w%.T aZm; is
acknowledged
a-d a/er:
condition no
longer exists.
Chapter 6: Operation
8m*mmmmmmnmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmma
SensaphoneQ
Express
II Users Manual
CHAPTER
7: REACHING
EXPRESS
II BY TELEPHONE
Express II is at your disposal whenever you need it - no matter where you are.
And it is as easy as dialing your Touch Tone TM telephone! All you need is your
Express IIs phone number and a Touch ToneTM telephone.
Simply follow these first steps to reach Express IIs built-in, voice guided system.
The voice guided system is comprised of a main menu and proceding submenus. It works much the same as when programming Express II. The only
difference is that you use the telephone dial pad instead of the Express II keypad.
!pl
Phone-in Parameters:
Dial the phone line that is connected to your Express II unit.
Express II will pick-up and say:
Hello, this is... (programmed
ID message that you record)
Press 1 for Status.
2 for Alarm.
3 to Inquire Programming.
4 to Change Programming.
5 to Exit.
The Main Menu:
Press 1 for Status.
The response for this fuction is the same as the response
the local keypad.
2 for Alarm.
The response for this fuction is the same as the response
the local keypad.
for Inquire
Status at
for Inquire
Alarm
at
3 to Inquire Programming.
Press 3 for a list of the 10 programming categories. Once a category is chosen,
the menus and responses are identical to inquiring programming
at the local
keypad. See Chapter 5.
4 to Change Programming.
Press 4 for a list of the 10 programming categories. Once a category is chosen,
the menus and responses are identical to programming
at the local keypad. See
Chapter 5.
Chapter
7: Reaching
Express
II by Telephone
5 to Exit.
Press 5 and the unit will respond,
Special
Keys:
Press the star
Press the star
Use the pound
To EXIT return
telephone.
Security:
The units iota! keypad may net be Uniccked
Tha
I,,
if?
,w
mnssarrn WY
I1.Y
rmici
,4IYCY
ha
rarnninri
..U
&gr
incfa
.I I\UI1,,
Programing:
Inquire Alarms:
To check alarm information,
edged alarms, the Express
Halt mode delay time - Halt mode allows you to disable all inputs and prevent dial out for a
user-programmed
time. Halt mode is useful if you must perform periodic tests or other activities
that would trip false alarms and initiate dial out. Halt mode can be programmed
frcm 0 seconds
to 12 hours.
To initiate Halt mode press HALT. To exit Halt mode press ALARM CANCEL.
NOTE: If you program
is 1 hour.
Chapter
8:
Other
is disabled.
Keypad
The default
Functions
NOTES
i.
A*
SensaphoneQ
Express
II Users
Manual
mm8mmm8mmmm8mmmmmammmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmm
/ .n.
1 Phone number
1 Voice/Beeper
1
I
I
2
I
7
I
8
I
10
12
15
16
I
17
Phone
Contact
List
1 Phone number
22
L
I
I
23
I
I
24
I
25
I26
1 Voice/BeeDer
I
1
/
I
I
4
i
35
I
I
I
I
!I
I
I
I
36
Ii
37
38
I
I
34
II
i
I
39
40
42
A;
1
I
Sensaphonea
Express
II Users
Manual
I
1
Position Number
Name of Contact
Phone number
Voice/Beeper
I
43
I44
I
I
I45
I
I
47
I
I
1
I
48
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Phone
Contact
List
ammmmmmmmmmmmmmmmm8mm8mmmmmmmnmmmwmm
NOTES
A*I
Sensaphone
Express
II Users
Manual
PROGRAMMING
SUMMARY
1. PHONE
A.
8.
Calling Schedule
1. all
2. days and nights
a. enter day hours; enter day minutes
b. enter night hours: enter night minutes
3. day, night, and weedends
a. enter day hours; enter day minutes
b. enter night hours; enter night minutes
Phone Contacts
1. enter position number / phone number selection(l-48)
a. voice
b. beeper
2. enter phone number
Programming
Summary
A
e
8.
C.
D.
E.
F.
A.
Dialing method
1. pulse
2. tone
3. automatic
Retries on Busy
I. enter number of retries on busy
Message Repeats
I. enter number of times alann message will repeat for each call
Maximum
Number of Calls
1. enter total number of outgoing calls during an aiarm
Call Delay Time
1. enter hours
2. enter minutes
3. enter seconds
Intercall De!ay Time
I. enter hours
2. enter minutes
3. enter seconds
Sensaphone
Express
If Users Manual
III. DIAL IN
A.
8.
Programming
Summary
l
A
Iv. MESSAGES
A. Record ID Message
1. speak message
B. Record Input Message
7. enter input number
2. speak message
C. Record Output Message
1. enter output number
2. speak message
D. Message Length
7. enter 5
2. enter 7
3. enter 41
A.*
SensaphoneP
Express
II Users Manual
v. INPUTS
A.
pdae
d . 4-X
3.
4.
5.
6.
co!drt
mi;!iemo
1, . e;.:sr t3bIe low limit
2. enter table high limit
e. C-5 vc!t
1. erkr
!abie low limit
2. enter table high limit
f. temperattur;
1. 2.8K F thermistcr
2. 2.3K C the:mistCi
3. 12K F tllerTicbr
a.,.
4. 1OK C thermistor
g. time accumulator
recognition
time
a. enter hours
b. enter minutes
c. enter seconds
high/low
limits
a. enter low limit
b. enter high limit
alarm reset time
a. enter hours
b. enter minutes
c. enter seconds
dial out selection
a. enter position numbers (l-48)
1. oress enter tivice
VI. SOUND
A. Listen-in Time
1. enter seconds (O-255)
6. Sound Monitoring
1. disable
2. enable
C. Sound Sensitivity
1. enter value (O-l 00)
D. Recognition
Time
-I. enter hours
2 enter minutes
3. enter seconds
E. Alarm Reset Time
1. enter hours
2. enter minutes
3. enter seconds
c. nt=i
Cnicrfiof!
-a-/ fit*
Y. W.
I. enter position numbers
G. Mute Local Speaker
1. disabfe
2. enabie
(l-48)
A..
Sensaphonea
Express
II Users Manual
2.
a. &,7z.,
b. di;?; ,j
power i2r*7.~;?itiCFl
2.
0.
tirZ.C
- hours
I
CAI *x:2;;
c. er;tar
_ c_ ;r,nc!s
3. alarm reset Yzi;
a. er.;;r hours
b. enter minutes
C.
enter SeCXi.;lS
4. dial out selection
a. enter position numbers (l-48)
6.
Eattery
1.
battery monitor
a. disable
b. enable
2. alarm reset time
a. enter hours
b. enter minutes
C.
enter seconds
3. dial out selection
a. enter position numbers (l-48)
VIII. OUTPUTS
A. Enter Output Number
1. manual
a. off
b. on
Aa:
Sensaphone
Express
II Users Manual
A.
ki:!Sr
X. SYSTEM
A. Password
1. enter password (up to 6 digits)
B. Date and Time
1. enter day
2. enter month
3. enter year
4. enter hours
5. enter minutes
6. enter seconds
C. Acknowiedgment Code
7. enter code (3 digits; defauk555)
D. Halt Mode Defay Time
1. er;ter minutes
E. Callback Acknowledgment
I. enable
2. &sa;t?!e
F. Call Cancel
s. Auto Test
1. enter input number
ii* tjr: j-; ;=*$&
f . factory
!. Unit CalISrztian
1. factory
AI
Sensaphone@
use oniy
use only
Express
II Users
Manual
XI. SECURl-rY
A. Lock
1. enter sysk~ ~4s;wcrd
B. Unlock
2. enter sy3:si-n pas~wo:d
NOTES
SensaphoneQ
Express
II Users Manual
APPENDIX
MISCELLANEOUS
AA
ELECTRICAL
EQUIPMENT
LETTER OF TRANSMITTAL
WE ARE SENDING
YOU
hop drawings
b&
0 Copy of letter
COPIES
THESE
DATE 1
EAttached
Cl Under separate
Cl Prints
0 Change
NO.
I
I
I
I
0 For approval
order
DESCRIPTION
1
t
as checked
below:
as submitted
Cl Resubmit
as noted
Cl Submit
Cl As requested
Cl Returned
for corrections
CI Return
-corrected
Cl
or your use
REMARKS
WHITE.
TRANSMITTAL
items:
III Specifications
F3$4 pproved
0 Approved
Ye
the following
- w
q Samples
Form 0017
Maintenance
Rev. lo/a9
ARE TRANSMITTED
0 Plans
Facilittes
COPY
CANARY
- TRANSMllTAL
COPY
PINK.
ORIGINATOR
OHM REMEDIATION
SERVICES CORPORATION
5335 TRIANGLE
PARKWAY, SUITE 450
NORCROSS, GEORGIA 30092
(404) 729-3900
CONTRACT
NO. N62470-93-C-3032
SPECIFICATION
SUBMITTAL
FOR:
PAD-MOUNTED
SECTION:
16462
TRANSFORMER
SPEC PAR
SD-NO/ITEM
1.3.2A
SD-02
1.3.2A
SD-02
1.3.2A
SD-02
CURRENT
ITEM NO.
DESCRIPTION/MANUFACTURER
TRANSFORMERS
- GENERAL
- GENERAL
D.Z9\a-\9-95
3/-E&
OHM REMEDIATION
SERWES CORP.
NORCROSS. GEORGIA
ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC
__ -. - _
.-
..
VM-60
With
Type M-30
Family
of Watthour
IO@,
ZS-crmpere
Secondary-reading
Mete@;
Registers3
with
Class
2, 4401,
lime
lntewol
(Mintin)
volts
120
240
Multiplier,
Full.
Scala
kW
Cwire
Tzi?
700X 16G 1
700XlbG2
15
30
4
4
TF
TF
700x 1 OG8
700XlOG9
700XlbGll
700X16G:Z
:i
TF
rF
700X lOG20
7OOXlOG21
700X
700X
IS
30
33
TF
TF
701Xi6G9
701Xl6GlO
70IX22G9
70IXZ2GlO
:i
6
6
TF
TF
7OlX16Gll
701XlbG12
7OlX22Gll
7OlX22GlZ
15
30
TF
TF
700X25G2
700X25G3
700X31G2
700X3
lG3
TF
TF
7OOX2SGl
700X25G17
4
4
TF
TF
700X39G
:?I
with
16G26
16G27
700X31G:S
700x3
1c 16
5 dial.
7OOX45G2
7OOX45GS
700X39G8
5) For meters rated Class 20. TA2.5. order Similar to Cat. go. . (C!as~
IO) exce t Class 20.
&f-64
and VM-65
240.volt
meters will operate corrcctlv
on
@iiF Y/277-volt systems. If meter nameplates are to be marked 4&Y 1
277V. the order must so specify.
ZJ Type VM-65.S
meters have U-terminal construction (Form 65) and
must be used with 1Sjaw sockets. If special 7-terminal construction
(Form 7% is desired, order Similar
to Cat. No. . . . (of IS-terminal
meter) except with I-terminal
construction. Refer to GET-2669 for
connection dia rams and the corresponding form numbers.
@ When a 48JY/2% -vo I t circuit is metered with VTs the usual VT ratio
is either 2.4: I or 2.5: I and the meter is rated 120 volts. If -I: I VTs are
connected line-to-neutral, for this application a 69.volt meter must
be specified.
CDType VM&S
meters have 13.terminal construction (Form SSI and
must be used with Isjaw sockets. If special 7-terminal construc!ion
(Form 24s) is desired. order Similar to Cat. 30. . . . (of 13termrnal
meter) except with :-terminal construction. Refer to GET-2669 for
connection diagrams and the corresponding form numbers.
WEIGHTS
TYpa
7=%
If8
M-60,
A-60.
7720~13,
.!j
c_
A 3phme
.;!;..;
0
. . . . DO0
000
I
*I
0 For meters with 5 hial retisters. order Similar to Cat. No. . . . (4 dial)
except
@ Meters
Cotolog
Number
700XlOG2
700X lOG3
240
VM-66QJ
Bottom-connected
Cotolog
NUllYbW
Sockat-connectd
:z
/. 3.&q
TF
TF
240@
(1
5wJa3Cl)
2
2
24o(E
120
g-/N~~
:i
480
120
Mete
Transformers
DATA TABLE
Class
Instrument
Demand
wxket<omected
bottom-connected
Oct. 1, 1984.
Approx
Shipping
Weight
in Lbr.
REFERENCES:
Net
12
14
(m/c)
Do?o
subject
to change
without
notrce
I ,
@ J..
COVERHEIGHTS
(IN INCHES)
--
/!
-A Max&mum
---..--_47-----Standard
i rcl
--_l_--l-
Reset
6 1;2
-----.--_.6 513
----.---._
Keylock
6 11/16
~~.-!L%E.~
Pro~.~ap.pofi
--
----.-L-i----
_._.__
with M-30
I
!
with M-90
jj
with M-90A
with TM-900
LEXAN
wtth TM-91
or TM&92
I
,
/ V-64
,
1
pl
LEXAN
. _. . .-.
_-_
6 1 l,!E
]
I
0 316
1;
I
!I
LEX4N
POLYPHASE
6.W.
_. .--..
..--
3 :1/16
!.
,.
I
or M-50
with .TMR-900
1 V-60
--
-.=v-
j l-70
-.--
5 Maximum
Dim. 3 Max~m;r?
----- ___. .---.__-_-____-_0 Tie---.
9 :3/:6
--_-.9
S 316
--
L?!L------
i SINGLE-PHASE
Dm
/I
5 3/64
5 3164
-----
..
7 l/4
::I:
-.--.._
--.-----a;
..- ._-
5 710
:1
/I
li
7 314
7 314
I
I
ii
i;
!I
iI
,-I!
0 318
a 314
i
/
6 l/T
with M-90
;i:!
0 318
with
j/
8 314
9 l/2
Z-slator
with M-30
wdh M-90
or M.50
with M-9OA
with TM-9i
Sstator
with
M-30
or TMR-92
or
LEXAN
M-50
M-90A
with TM-91
or TMR-92
LEXAN
6 l/4
8
11.
I.
--
,t
!
I
I1
6 3!!6
9 318
0 316
/
I
0 i51i6
9 3,16
3116
8 !5/16
,
--.-
9 3,s
----
.-
_--_-
_--.
_ --._--
Types M-30
,..-
and M-50
Indicating
Demand
REGlSTERS
Registers
60 Hz
rYPE M-30 JNDICATING
DEMAND
single Class- Single Scale
dpplication
REGISTER
The Type M-30 demand register is used to measure maxi:num kilowatt demand. Demand measurement is made on a
Sock-interval basis, utilizing a single, sweep pointer.
The Type M-30 register is available as a separate device for
mounting on most types of GE watthour meters and Type MD
totalizers. The register will mount directly on all GE magneticsuspension watthour meters.
Dual Class-Dual
Application
(Photo 1236147)
Fig. 1. Type M-30
indicating
dsmond
register
Scale
Index natsb
In usI* plst.
.
Slldinc
bb on
Operation
The scale is changed by removing the six support screws
which attach the scaleand multiplier plates. These two plates
are turned over and reattached.
The gear shifmg is done by a shift rod (see Fig. 2), which
comesthrough the dial plate and through the multiplier plate in
the lower scale position. When the multiplier plate is turned
-Id reattached. it pushesthe rod againsta spring to shift
g?JT : to the higher scaleposition.
.emand scale and multiplier
plates are printed on both
sides. The multiplier
plate is marked Class2 on one side and
Ciass6 on the other.
Interlock
Notches on the multiplier plate and on the scale plate (see
Fig. 21engagewith a movabletab in the dial plate located where
thesecome together on the right in Fig. 2. It is not possibleto
assembletheseparts in the Class2 gear position while the Class
6 scaleis showing,or vice versa.
MPE M-50
Application
INDICATING
Fig. 2.
Dual
stole
M-30
(Photo 1233276)
register--Class
2 position
with
multiplier
piote
Accuracy
The Type M-30 dual-classregister operates at an accurrlcb
within 1 percent full-scaieon both scales.
ORDERING
DIRECTIONS
REGISTER
ORDERING
mm,.-,
.I
Q ;!
(Photo 1236 145)
Fig. 1. Type M.50
indicating
d en-tat nd registe
DIRECTIONS
Refer to page45.
REFERENCES:
.to:)
20 AMP/TRF. RATED
5,6,8 & 13 TERMS.
RINGLESSRINGTYPE
iTEM#b)
Block Assembly
for SC7237
(Phi
SC
designates
sleeve
corm. #4 wire max.)
S7237-R L
RINGLESS
METER
NO. OF
LUG
BY- @
INFORMATION
DIMENSIONS
CONCENTRIC
HUB
CUIAL
PASS
H/112/314
3s
s1290-()
YES
3%~
,4
4s
s1299-(y
YES
3$,,j
14
(ALT)
6.8.9 10s
8
S7237-I)
YES
3%
1 14
TERMS
RINGLESS
ORDERING
13
FORM@
CAT. NO.
RING-TYPE
NO. OF
TERMS
METER
RING-TYPE
CAT. NO.
FORM@
ORDERING
LUG
BY-@
HUB
CUIAL
PASS
YES
3YlS
4s
s13w-()
YES
3%
5.S
s7544-()
YES
3yls
8^
i , ,,+- !
,,I.-
) 1 1,~ / 1%
/ 1%
1 Vi
/4
j 1%.
/ 1%
/ 1%
1 II/.
CONCENTRIC
Untis are
connectors
Units
Ring type
choces.
See
Contact
hub
selection,
general
hub
suffix
supplied
with compression
(#4 max.) are preferred.
are supplied
general
see
units
with
are priced
engineering
offfce
plunger
with
section
YES
3Y,,
14
14
1%
j I%*
j 1;~
/
1 fz
1A
for ordering
HUB
chart.
type connectors
change
catalog
(#lo
prefix
type
bypass,
Speafy
on order
MR2
sealing
ring.
for meter
information
form
See accessories
K.0.S
6
label
page
IS destred.
for other
required.
1 1 A
1 1%
/
1 1 /r
1 /a
INSTALLED
HUf3
VA
HUBS
OPENING
SIZE
CAT.
SUFFlX
Plain Top
1
1 /a
, >,$
Zjf
2
2!/2
hub opening
c!osing
glate
diagrams.
if UL
SMALL
For proper
j A
t/4-
FACTORY
@
Va/.
s7545-i)
I/ lh
/ , ql:
I
s1291-()
1 h
! , t/i.
INFORMATION
3s
6.8.9
(ALT) 10s
515
1 , ,,+- / , ,K
DIMENSIONS
13
K.0.S
-DL
- EL
/
:
-RL
-XL
TYPEJAB-0,600VOLTS
Indoor Current. HY-BUTE+GO Molded, For Use on Pad-mounted
Distribution
50-60
kV
APPLICATION
The Type J.W
current transformer is
designed
especially
for use on padmounted distibution
transformers
from
73 kV4 through 2000 kV;L The J-U-0 has
an oral-shaped
window measuring
3/4 x
4% inches to allow installation
over the
secondary bushings of pad tmnsformers.
CONSTRUCTION AND INSULATION
The Type J.U-0 is constructed
using
molded insulation
for the transformer
body. It is available in two different outside configurations.
Grecian Urn (Fig.
I) or rectangular
(Fig. Z), to probide a
wide selection
of mounting
flexibility.
WlNDOW
The window of this transformer consists
of an o&-shaped
nylon tube measuring
3% x $4 inches. This unique shape allows
the JAB-O CT to be installed on the secondarybushingofapadtransformer.
The
44-inch dimension
allows clearance over
the blade, while the 3%inch dimension
provides ample clearance from the porcrkiin bushing.
Two bury1 channel sections are molded
and bonded to the top and bottom areas
of the nylon tube (see Figs. 1 and 1). A
locking device called The Grabber
is
designed into the slots in these two butyi
secrions to permit mounting of the JAB-O
a directly onto the secondary blade of
the distribution
transformer
(see Fig. 3).
These sections are easily removed if this
fezwe is not desired. Simply peel them
away from the nylon tube with a pair of
pliers. Without these sections. the okalshaped window will accommodate
four
POLARITY
See pagr
NAMEPLATE
See page 15-14. item 3.3.
,-..-~,-.
I -rL&,;yT~;
,se- .. ;;;yzmT. ,:
-. :
pz;::,.L,*
;(,;,JI ,~~~~&i,~~-~~~
s.:-.G
wr.r-..:. . .. _ .
.L. CL-.-. --.
Grecnn
in Amoefes
Pri:Sec
2005
3005
750X036202
ooO:5
750X036204
iSOXO36205
75OXO~~206
750X036208
---.-.750X0362
750X03621
750X03627
---.-750X036220
5CQ:5
j#tQ:S
---
8005 _-._looo:5
12co.5
?5005
__.___1000:5 - . ..__..
3OWj
Urn
Catalog
Number
Outsi6e
Aoprox
--
Ship.
7-8 ,,4
750X036203
7-8 l/4
7-8 l/4
-----i-8 l/4
j 7-6
7-8
10
7-8
2
7-8
5
7-g
..7-a
-.7-8
0X036230
_ . - _ -. _ i5____
_ _ __
Shape
______
Wt. in LS.
5C 7: _--.
.._R~cr~~~O.~~ce.~~aoe
_ .__ _ ANSi
.___ _Aczzacv
_
_ - Ciass
_ __
%?cens
per ANSi
Catalog
CX Ni .._-^ Lb.
-_-_.. AOC--..._
_..- -__----._.. -I .
Numoer
3-o.:
3-3.2
3-3.5
3-T
Net
Shlo.
Net
3-i
- 6T~1/450x036302~~---~-~-__--_-___.
-.-.-.--..-_
~*~;- ~j;ia --.---------.
-- ;..-A:.-I l/2-6 .A
0.3
3.3
6-7 1t4
750X036303
7 :12-0 314
6 l/2-7 314
0.3
6-7
6-7
l/4
l/4
l/4
6-i l/4
I4 -.- 6-7 _--i/4
.-.-.
:/A
6-7 l/4
:A
6-7 114
:,A
6-i !iA
6-j :;4
;A
:,A 6-i . .l/4
-__
750X036304
--.i50X036305
i l/2-8-. _--.-_.
3!4
.__ __.....
7 1/Z-6 3,4
750X036306
7 :12-3 314
750X036308
il2-3 %__.
A
____._
. 7,__..i5OXO363:O
7 12.8 :;A
750X036312
7 !/Z-3 3;l
750x036315
. 7 :/2-s 2.;
- -..- _
. 3.J
ECXO36320
7 - r/2-5
ZOXC36330
: :,2.9;A
6 ._....
l/2-7
6 li2.7
3/4 _-.
3/4
6 i/2-T3/4
3 i/z-i
. ..__. 3!4
6 :i2-7 ?i4
a i2.73,A
j .2.7j,4
a.;2-;3.i
6 T/2.7I,.+
.0.3
..-.
0.3
0.3
cd
0.3
0.3
0.3
3 3
33
33
2.3
- ?
.d-
c.3
c.3
33
03
_-::i--l J.
., ..I
4.L.idL.1
,=;n:,-,Jcus-:rer-na!c;:e$:
%:y
$:or
_._._
3CC
x--:p
Amoien:
Amoient
z-.--.
..-.;.z:
.--.c:.
JO
20
:j
2.3
._. .L-
10
30
29
5.2.
0.3
3.0
2.2
23
- ,-I
23
32
;3
32
32
. ;<
j
.:. (
::
2.3
33
33
. -17
- ,(J
TYPEJAB4600VOLTS
JAB-O
_'.
._.-,
.
,. :; ..,
__. . .
/@-
50-60
MOUNTING
The Type JAB-O is amilable in two differenr outside configurations.
One has
theshapeofaGrecianUm.wirhrounded
comers on tie bottom and with the two
lower mounting holes eliminated.
Three
of these units can be mounted in a triangular pattern. with one unit upside down.
so chat they will fit on many pad-transformer bushing spacings. The other model
has a rectangular outside shape for installarion around the secondary bushings of
largerpad u-ansformers havingwide bushing spacings.
This model can also be
mounted horizontally
below the second- bushing, with the cables coming up
through thewindow
for installation where
thephase-t+phasespacingwillnocpermit
vertical over-the-blade
mounting without
interference.
The Type JA5-0 can be mounted on. or
secured to, the pad transformer in several
different ways. Mounting
holes in the
comers. together with special brackets.
can be used to support rhe current trans,/?
-ter, centering it around the porcelain
ing. Or, with the J.IELOs exclusive
texture called The Grabber. Lhe CT can
be supported and secureI\- held in place
on the pad transformers
bushing blade.
The Grabber consists of KWO bury1 sections molded and bonded to the inside of
the primq
tube, but not connected
to
the remainder
of the bury1 insulation.
These sections each contAn a slot, allowing the transformer
to be mounted over
the edges of the bushing blade. The buyI
I
slots are carefully dimensioned
to fit the
I
.
Rating
of
r
I
75
112.5
I
i
1
I
300:04OO:5
I
!
300:s
300 to4005
300 to500:5
I
I
3Wto600:5
4Wto800:5
3005
1.50
300 toNo:
3ctl
300 to 8a:s
400 to8005
500
~~
1
i
1500
3OW:s
i 4OCO:5(JCO-O)
,I
Es
. .
._,.
-her of Carrht
Transformers
1000to20W:5
2CW
I
r
0
Not avaIlable
Low Voltage
Distribution-transformer
240 Volts w!th
120~volt
Mid-la0
Volts
225
,*T
1
1
240
in Type
t0 3CCO:5
!
1200to2CC0:5
/
2000 to 3OW:5
I
3wo:5
/ 40005
(JCD-O)
!
and Voltage
CT-2
VT-None
JABO current
i
!
3M) to4005
300 to 500:s
200:5
300:s
I
f
300 to 6W:5
400 to8W.5
i
i
3Wto4W:5
300 10 5005
4W
1200
Transformen
480 Volts
)i
to
*.
CT-3
VT-None
48OYl277
46OY1265
~~:~~~~~~
2OQO:s
600 volts
I
j
j
200.5
3W:5
I
I
;
j
i
300
300
to4W:5
to 5CQ:5
3W:5
3W:o4W:5
400
IO 8W:5
300!06W.5
~~:~:~~~
20V0.5
i 4Mo:j;r&
:/
1000
toto :15005
2005
1200 1wo:5
I,
2.!;
y:j
i
I
4
1
:
2Oc5
2W:5
/
o
and
Volts
ZOO.5
I
:I
I
a005
1 4m:5;~;;)
Required
2OO:5
to 2CGO:5
4&~~~~~~@
!1 40005
(JO-0)
on secondary blade
of a pad-mounted distribution transformer
Ratings
208Y1120
and
216Yir 25 Volts
_
3005
:::::
CT-3
VT-None
transformers
311-10 k\'
ZOO-3000Amperes
Hz
width of the secondan blade of the distribution transformer l&h which it will be
used. On transformers rated 800 amperes
and below, butyl fingers within the slots
help to hold the J.W
CT securely in
position.
The butyl slot~rd sections center the
blade in the CT window and maintain
adequate clearance distances between the
blade and the nearest grounded surface
on the CT.
Pad
(kva)
i
CT-2
VT-2
I
1
CT-3
VT-2 or -3
CT-2
VT-2
- --.. ..-,
_....,_
..
200-3000 Amperes
811-l 0 kV
MOUNTINGONTHREADED
SECONDARY
STUDS
A clamp-type bracket, Cat. No.
9930972001,(seeFig. -I) is available that
permitstheType JAEO CT cobe mounted
on the insulated bushing of a stud-type
secondaryterminal ofa pad-mounteddistribution transformer.
This bracket is
madefrom epoxycoated mild steeland is
Fig.4. Clamp-type
bracketCat.No.
for salespurposes.
lns:rument
Dais
subject :a c?aqe
wirhout Sm:ce
99309TMol
Transformers
15-87
-,
.A).
r.-
-- -.-.-
.s-.__.--
-_--4
._-., _
NPEJAB-0,600VOLTS
Indoor Curren;, HY-BUTE+GO Molded, For Use on Pad-mounted Distribution Transformers
50-60
Hz
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
r
ZOO--3OOOAmperes
46-
A~
kV
4 6:
-46---~~46---
Front
VIM
Side Vlcr
-4.6.-4
Frmr
on pad transformers
VICW
6-b
Front
View
Side
Three Gmcian
6.75
Vfer
on pad
Stde
models
having
Front
Vler
Side
Reclonqular/
shaped
JAB-0
View
13%
Side
JAB-0
CTs mounted
on pad
Vler
6.75*.-----j
Fran?
View
6-i
A-36-3
fig. 7.
BIL-10
to the distribution
transformer
with special
View
brackets
TYPEJAB-0,600VOLTS
Indoor Current, HY-BUTEf GO Molded, For Use on Pad-mounted Distribution Transformers
50-60
Hz
200-3000
811-10 kV
Amperes
:. _ _,. . ...
_
APPUCAllON CHARTS
orlxon,al
Dlrtance
3.6
$
f
cr
39.0
note:
CT rindor
in cmfwed
Dirtofnce
3.6
4.6
Cenlr-Line
t
.Lln*
lICh.,l
5 s
6.0od
t
6.375
Urn model,
(Incheel
s.5
model.
model.
6.OOndUP
i
f
=
A
t*d
a \**
gf
t
>-
4.5
6.0
+ a.0
i
s
&~,narker
combmotion
(01 lhir
X2 Slacked
6 Inverted
box *is:
XI Upright.
X3 InVerted.and
Fig: 12 Pad-mounted
JAB-O CT, Grecian Urn model.
diagonal secondary
bushing pattern
B-0.1
2.5VA
09PF
8- 02
5.0
0.9 PF
VA
ANSI
-Limit
continuous
B-0.1
for
8-0.2
operorion
Burdena
2.5VA
5.0 VA
0.9
0.9
PF
Percent
200
250
Rated
CJrrent
300
350
6 1.003
400
Limit t0r
continuoue
op.at~O
,
up
f0 Center-Line
5.0
!O Canter
1
5.0
or burhiw
on Nod*
Ctner-Lln.
4.6
TYPEJAB-0,600VOLTS
Indoor Current, HY-SUTif60
SO-60 Hz
CHARAClERlSTlC
ZOO-3000 Amperes
BIL-10
kV
P.rn
a..
Cunnl
..
-..
-5
f
f
5
z
1.003
I.002
1.001
l.ooo
0.999
.;
0.990
0.997
50
*Percent
too
Rotcd
150
200
Current
and 3W:
5 amperes
Hz
ZOO-3000 Amperes
RI-1
0 kV
Provision
customer
for
tdentificuticn
WTUNE DlMENSlONS
--qw+
W32
cuetomw
idcnllficction
Dia mountmg
holes{21
13132Dla
i
I 7
i
B-v0
c---
8-h
tzA
-y
holes
(4)
p-SA3
I 1
-A-. - --j
1
8-l/6 t-L-*L-i
A
r
A
i,
. .-.
mounting
8-3/d
_-_
!
r-w-.&L,lr!Y!J
I
+ --- .
%
1
3/q
Set
u-
p-3-l/Z---r;
e-w
-+
-I-
13/16
;--
3-k+
d-k
I
/
4-3H-q
w2
A-A
Set A-A
and below
Fig. 22 Rectangular
and below
Y6
.-.
!
%
Set &A
Lk
l,,*
L3/4
S&A-A
Instrument
Data subjec: to change without notice
Transformers
NO. N62470-93-C-3032
16402
OHM REMEDIATION
INTERIOR
SERVICES
WIRING
SYSTEM
CORPORATION
OHM REMEDIATION
SERVICES CORPORATION
5335 TRIANGLE
PARKWAY, SUITE 450
NORCROSS, GEORGIA 30092
(404)
729-3900
CONTRACT
NO.
N62470-93-C-3032
SPECIFICATION
SUBM ITTAL
ITEM
IA
IB
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
NO.
FOR:
INTERIOR
WIRING
SD-NO/ITEM
1.3.1G
1.3.1G
SD-02
SD-02
SD-02
SD-02
SD-02
SD-02
SD-02
SD-04
~~-04
1.3.1K
1.3.1M
1.3.2A
1.3.2B
16402
SYSTEM
SPEC PAR
I .3.1H
1.3.11
1.3.15
SECTION:
DESCRIPTION/MANUFACTURER
Specification
Grade
AC Switches
\I$-
2J
.---__-_
-;,,;
15ACl-I
20AC3-I
Specification
Standard
20ACl
Grade
Switches
Rating
Catalog
A.
V. AC
1.5
120-277
120-277
120-277
120-277
120-277
120-277
15
20
20
-+.
A switches
3A. wtches
lighted
Toggle
lighted
Switches
(Glow when
C!Klr
ivory
Cienr
cata!og
r.m.ber
Soecify
brown
120
120
120
120
120
(Glow
,wtii
co~ooc:
Double
Three
15AC2
15AC2-I
20AC2
20AC2-I
30AC2
30AC2-I
suff,x. Gray-GRY,
cd Li5,te.W.
v,ith coior sufl!x: Siock-BK, GvI~-GRY,
mior
xmber
15 120-277
20 120-277
Dimensions
R&RED,
Way
1 SAC4
15AC4-I
20AC4
20AC4-I
w:l
d;--5
I/
when ON)
15ACl-CPL
15ACl-RPL
20ACl -CPL
20ACl-RPL
30ACl-RPL
Catalog
Toggle
Gray
Gray
Four
15AC3-CSL
15AC3-ISL
20AC3-CSL
20AC3-ISL
15ACl -CSL
lSACl-ISL
20ACl -CSL
20ACl
-EL
Clear
Red
Clear
Red
Red
Color
Woy
15AC3
15AC3-I
20AC3
20AC3-I
30AC3
30AC3-I
20AC2-CPL
20AC2-RPL
30AC2-RPL
Es-y
I
Lock Switch Keys
(One key ftirnished with each switch).
Switches
V. AC
Numbers
Pole
OFF)
Ivory
Switches
Rating
A.
Single Pole
15ACl
15ACl-I
20ACl
20ACl-I
30ACl
30ACl *I
120-277
120-277
20-277
120-277
E
20
20
30
lock
Toggle Color
Brown
Ivory
Brown
Ivory
Brown
lvcry
1.5
15
20
20
Pilot
15ACl-L
Single
Pole
lSACl-L
20ACl -I
Double
Pole
20AC2-L
Numbers
Three
Woy
15AC3-L
20AC3-L
Corn liances
Consu PI reference certification chart on
page G- 10.
15 & 20 AC Sems
*Note:
1 4.9-n. 3OA,C is
Four
Description
Way
Fits AC Switches
Cat.
No.
500K
20AC4-L
HP Conversion
15 Amp.
Table
at 12OV. AC
2 Horsepower at 24OV. AC
ti Horsepower
/ 2 /i-$57 ;?
, _ =;r,
..J iI
DEM - 0201
/F- Spec-SetterJM
SafetySwitches
General Duty Safety Switch, Single-throw
UL LISIW Fusing
Max.
Swtch
.
En;;se
j ,3X3&
SySlem Amoere
Ratmg
Vomge
TYW
Class
MhSand~ng
Ratmg
frms Sym Amps)
10.000
10.000
100.090
~~~~~
fQ&L.
Z&
;
Fusible
250Vac
25OVdc
400600
K
%
a
;kk
K
H
R
K
L%
400600
10.000
10.000
10.000
!
j
3:k
EM0202
#
, -
(,E
1
j
10.000
:o.ooo
100.000
10.000
10.000
10 000
TH3362SS
Double-throw
6OOVac
25Wdc
TC10323R
Enclosure Types
Type 1 enclosures
provide
protection
and where
unusual
FZe
Non-fusible
switch withstand
ratings apply when protected
by corresponding
listed fuse
type.
are suitable
for indoor
use primarily
to
against
contact
with the enclosed
equipment
service
environments
do not exist.
Type
3R enclosures
are intended
degree
of protection
against
falling
enclosure
ice formation.
Type
30600
Safety Switch
for outdoor
rain, sleet,
4, 4X enclosures
are intended
for
to provide
a degree
of protection
against
use to provide
and external
indoor
or outdoor
windblown
dust
I
1
10
100-200
as Type
only).
rain, and
enclosure
description
corrosion.
$2
1
1
splashing
or hose-directed
ice formation.
Additionally,
by providing
a degree
water
and external
these enclosures
of protection
against
meet
4X
Type
use
and
5, 12 enclosures
are intended
for indoor
use primarily
to
provide
a degree
of protection
against
settling
airborne
and
circulating
dust, falling
dirt and dnppmg,
non-corrosive
liquick
I
I
1 DEM - 0204
I
!
1
GE Safety Switches
F,
Spec-SetterTM
Safety Switches,HeavyDuty vpe 7-H
600 Volts-Fusible
Two-pole,
600 Volts dc
/
lH2261DC
M2262DC
TH2263CC
Three-pole,
480,4801/277@
.
.
TH2261WX
TH2262WC
TH2263RDC
1 TH226:SSX
TH2262SSDC
i TH2263SSDC
j
/
Volts dc
30
60
100
200
400
12wo
Four-pole,
500 Volts-No
Two-pole,
30
30
60
100
480
8000
12000
.
.
.
Four-pole,
600 Volts dc
Three-pole,
/ ) (
Fuse
1
i
_ THN3327@
_ THN336:
_ ihN3362
lHN3363
lHN3364
1 MN3365
THN3366
TC36367
TC36366
1
I
I
I
I
/
I
1
THN646i
W~6662
.THN6663
lHN6664
200-600
amp devices available
factory reversed
for bortom feed.
Add B suffix to Catalog Number
(e.g.. TH33656).
UL Listed.
@ 30-200 amp devices have removable
closing cap. Larger ampere
devices require field cut openings.
Order hubs separately.
@ Type TH electrical performance
does not apply to Type TC switches.
Class L fuses are ac only.
250 volts ac or 250 volts
hawings
dc only.
nOtiCe
Compact
enclosure.
1 NOTES:
DEM - 0212
I r
/
I
!
GE Safety Switches
Dimensions
swtcr:
Catatcq Numcer
1 H, Type 4/4X
Approximate
In inches
H
Dimensions
swtc::
Catalog Number
w2
ni,
- Figure 1
Type
IW
,
Mill Duty
~~2221M.
TH2222M.
TH2223M.
TH2224M.
MSS
MSS
b!SS
MSSc
1
1
In inches
Figure
1 w2
7%
9%
:3%
1.4;:
Til226lMCC.
MSSDC
Tri2262MDC.
MSSDC
TH3321SS
TH3322SS
l----l
7u
9%
11%
19%
Fig. 1
kw2-9
H, Type
Fig. 2
I-
Ir
12
- Figure 1
THR,
TH2221J
TH2222J
zig
1 ;;:g
g:;
-H226lJDC
-H2262JDC
:ii2263JDC
9%
9%
:31;
; 13%
i !9%
/ 25%
5$
5-/E
5%
/ ga
Copper
100
10/1
!4/: I
TH3221:
TH3222J
TH3223J
H3224J
YH3225J
iH3226J
1
I
;riN336iJCi
THN3362JK
THN3363JCL
THN336AJCTHN3365JG
THN336&G
TH, 6-pole
~:sE
$43241
TH4325J
TH4326J
notice
19
MN6661
THN666i
TAN6663
Tfi~6664
13h
25%
TH, Receptacle
5116
5116
5%
5%
8%
8%
THN3361J
THN3362J
THN3363J
THN3364.J
TblN3366J
THN3366J
rNOTES:
OraSngs
Figure
TM661
TH6662
TH6663
TH66W
TH4321J
TH662 1
TH6622
TH6623
TH6624
TH3363.I
TH3364J
TH2267JDC
TH2262.m
-2263JDC
- Figure 1
Lug
lOl4
10%
10%
15%
25%
25=f4
TH3322JC.i
M3362JCF
THN336iJCH
Figure
14%
24%
24%
35%
6
8
6
:g+* /
:9% 1
i .g2jz j
(27
i
Ground
i591-Sl
1591.RW
Standard
Grade
Push-in
and Side
Back
Feed-Thru
Amps
15
15
15
**Avoilobie
8~ Erowr
2081-S
Duplex
Volts
AC
NEMA
Config.
Description
Feed-Thru,Brown
51%
120
Feed-Thru,
Feed-Thru,
5-15R
5-15R
120
Feed-Thru
120
120
Ivory
White
for 4600
&closure
Catalog
Number
1591-R
1591-RI
1591 -RW
'"1591sR46
5-l%
on!y.
Shallow
Choice
Open
access
screw c07dtxtof
termination.
Wil
accept
solid or s?c-.ded
wire.
Easily accessible
ground
terminal
not obstrclctea
mounting
strop.
Deeply
cut,
th/c<
headed
terminal
screws
improves
screw
driver
grip.
Large,
easy to operoe
test/reset
buttons.
Supplied
with matching
plate.
Combinotioz
slottedi?h;l
ips head
mounting
and terminol
screws.
l
l
l
jpecification
Wired
Grade
Only
~Fot colors
Red-RED
*Avo,loble
A Feed-Thru,
A Feed-Thru,
120
120
her
than 3rown, spec :y orow
ccoq
rrwsr
(ZOA only). White-W
w.th !nd,cotor
Llghf ,n 3row,
cry-I. \:A? :e-W
Hospital
Grade
Side
Only
Wired
Brown
Brown
,vJ,IC, cco:
Add
s&x
suiflx os
.t !o bcse
515R
5-20R
:G~:OWS
3lock-BK.
co:o 05 wmber,
Feed-Thru
:;
Amps
Volts
Description
AC
120
120
;i
* Ava\lable
A For colors
terminotioy.
by
1591-S
2091 -S
Gray-GM
Example:
Ivory-l,
1591 .SWL.
* Shallow
l
Screw
l
15 and
des,gn.
terminals.
20 Amp.
i-iosp~tot
Com/jinoFo7
and terminal
screvjs.
Ind%ator
light ipower
Grade
c;vo;!oble
ps
jiot:ec/p+;:!,
up!
head
mo~pirc;
ovoiob;e.
Dwlex
Rating
Amps
of
Features
Duplex
;:
:Fl
design
ior ecsy instoilotion.
push-;p
cr screw
coTduc?or
Fide
Features
Wired
20
20
20
20
15
Grade
2091-SHGGRY
Rating
Amps
Receptacles
& Specification
A Feed-Thru
Receptacle
AFeed-Thru
Receptacle
NEMA
Config.
Catalog
Number
5-15R
5-20R
*1591-SHG
*2091-SHG
w,th tndicotor
Lght I i5A Ivory -I ond ^LOA ivory 4, Red -RED. odd suf!.x -t to hose coloog
number. Example:
1591.SHGIL.
other than Brown spectb brown calalog number wilh color SLFIX es fol!ows Gray-GRY. Ivory-l Red-RED. WMe-W
GFCI Switch/Motor
Application
Control
Rating
A.
I
<AC
Description
120
120
GFCI,
GFCI,
Switch/Motor
Switch/Motor
Control,
Control,
Ivory
White
with Screw
with Screw
Terminals
Terminals
Cataloa
Numbe;
2081~SI
2081
-SW
UL tkted
OS o misce Iocectis
motor
co>*roi/er
,witi-i
rat ra. Provides
i?ordwlre
GFCI
I o I % HP switch
,cro:ec:ion
forw~imrr~~Tj
p00i
equipment,
spas, hol
tubs,
etc. witi;
convenierit
on/off
switching
and
reset
capabllity.
Also opproved
for use as on
. industrial
motor
controller.
Combination
slotted/
Phillips
head
mourtkng
oqd terminol
screws.
Compliances
Dimensions
i-
UL943
& UL498
1.700 --+
i-
1591-s
1591 -SHG
2091 -SHG
208i-SI
(except
2081-S
Series)
GE Pane/boards
Case Circuit
Breakers
interrupting
Ratings
THCB
TkQL
HO Francs
1 j-100
2. 3
15.7C
l:pl-L-I.o!--
240
iioi240
'-2
/.__1
:2
1--j-!-/-'
-.
!-I-;_;-
!_
._
TWC
THWb
HHO Frames
:5-100
L,
i-1
2.3
15.103
'25.iii
73.22;
2.3
2
AD
15.30
T-^
240
ijo
-hL
sni-!
-,_
EC
TED4
TEL)4
TED6
TfDE
TOO
TFJ
Standard
FiW!leS
TTFJ
FY
TFK
70.225
TO.225
:
3
600
SFH
SFL
is-250
70.250
33
600
600
--
TJ 0
250.400
2. 3
240
TJJ
TJKd
TJKG
125-400
125.400
250.6^0 Y
2.3
2. 3
2. 3
600
TKM8
TKMl2
SKH~
SKH!:!
300.800
600.230
x33-coo
600.1200
THJK4
THJKG
THKMB
THKM:2
iEL
125.430
600
ijr;s
250($
1 2506
600
600
:.z
1, ;;a,
23
;Ja
2;s
---
?.i
z.2 _
-'-
_-
/es :c:
._
I1
1 12
I
j
j
--
I:
15
I I-T
,2;
cz
2;
3:
L;
22
HI-lPteirpt\g
Clrcull
srea!iers
TFL
TLB4
Fuwirsa
___ ___
Current Limiting
Circul Breakers
Fused
MUldOd
case
Circu~l Breakers
n/M~craVersaTnp~
4.Functm
600
/ 2500
2%
65
480
70.225
600
250.400
3
3
480
480
2co
480
480
X0
.-
.-
THLCl
15.150
125.225
250.~400
rJ4V
TK4V
TJLIV
TKLIV
600.1200
15 ::,a
THLCZ
TtlLC4
T66
TB.8
2. 3
3
3
::5.400
15.100
330-600
600-800
2.
2. 3
3
3
150 600
3
:
800. i 200
::
25
j3
.j;
j-j-j_
1-c
io
I
,-
I 239
I
-
600
600
7
-
600
23a
GO0
00
! a5
/ 200
@ DC ratings above
are not UL Listed.
10,000
i :?,I
..-
.::
L',a
600
:I;!
600
23a
1'
100
?OC
.-
::t-
Molded
Case Switches
Short
Circuit
AIC
Withstand
Underwriters Laboratories
is now listing molded case switches
with short circuit withstand ratings when protected by specified
protective devices. Previously the maximum short circuit
withstand rating for molded case switches was six times the
continuous current rating of the switch.
Data subject to change without
notice
.-.
26a
xa
26a
76a
600
3-pole
rated.
devices
are nor dc
Rating
Publication
GIZ-2691-27
lists molded
withstand
devices
ratings
for the
2.:~ marked
On
ntist be an the
13-5
Standards
All GF panelboards
Distribution
of lhn follnwin!l
Panelboards
l
l
Note-only
panelboards
be UL labeied.
conta!ning
Service Entrance
l
. NEMA PBl.
l
Federal Specificatrons
-Panelboards,
W-P-l i5a.
Type 1 - Circuit breaker equipped
Class 1 Panelboards
Class 2 - Load centers
-Molded
case circuit breakers, WC375B/GEN.
-Fusible switches, W-S-86%.
Interrupting
Application
The following ciasslficatrons and limitations of panelboards
have
been establrsned oy the Underwriters
Laboratories
and the
National Electrrcal Code. Note-an
overcijrfent proiec?ive
device
is a cmxit
Panelboards
breaker
poie
or single
fuse.
Lighting Panelboards
More than 10 percent of panelbcard
circuits are rated 30
amperes or ,ess. for whrch neutral connections are provided.
. Maximum 42 overcurrent protective devces per panel
(including subfeeds bul not main overcurrent protective
devicesj. if more than 42 are required, two or more separate
panelboards
must be used. Example: A 2-pole device is
consoered
as two overcurrent devices.
l
When two or more separate paneiboards
are used, sub-feed
lugs or ihru-feed lugs (of same capacity as incoming mains)
must be inciudeo in all sections excep! one. Cables or bus
bars for rnterccnnection
are noi included
l
13-2
Equipment
Ratings-Circuit
Breakers
Panelboards
have integrated short circuit ratings. When fully
rated, the rating is that of ihe lowest rated device in the
panelboard.
When series connecTed rated, :he rating is that of
the main and branch-tested/L!Lisied combnation.
See table
on page 13-5.
Short-circuit
Ratings-Fusible
Switch
Units
1993 Issue
NOV 29
. .
94
09:26PM
GE ED&CS
0.
NC 919
0
954
I
P.2/6
4140
--,,,,-,-,,---L,-,,,-~-----
/. 5 /f
//
_
7 / .,*
DATE
: 11/24/91
TINE
: 22:35:25
TELEPHONE:
13193
&*597
FAX:
PAGE
vl.
1
951-1226
-6160
_______I_______--___--------------------------e--m..-GE ELECTRICAL
DISTRIBUTION
RRLE1Gi-l
eox
AND
CONTROL
95051
;TE
517
27625
,<ALEIC;H,
NC
_-___________I__-___--------------~--------------------------------------------SOIL
& GROUND
BILL
OF MATERIAL:
WATER
PROP
A.11
I:1 1,::
C23-31352A
TO:
Va Lued
Unless
customer,
specifically
------
--w-w----
STEM
-----es
-e-m--1
QTf
We
are
referred
PLeased
no
quote
as
addendums
---------------,-----___I____
Pollous,
ar*
Included
-------------_----------------------
DESCRIPTION
CAT
#/NAhE:
E========~======================7
to
to,
-----==-~========================~=====.==
Encisd
SIR
TO
NEMA
Startcr(lOG1>
CR30SBbOhDTAA
EX/W
1 CPT aeo-120
1
1.
1
3
2 PRI
& 1
3-POS
SEL.
R CLIPS
HEATERS
SEC
FJSEING
SW.
SPRING
Enclsd
NEMA
Starter
(lUG1)
SIM
TO CR308BLOLDTAA
E):iW
1 CPT
180-120
1 2 FRI
& 3. c3EI; FUSEING
1 3-FOS
SEL..
SW.
C;PRING
1 R CLIPS
3 HEATERS
RETURN
RETURN
(lQGl1
TO CR308CIOLDTAA
EX/W
CPT
rim-im
2 PRI
6 1 SEC
FUSEING
3-FOS
SEL . SW.
SPRING
R CLIPS
HEATERS
RETURN
Enclsd
SIfl
1
1
1
1
3
NEMA
StartarilOG1)
TO CR308D606ETAA
EX/W
CPT
180-120
2 FRI
& 1 SEC
FLlSIC,II\IG
SW.
SPRING
s-POS
SEL.
R CLIPS
HEATERS
RETURN
NOV 29 94
--sm..;--
L-----
a*
09:26PM
GE EDZS
RRLEIGH
P.3/6
____________________-----------------------------------------------
& GROUND
WATER
NAME: : SOIL
PROP
$t : 3135214
________I___LI_---_-------------------------/ *q --CAT it/NAME
11-l Q-I-Y
-----------======rr==~===------a----&-------------c-.--
A-l.1
VCL. 1
------1-----------______I____
DESCRIPTION
---------------_-------------------------------------------_________I__________-------
EmI.&
NEMA Starter(lOGI)
SIN
TO CR.?ia8D&CCiE:AA
EX/W
1 CPT &80-120
I 2 FRI
& 1. SEC FUSEING
1 3-POS
SEL.
SW. SPRING
RETURtd
1 R CLIPS
3 I-EATERS
Enclsd
NEMA Starter
(1061)
SIM TO CR308DLO&ElAA
ZX/iJ
1 CPT &SO-120
1. 2 PRT & 1 SEC FJSEING
1 3-POS
SEL.
SW. SPRING
1 R CLIFS
3 HEATERS
RETURN
Enclod
NEMA Sterter(laG1)
SIN
TO CRSOSC&OLDTAA
EX/W
1 CPT LSQ-120
i. 2 PRI
& 1 SEC FUSEING
RETURN
1 3-FOS
SEL.
SW. SPRING
1 R CLIPS
3 HEATERS
Gen Furpost
Coi~tr01
SIM TO CR306Jb02TA~
1 PUSH
BUTTON
3 HEATERS
(1CG)
EX/k
DATE
PASE
:
:
1 !a/29/91
2
Starters
200 Horsepower
Maximum
NEW
Sizes O-3
600 Volts Maximum
50/60 Hertz
Ordering Directions
Order by complete Catalog Number.
Example: A size 2 combination
starter is required to conirol a
15-17~. 230-Volt. 60-Hertz non-reversing
mctor with FL4 of
42.0. The starter WI/: include a Mag-Break motor circurt
protector, 230-240 Volt, 60-Hertz coil. and a three-leg block
overload. Order 1 - CR387D103EAAA
at $1122.00, GO-lOG1,
and 3 - CR123C460B heaters. List Price $9.00 each,
GO-1OH. Packaged in quantitiesof three. must be ordered in
multiples of three. Select heaters from appropriate tabies on
pages 1-69 to 1-73.
Order special features or forrrs not iis;ed by complete
description using a ilsted Catalog Numoer as reference.
Example: Similar to CR387D103EAAA
except with OFF-ON
selector switch in cover.
Total List Price.
51170.00, GO-1OGl.
Application
The CR387 non-reversing
starters are designea for more
accurate fault protection for motor circuits by utilizing Type TEC
Mag-Break motor circuit protectors. The Mag-Break motor circuit
protector provides protection on low-level faults. the most
prevalent type of motor circuit fault.
When 100,000 Ampere interrupting capacity is required on sizes
O-4, a current limiter can be added. Refer to factory instailed
modifications.
The enclosure remains the same with or without the current
limiter.
Forms
Features
l
against
low-level
trip.
on
References:
Instructions
Factory Installed
Modifications
. . . . . . . . . pages I-52 to l-58
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages1-89toi-73
1-28
?wes
ro cnange wrrhout
nome
5
GE NEMA
Starters
CR387lVmReversing
Combhation
Mag-Break"Magietc Starters
200 Horsepower
GE Fastrac
Program
biaximum
NEM.4
Sizes O-5
600 i:olts
Slasimum
50 60 Hertz
in red type.
Example: CR387C223DAM
becomes CR387C223DiAA.
feature is required for other forms, order by description.
If same
1
2
,A
I
3
4
5
O
1
2
3
4
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
is the same as shown in table for 60 Hertz. Listed prices for 466-480 Volt also apply
50 Hertz. See page 1-2 for 380-415 Volt horsepower
ratings.
@ Motor full-load current should not exceed continuous
Ampere
rating of starter.
0 NEMATypes
4 and 12 starters are UL listed to include Class II Groups F and G, Division 2 only, and Class Ill Hazardous
Locations.
<.s
,/clteferences:
Instructions
NEMA Size
Oil
PubKatm
Number
SW-5193
GEH-4776
gg$g
GEH-4339
to change
witbout
notice
to
380-415
Volt.
Factory Installed
Modifications
. . . . . . . . . pagesi-52tol-56
Field installed
Modifications
. . . . . . . . . pages%59tol-63
Heater Selection
Tables.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 1-69 to l-73
1995 Issue
1-29
Y
GE Molded
Case Circuit
Breakers
MapBreak" CircuitBreakers
Motor Circuit Protectors
.Adjustable
High Interrupting
Unfused, three-pole
Type TEML, 3-150 Amperes
65 kA at 480 Volts ac
25 kA at 600 Volts ac
100 kA at 240 Volts ac
Magnetic
Trip.
Non-inrerchangeable
3-1200 .Amperes
180 or 600 Volts ac. 250 1.olrs dc
Capacity
Complete
Range
Two-pole@,
Ampere
Rating
_
LO
1:
2:
19E
390
660
13OG
2700
Catalog
Number
Breaker
(!ncludes
Three-pole.600V
ac
480V ac
, ,_,,,,
~ w ,&'
'i tist
:I :Qta+;p
.m
..:-~@rlr&y'.
Catalog Number
. . :004fi~
.aapcr~~~
I;-,
i'o
180
li;;l
150
-,
,'
&&4&..
Ws:
Lie
Number
TECL36003
TECL36007
TECL36015
TXL3603C
TECL36050
TECL361OC
TECL36150@
.^ z<:,
'E'..
': :
g%:::
$Z.W.&u~;
524.e.
limA0
5 EC and
Complete
I
LO
Hi
225
600
1000
1400
2250
400
330
550
1000
1200
1100
1670
3300
4000
-pole furnished
in three2 case.
@ aalanced
three-phase
inrush
current will trip the circuit
breaker
at lower than
indicated
currents.
For motors
Breaker
(rncludes
@ TEC in combination
with 150
amp, TECL not UL
recognized.
tmy4vies:
See pages 4-39 to
TECL
, *
I
@
55479677
,-
CChT
I
TITLE
WtRlN9
1NSTRUCTlONS
FOR :
CR 306.
307. 308
6 387
FULL
VOLTAGE,
NON-REVERSING
MAGNETIC
STARTERS
WiTH
CONTROL
TRANSFORMER
tCONT ON SULET
I- NC.
OH SWEET
TABLE
. .
StANOAR
PILOT
DEVICES
v .
PUSHBUTTONS
. _
OFF
M rDE
rDE FOR
FOR
-I
.
SH NO.
TABLE
NEMA
SIZE
00.
=3!?
-sToP
OIL-TIDHT
PILOT
DEVfCES
FRONT
y-w---
OFF
VIE W
-t-
PUSHBUTTONS
ON
R
1
TI/
0 6 I
II
I1i
I
I
I!
II
1
ON
+
( OMIT
WIRE
( OMiT
f3)
2 POSITION
SELECTOR
SWITCH
HAND
WIRE
B-1
2 POSITION
SELECTOR
SWITCH
RED
1
LL,
----I
( OYtt
R EMOTE
0 EVICE
WIRE
r----7
I<+
L.
3 POSITION
SELECTOR
SWITCH
CuNDUCTORs
-NOYENCLATUREN-LINE
CDNTACTOR
DL-THERMAL
OVERLOAD
~-iN~ICATlN6
Ll6HT
FU -FUSE
X-INOICATES
CONTACT
REFER
CURRENT
ELEMENTARY
x2
CONTROL
CIRCUtT
FUSINO
CLOSE0
L2
FUSE
- sm.
CONDUX7
CONDUXT
KIT
3 POSITION
SS-tl~tP~80@1
IS-UStO900Qf
NATIONAL
CONTROL
PROTECTlON
ELECTRICAL
CIRCUIT
OVERMAY
SE
WOE.
REQUIRED.
SELECTOR
SWlTCW
ELEMENTARY
HAND
,59-T
OFF
FOR
STARTER
WITHOUT
DGCDNNECT
LINE
OtRECT
TO LI. L2 AND L3
WIRE
I -PHASE
OPERATION-CHANGE
OF WfRE
A FROM
LZ TO L3.
LINE
TO Ll AN0 L3 AN0 LOAD
AND T3.
--a
FDA
X2
Yy
II_
HI
TO THE
ADOIT10NAL
PUSHBUTTON
XI
NOTE:
RELAY
L1
EXTRA
SECDUDARY
START-STOP
X1
ONLY.
CIA
IN.
IN.
-1
ER
FOR
r/e
S/f
--tT21-
-8-l
3 POSITION
SELECTOR
SWITCH
t
GNO
OL
Y
I:,
TO BE
OMITTED
CONNECTION
CONNECT
TO TI
XI
2 POSfTiON
SELECTOR
SWITCH
ELEMENTARY
-
622
x2
MEANS-WIRE
ON STARTER.
--ii?--
v--l
813
FOR
-I-
EXTRA
AUXILARY
CONTACTSA MAXIMUM
CONTACTS
MAY BE AOOEO AT POSITIONS
T.U.W,XtY,&
2 FOR SIZE
0 6 I ONLY.
OF 4
f-9----1c-----
WIRE
TO BE
OYfTTED
I&
RE
RE
t%kVISSER
3-20-69
PRINTS TC
5 5 - 1796 77
SW
NO.
55479655
1
hWTON-fL
TITLE
YIRINS
CR 306,
h!ASmIC
*a
SNNO.
FIRST
rDE FOR
NW
INSTRUCTIONS
FOih
307,
308 L 3s~ FULL
STMUERS
SIZE 2 3 b
va~Tt6E
NON+aE=ING
TABLE a
! I-4Giziizi
v-m-Xl
mg
l-61
lh
CONTROL
CIRCUIT.
FUSING
i-3
t-e
J
3 POSITION
SELECTOR
SUiTtH
3 POSITION
SELECTOR
Y-i
SVITCH
-N-mM-LINT
CQNTACTOR
OL-THERMAL
OVERLOAD
I-INDICATING
LISHT
RELAY
X-INDICATES
CLOSED
Hl
CONTACT
SIZE
LINE
USE7S-CCWPER
COWJCTORS
ONLY,
FOR
FIELD USRINS.
TORQUE
LINE
Am LOAD TERWNALS
AS SHOWH AT RI6HV
ii%
CR308
CR387
SIZE
SOLfi%4
;; I&;
% w&
SO LB-IN
AS iW?KED
H2
&!!i-IN
AS HARKED
So W-IN
AS MARKED
SO W-IN
SXZE
3
&$-IN
150 LB-IN
150 W-IN
150 LB-IN
20%~IN
A$ ktH?KED
275 W-IN
AS MARKED
3 POSITION
NOTEI
RCER
TO THE NATIONAL
iTit%%
FOR
ELJXIWCAL
CaNTRaL CIRaJIT
HAY BE REWIRED.
!-WAS-E
OPERATION-OIANBE
OF UIRE
LIM
To
6
~1
FROM L2 TO L3.
PHD L3 AND LOAD
SELECTOR
EXTRA
SECONDARY
4
20k%-IN
200 LB-IN
200 W-IN
200 W-IN
SWITCH
FLEE
x2
ELEMENTARY
CODE.
OvERcuRRmT
CONHECTION
CoNNEW
To Tl
AHP 733.
WIRE
FOR EXVS
NJXILARY
CONThCTS
A HAXXHUH
OF 5
Xl
FOR
CS&d?@
KIT
l/E-IN
CONWIT
3/GIN
CGNWfT
1-1~
CONDUIT
1 1fCIN
CQNDUIT
1 l/2-IN
CONDUIT
~::,%i%DIT
2 POSITION
SELECTOR
SWITCH
D.A.
MILLER
TO EE OMITTED
ELEHENTARY
53-2134038001
SS-2134039002
SS-2134036003
55-2134036004
SS-2134036OOS
55-2134036006
SS-213403SOO7
7-5-88
x2
622
853
813
623
m
-
uDs#r
movALs
GE
ED&C
BLOOMINGTON,
IL
WIRE 6 to BE onrm
I
ON&
Locr;nElr cc*nowaEET n
RINTS
SnNo. 1
TC
JUN 21 '95
em.
c/d
CONYON
TITLE
%!
sn
no.
L-WLp&f
SHE I
SNNo.
' OUTLINE
FIRST MADE FOR (320
7c
/NE/I/I4
w
RNISION
/s.
I *
45
392.4
JUN 21 '95
!I:
bbu'~"u
WYTON 51:ET
SY NO.
0 U JUNE
EVISION
i6.45
41.78
t ii
,
I-
2t
Gq6.0
F:
f
. 27x0
-+
2225
; 92.. 2
//.20
t 289.5
F7
CONTACTOR
Captive saddle clamps
Staggered terminals
(optional above size 1)
OVERLOAD
Encapsulated coil
RELAY
Coil retainers
\
?lO?/o trip adjustment
Overload relay heaters
(not shown)
Visual
Long-life
armature
trip indicator
l-4
Optional isolated
NO contact on the overload relay crovides means 3f direct interface with 3rogrammacie
controller or comoufer to monitor oeticrmance ant ciagnose
a&s.
Current-carrying
components-contact
tips are we!dresistant. sliver cadmium oxide (fine sliver on sizes 00 ana 0
only). Contacts are Installed in a wedge configuration
ior
qosltive maKe ,Nith mrnimum 32unce.
Optional
PF capacitor
terminalsoermit easy connec:lon
power +ac:or csrreaion
capac:rcrs oerween contac:or 3na
overload relay ior energy conse%arion.
Class 20 overload
protection.
of
!995 Issue
GE NEMA
Starters
cR306,CR386NmReversingMagneticMotorSta1ters
1600 Horsepower
Maximum
NEll.4 Sizes 00-g
ijO Volts SIaximum
W60 Hertz
Schematic
Diagram
Application
GEs magnetic motor starters listed here may be used for
starting full-voltage, non-reversing,
single-speed
ac motors up ip
7600 horsepower,
600 Volts maximum, providing protection to
the motor against running or stalled overloads.
Their compact size and ease of wiring make them especlaily
suitable for motor controi centers, custom-type control panels,
and switchgear equipment. Refer to page l-4 for features of
basic starter.
Ordering
\EIA
;
j
/
31_
3
;
-4
Schematic
Diagram
(NEMA
Sizes
for CR306
00-6)
Starter
Directions
l,P-
Typical
=.~c:c3mn
NUrnCL51
3E:ki.S i 00
;i:+.q-r
3ES4306
'E!!-160;
;ii-*+g
;E-.jjg -8
Sri-j108
Orcer
;cec:ai mccificarlons
cr crms 7cr ,is;ec by ccinCieIe
desc:~cr;on usrc; a isred Caraicc Ycrrcer 3s Fererence.
Exanoie: Smiiar :o ZR3CEC:w 3xcec: NltP 480i?20-~/Clt
,ccrrrci :ransfcrmer ant ret .r+-r
, L,,e.., mn
,% .icnr ii? ccver.
CEI List Price
5483.00. GO-1OG.
6. Twc-cnas~. cur-..vrre ?orms ere svaliacie. Cchtac: -eSESi
,3E
Eiec::icst Dis:ricuticn h Corrrc, saies .zfiice Cr cr:cinc 2nd
crcering hformaiicr;.
j.
Voitages
X32;;.
-60-480
mc 5X-600
(SO Henzj:
504iertz
irecuency
coils. refer
Starters
Factory
Installed
. . . . . . . . . . page 1-52 to l-56
Modifications
Field Installed
Modification
Kits . . . . . . . page l-59 to l-63
Heater Selection
Tables..
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page l-69 to 73
CR306Non-Revershg
MagneticMotor-Starters
25 Horsepower
Maximum
NESIA Sizes 00-3
600 Volts Maximum
GE Fastraceu Program
Single-phase
.-
,/p-
List price includes a holding interlock. One heater (per starter) for
sizes 00-2 and two heaters (per starter) for size 3 should be
ordered as seoarate items. List Price $9.00 each, GO-1OH.
/
,
I
! ,Pq
Factory Installed
qeferences:
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pagesi-69tol-73
Prices and data subpct
to change
without
notice
1995 issue
1-7
/=
/,i
:-.
YIRXN6
CR 306,
M6NFrIC
INSTRUCTIONS
307.
308
STARTERS.
FORI
L 387 FULL
VOLT46E
NON-Rm=SIfi
I
I
J RRsTh
No.
TABLEE
!%wslONS
_i
P~f!s%!ES
START-STOP
FY-----
OFFON
L&z:
< WIT
YIRE
!;!
--------
-)
ii
#T2
ii
-9
1
I IIL
+T3
LL--I--------a
.j
-7x
i
T
I
i
-J
I
!
I
I
/
I
START-STOP
L1
I
I
-NOHENCL4NREH-LINE
cobmcmR
OL-TNERML
OVERLOAD
I-INDICATING
LI6H7
RfLAY
X-INDICATES
CLOSED
CONTACT
USE
FOR
7sC.
FIELD
COPPER
WIRING.
FOR
CSA
l/2
3/4
- 6ND KIT
IN.
COMXJIT
IN.
CONDUIT
NOTE
CONDUCTORS
PUSHBUrrON
ELEMENTARY
,
!
I
CONTROL
CIRCUIT
FUSING
ONLY,
!5s-2334038001
55-2134036002
3 POSITION
~WlllON4l.
OXR-CURREHT
PROlECllON
MN BE REQulRw.
REFvt
To THE
WloHK~COOEORLOCAt
EEcTRlcu
coot?
4s REQUIRW.
FOR
~-ft&SiZ
OF WIRE
~$4
FOR
sw?m
LINE
FOR
m
AUXILI#!Y
CONTACTSA rrPX1H.M
CoHTAcfS
WY BE ADDED
AT POSITIONS
f,UU,X,Y
& 2 FOR SIZE
0 L 1 OKY.
SELECTOR
SvI7U.i
-MY
SWITCH
ElDQHT~Y
o?E~?ATIoN-~WJGE
CONhECTION
A
FROn L2 TO L3.
CONNECT
LI AND ~3 AND LOAD TO Tl
.
YITNOUT
DISCONNECT
DIRECT
TO Ll,
L2 AND
HEMS
- WIRE
L3 ON STARTER.
OF 4
FOR SEPARATE
CONlROL
SCURCE
- OMIT WlRE Am
CONNECT
SEPARATE CONFROL
SOURCE
TO
g ON OL ANO 70 1 ON PILOT VEv?CE
WIRE
r:
IS OWllEO
AT FAC7ORY
ON ALL SMTERS
wmi A COIL VOLTAGE OF 12oV DR LESS.
:%-&Fa
tgRM
47
ur
C.
DMSSER
CR387
20/W/68
LINE
20 LB-IN
As )4AwQ9
3S LB-IN
AS M4RKED
Ll-I
2 POSITION
OFF
SELECTOR
ON
4
LOAD
20 LB-IN
20 LB-IN
20 LB-IN
20 LB-IN
%-r------J
-- OFS
YIRE
GE E D &
BLOOMINGTON,
C
IL
0s
mm
TO BE OWtITTED
RINTS
TC
55479340
mm
st)(o
1
5
/
/ 2
GE NEMA
Rated full
Voltage Starters
CR306Ah-ReversingMagneticMotor Starters
Inches
Millimeters
Dual Dimensions
and Weights
(For Estimating
Only) -CR306,
NEMA Types
3 MOUNTING; tIOLE5
FOR l/4SCREWS
-;.a8
zz??
3R, 4 & 4X
C:mens,ors
/ 1-T
0
I
I
A
i
I+C
i---EE*
Date sublect
4 MOUNTING HOLES
FOR 3/8"SCREWS
to change
wthout
notice
0.88
-I:
22.4
-&
RESET
:::c
279.4
3.6
:1.;0
2794
I
1
36
:6SO
3060
710
1995lssue
2179
43
2iiY
23
279.4
:s;
Ordering Information
All CR123Cand 123Fheaters are packaged three to a carton.
Itemsof these heatersbeing ordered for either customersstock
or any other purpose. are to be specified in multiplesof three
(such as 3. 6, 9,12,15, etc.). Minimum order quantity is three.
Caution:
NumDer
Staner~Overioad
Relay
CA306
Ji73ofj.
CA307.
Cii306.
CR310.
CA324
we 00-j
oomoensated.
combensated.
compensateo.
I
I
3 onase.
Single element.
fo cnange
wrtbout
notice
I
/
orotecoon.
panel
*
;
3
:
2
;
5
.:.
:.I
,
:.3Fl.4.
:2
1.3R.1.12
i.3R.4.12
1 3R. 4 12
Heverser
%Yiuo-sceea
See taoles.
CR124
Xeg
:, 3R. 4 :2
3. ?A. 4. 2
.?R..t,Z
:.3
J :2
..I
Jammounted
CR124
sublacr
...
see CO. 0. , 2 8 5
size 3
size 4
and daa
2::
30*n
CR31 1. CR390
Prims
3 onase.
stanoam
mment
artwent
amoient
I
?oen
CR309
!x3o9.
CR306
scanderd
mourned
saqe : -7
2ac;e e-2
See :aoles.
oage ?-73
1995 Issue
I@
0
CD
CRl23C,CRl23FAAotor
StarterHeaters
Magnetic
NEMA
S&W&9S
Sizes
Full Voltage
00,O and 1
eves
-7
Heater
Carakg Number
CRl23F
0.76
0.74
FE
1.22
i:E
104
1.15
Ei
1.02
1.10
1.31
1.48
1.59
1.74
1.93
i::
1.56
1.73
I.89
1.23
1.38
1.49
1.67
1.79
1.40
1.46
163
1.79
1.97
~E$%
CRlPClOw
CR123cll8A
CR123C131A
NEMA Size 2
Maxlmun
7
I-loaa Pmoeres
2.05
2.28
2.47
2.79
3.31
2.13
2.37
%
3.39
1.98
;:2
2.X
3.25
2:::
1.57
5.31
5.86
:.2
457
4.95
5 49
%
143
4.94
5.36
CR123C379A
cal23CJlSA
3a123csfiA
cR123C526A
~CRZ?C592A
a.19
5;;
::z
5.91
6.47
720
a.22
a.72
5.7
6.35
6.32
7 99
3.17
CA123C630A
Ca123C695A
ca123cT78A
Ca123C867A
3il123CS55A
iO.5
11.7
12.2
13.5
1st
104
Il.3
113
13.0
! 4.5
9.67
to.4
1.0
12.4
:3.2
3.:9
10.0
10.7
!20
129
3a123c:048
CR12%:?38
c.a123c:258
CR123Ci378
ca123c151E
:75
8.9
20.8
22.4
25.5
174
: a.6
27x
22.3
24 T
15.4
171
:a.1
20.0
F.5
15.1
: 6.3
ii9
79.7
21 2
ca:23c:636
ca123c:808
3a123C:988
3R 123C2148
ZR123c22aB
22.5
22.3
23 5
25.5
27.0
CR123C2508
CR123C2738
:aluc3038
cal23c33OB
,:Z
4.87
5.37
5.99
(Ail)
;i::
27 0
5.92
6.23
6.63
7.72
a.95
9.92
5.79
f3.:2
5.49
:.;:
3,:s
IO i
1:.2
:: 9
2.6
:4j
36;
105
118
2.5
136
:-7
.i;
21 1
12.9
24.7
67
25.3
27 i
30 2
24 a
38.7
2.4;
26.3
;gj
32.5
I
i
,
:
jj
63
:i3
:a..
10.;
22:
36.7
297
_.399
:,
:2.:
3.1
i
;
/
'a.0
.g j
1: a
31.6
34.7
Heater
Catalog Numoer
! 4.2
173
78.7
142
17.3
la.7
CR123C.5924
C4123C630A
Ca123C695A
CRl23C776A
Cal23C36iA
CR1 23C955A
Ca123c:048
Ca123C1!38
ca~23c:zsa
.ca123Ci3iS
ca123cislB
Ca123c2308
CRl23C3668
53.2
j7.1
30
;g j
_. 7
!
:
;
(
326
55 3
sa:
T
zoj
__.
o<
387
?3 4
023
93
371
:;QJ
.22!2
'3, )
2jJ
NEMA
$2:
24.7
:::
24.7
26.7
25.5
cal23c2288
y&xEcm~
z.:
36.0
27.9
32.1
36.0
~:R123C3038
.:R123C3308
cal23cx.68
Amceree
1
seater
Catalog Number
Ca123F3678
Ca123NS68
JR123WOB
i1
i
j
Y3.J
NEMA Size 3
;:a
28
325
1
I
j
,
Ca123F6i4B
~ai23F6%3
:a!23F7198
ca123FT29
C.a123F8488
-63
38 :
33.4
CS3
<JO
3alZFg!a8
^,R!2?F:CaC
,R123F1:4c
:a:23F:ac
;a:23F:33c
:290
'?I 3
555
Z7123F'dSC
3ai23F!6iC
:2123F;74C
35.3
5a.7
ji
~6
I
:
:
Size 5
CRl23FlSsB
Cal23F2188
CR 123F2338
CR123F2a38
2;
23.1
270
29 t
31 8
339
CR123F2708
CRl23F3COB
CR123F3278
CRl23F3578
cat23F395a
42.7
45.7
J8.4
549
62.i
37 6
41.9
47.3
52.1
33.8
z.2;
33.5
194
20.1
21 1
246
4-c.
:2 5
qeater
Catalog Number
!93
22.!
20.2
210
21 .a
24.5
m3~lsl~
: ^
cR123Cl808
CR123ClS88
CRl23C2148
32.2
34J
36 3
2.26
18.4
-9 ?
32 3
.g;
ta123C:636
Ca123C:SOB
3ai23c:sae
3a123C2!43
C4123C2298
Size 4
Motor Fuhoaa
34.3
Jr.9
447
51.0
52.0
1995 Issue
%
237
z2
1'0
cR123FWB
CR123F1878
CRl23F5673
CR123F61A8
CR123F6588
CR1237198
ca723Fri28
CR123F8488
a!23FSl-B
:a12?FOJC
~),~lc?.F:JC
67.5
7!
al 5
36.3
St.0
l-70
Heater
Catalog Number
ia
Maumum
Motor
FulCload Amwes
9
~axrzum
J5.J
Size 1P
NEMA
:Wawmum
=ull-;oad AI
NEMA
i
T-
I
:g
2?5
231
zjj
270
!
;
i
~a1 23c9s24
cFil23C63OA
~R12C69%
Za:&xA
Ca123C86iA
ca:23csm
i4123C:O4B
cat230138
zazic;2sa
CR'23C'378
I
/
CR123Cl518
I
I
I
i
f
!
,
Gould Shawmut
Fuse Blocks
2
1
!
250 and 600 Volts
t
Wire Connectors
Three types of wire connectors are used. Screw type
is for copper wire with terminals. Pressure plate type
is for copper wire and eliminates need for wire
terminal because wire is held captive under a steel
pressure plate. Recommended
where vibration is a
factor. Box type connectors are the most durable
and versatile connectors for stranded or solid wire.
Aluminum box connectors will accept both aluminum
and copper wire. Copper box connectors are for
copper wire only. Lug and stud connectors are
available for 60-400A fuse blocks, Consult factory for
availability.
I-~
.:
30 to 600 Amperes
Single, Double, Triple and Multi-Pole
Optional Adder for Multi-Pole Blocks
For Class H, J, K, R, CC and Midget Fuses
UL Listed or Recognized *W
CSA Certified
Insulators
Fuse block insulators are either phenolic or molded
polycarbonate.
All blocks exceed the rated voltage
clearance and creepage requirements of UL and
CSA for general industrial control equipment. All
Vocks have successfully passed high current
Nithstand short circuit tests and are suitable for
application up to the interrupting rating of the fuse
class used. Insulator dielectric strength has been
176
/7
Gould Shawmut
Fuse Blocks
.24
.19
so
y-
--
1::
- -.
1.46
Fuse Clips
PNsxllro Ptata
SlXOWTypr3OA
Box Typo
30&6OA
Fig.
collnectors
ng. 7
Fig. 6
h-8
Non-sprlw
RdnforWd
Fuse Mock
tip&g
ClassR30&6OA
Relnforaxd
Dimensions-250
AMPERE
RATING
POLES
Adder
:
3
rYPE
BOX
WIRE
RANGE
and 60 Ampere
CATALOG NUMBER
TYPE OF CUP
CLASS R
ClASSHLK
CZSSH;
NON-SPRING
SPRING
REINFORCED REINFORCED REINFORCED
X14-82
AUCU
m301
20307
20306
cu
#14+#10
20311
2cI310
2a312
20313
20320
20316
20315
20317
29318
nG
20305R
20306R
20307R
20308R
32
4
20316R
X)31!%
20317R
20318R
2a325R
20326R
2Q326R
:
3
4
Adder
%lyczkWe
:
&
1
f
PreSSWe
plate
cu
#l4-#lo
EEi
iiz
20327
:
3
BOX
20355R
2s
#14-X4
Cu
Adder
wyczizmate
:
3
Aj&
:
3
BOX
#YS2
BOX
cu
#I6#4
20601
zz
:
34
E
20607
zz
20667
20356f?ZEi
2Q606R
:3
4
5
izi%
60606R
206!ZSR
;
8
65
20656R
20657R
20666R
;:
NOW To convert 3OA adder pole to single pole, use end barrier #UOS322.
l-pole, 304 block does not accept adder pole.
Fuse blocks have copper box COntWCtOrS
and clips and are for copper wires only. These are specifically designed with Fe
same coefficient of expansion as copper wire for improved heat cycling and meet or exceed OEM no aluminum specificatrons.
Fuse Blocks
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Recommended
mounting
Fig.
screws for all 30A and 60A fuse biocks - 114 (.250"
I
CONNECTOR
AMPERE
RATING
[
i
POLES
Adaer
30
Polycarbonate
TYPE
1
32
Adder
Box
I
,
WlRE
RANGE
CATALOG
TYPE
i CLASSH&K
1 NON-SPRING
) REINFORCED
dia.)
NUMBER
OF CUP
i CLASS H&K
!
SPRING
/ REINFORCED
j
CLASSR
/
SPRlNG
j REINFORCED
FIG
;
3
AUCu
#14#2
cu
Prier
#14-#10
Adder
:
3
Adder
60
Adder
Polycarbonate
cu
#14-#10
screw
Fig. 4
:
3
Box
60355R
60356R
60357R
60358R
CU
#14#4
Box
Al/Q
E
60802
60603
#14-K!
60805
60806
60607
60808
60608R
1
i
To convert 30A or 60A adder pole to single pok use end barrier WOS381.
* Fuse biocks have copper box COfltIeCtOffiand ciips and are for copper wires Only.These are specifically designed with the same
coeffiaent of expansion as copper wire for improved heat cycling and meet or exceed OEM no auminum specifications.
Note:
204
GE Speciahy
Transfomers
typeML
Type QB,
TYW 0%
BkVA-15
kVA
three-phase
5 kVA-25
kVA,
single-phase
\
p Arrangement
General Information
The complete family of transformers
reliable transformer operation.
~-.P-i
j
/
from GE provide
through
quie?.
----
Temperature
Class
systems in accordance
Construction
Types QS, ML and QMS
Core and coils are contained within a NEMA 3R nonventilated
weatherproof
enclosure. Type QB and QMS units feature
encapsulated
core and coils.
Type QL
Units are enclosed in a NEMA 2 drip-proof metal enclosure with
natural-draft ventilation. Core-and-coil
assembly is mounted on
rubber isolation pads to reduce noise. Weathershield
kits are
available for conversion to a NEMA 3R enclosure suitable for
outdoor service.
How to Select
l
l
L/C-\
L
l
l
Termination
imprcved termination spacing and wiring comoanment
room
gives greater flexibility in seleaing various UL Listed conneczors
for either copper or aluminum cable. A listing of suitable
connectors is packaged with each GE transformer.
DEM - 1002
I
@
GE SpeciaiZy
Transformers
Fz 9y TypeGeneralPurposeTransformers
~-!~es QB. QMS. ML. and QL
600 Volts and Beiou-
Sound Levels
c-9
lo-50
51.750
:51300
301&M
Weathershield
LJL Approved
Kits supplied
Single-phase
.oso-25 I
25
37.5-50
Single-phase
j
Slanoaro
167
Three-Phase
I
Three-phase
3-75
15-50
2.5
sxandard
on au ML w m
9TlSY5042
97 18Y50.43
400.5oG
9rlWa317GlO
NOTES:
__~
---~--.
--
I
@
GE Specialty Transformers
Type ML
Type QB
\
Max.
I W
I $2
6i0. 50/60 Hertz
WdUl
Type Q&Single-phase,
tit%
US.t
8
6
6
F Hngnl
Ma%
I (Ill.! I
I
,
MIU.
WlOlll
(In.)
16%
L-u
29
Type QL-Three-phase,
19
:"5
112.5
150
:g
1WU
32 Ia
35%
NelwLIlss.:
ALmaxmr
%i
cr;
i
j
1
-
Type CA-Single-phase,
::
:s
Max.
E
z!
40
46
48
51%
58%
58%
47k
47k
::
Ei
:'5
! 5 ia
2%
22%
27%
28%
33%
I
1e5
I
285
jgo
665
I 1130
;g
324
23~~s
23"h
23flr
38k
42k
g
8iO
1030
1180
1370
153s
f NOTES:
DEM
GE SpeciahY Transformers
- 1007
I
I
DEM - 1018
GE Speciaiw Transformers
-~~9y TypeGeneralPurposeTransformers
Loii TemperatureRise
Application
Description
These low temperature rise
transformers utilize a UL
fe~gnized 220% insulation
system featuring either 80X
or 115X temperature rise.
They provide inherent
overload capability and
longer life than standard
Type QL designs.
Available in both single- and
three-phase ratings, GE Type
CL low temperature rise
transformers are UL Listed,
File E79145.
low tin&atura
rise transformer
/ j
. (dosed view)
,_-.
Single-phase
indoor@, Type QL, 60 Hertz
------- .--___._
.._
_
UL Listed
,-,
iVA
ky
atv
c-og
NUTlOW
t.
1
Rise
1lSC
80-c Rise
I
15
::.5
:
100
1
1
9723L3670
34%
.I 9723W67DG81
_ %%%3
9T23L3674
9T23L3675
E;;
3
$$
224
26'k
;
Three-phase
Indoor@, Type QL, 60 Hert
UL Listed,
CSA Certified
WC Rise
19
E
JL
2
Z!$
47'k
47'k
60
80% Rise
I
?5
,-
30
45
50
'
225
;a!.5
300
500
I:
1
9T2303071
I 9T23Q3072
mm;%
32!'a
g32%
:::
g
16'flS
23"h
23"fM
1E%s
:6
. 9T23LB077
9T2303076
9T2303075
9T2303074
. 9T23L6076
9T23L9079
:i
40
:g .
76
4 7 ?2
23'%s
28%
26%
St
5od
6El
i
a
f2
18
275
2:
465
:6
18
16
2
1030
60s
%
3050
0 Tap
646) Arrangement:
2/2% taps: 2
600
above
@ %%?i
Factory
for
and
4 below
primarytaps
outdoorNEMA
rated
ar!mary
above
and Below
3Fl enclosure.
voltage
ratea
GE Specialty
Transformers
',--- hteqral
L Transformerand llstribution Center
&r&G
Description
The Servicenter mini-unit
substation from GE brings
proven rugged, encapsulated
transformer benefits together
with GE advanced breaker
techniques to provide one,
highly reliable power supply
package. This easily installed
and serviceable unit
incorporates a Type QMS
transformer, a primary main
circuit breaker, a secondary
main circuit breaker, and a
load-center-design breaker
panel. Since these
components dont have to be
installed and interconnected
separately, the contractor or
user can reduce installation
time and costs. Because of
the single-unit COnCept,
Ooiy
one, handy Servicenter need
be mounted.
Available in single-phase, 5
through 25 kVA, 600-volt
class ratings, the GE
Servicenter is a convenient,
economical way to meet your
The transformer-The
Servicenter utilizes GE
transformer design which has
twenty years of field proven
experience behind it and a
long track record for assuring
Application
The Servicenter can be used
wherever 480-volt power is
available and 120- or 240~voit
branch circuits are required.
The unit can be used in such
applications as vending
machine areas, and
UL recognized insulation
system with a 115% rise.
me panel-The
panel
assembly includes the rugged
GE Power Mark PlusN circuit
breaker load center interior, a
Type TED primary main circuit
breaker, and a Type THQL
secondary main circuit
breaker on units 5 through 15
kVA. Type TQD secondary
main circuit breakers are
used on the 25 kVA model.
The load center will accept
one- or two-pole common trip
circuit breakers and ground
fault breakers. All
construction
laboratory
test
UL Listed
The Servicenter carries a UL
Label for unit substations, and
is suitable for both indoor and
outdoor installation.
NEC Requirements
The Servicenter conforms
with Artic!e 450-3 of the 1987
National E!ec!ric Code.
Single-phase
Secondaw
LVA
llem
NO.
Catalog
Number
W.
.
_
9T21SlOSO
9T21S1070
9T21S1100,
912iSliko'
9T2lS1250
6
6
8
12
20
Secondary
5
7.5
10
15
9T21S1052
9T21S1072
9T21Sl102
9T21SllSZ
5%
below
9amgs
2.pok?
7.5
to
2 ?25 -IS .. *
a(2)
Breaker
1'THOL
l-pole
I
I
normal
6
6
8
12
3
3
4
6
10
12
12
16
24
8
4
4
6
10
2
12
12
16
24
24
25A
35A
50A
60A
1OOA
30A
1OA
SOA
;OA
150A
4
4
6
10
12
12
16
24
20A
30A
40A
6OA
3OA
40A
50A
7OA
Hza
12
12
16
24
taps.
Dimensions
kVA
:.5
10
4:
Cat&g
Numoer
'
;IT2:S1050
iOS2
jT2'Sl070::072
3121S1100.1102
A Max.
Helgnl
32%
33%
3T2~S1150.!152
9T21S1250
244
a Max.
Width
c Max
morn
: O?h
i2
11
,2'/$
i52
:6,/a
14%
15 c/r
12?>
Aoprox. Wt.
(Lbs.1
5
3 !'3
r!
1 : '.'*
:3x
15 '.S
6';:
9 'la
!O
12
13 'I8
6
gc.,
7'"
;;,:B
3
Net
Shlo
$6
9/!s
12%
13%
2 "1,
2%
2'~s
3 'A
3 '.i
123
161
133
?71
208
ii%
118
$2;
Y
NOTES:
ro changr
without
norm
1 DEM - 1018
ypti GeneralPurpuseTransformers
nperature Rise
Application
@ion
N temperature rise
lers utilize a UL
ed 220% insulation
maturing either 80%
temperature rise.
bvide inherent
capability and
:e than standard
designs.
s in both single- and
we ratings, GE Type
temperature rise
rners are UL Listed,
1145.
e-phase
x@, Type QL, 60 Hertz
w
IO.
camog
t4umOer
460 vollsoetta
Pmnarf
.%cmaaq
208Y/l20
volts
Olmenstorts
wlcllesl
PIWJM
( wdm
1 &Dm
se-phase
,or@, Type Ql, 60 Hem
48ovcdmDstnRimary
seoon&ly
2wY/120
II
5,
'
I
I
i
. 9T23Q3071
912303072
- ;%3%2
. 9T2303074
gT2303015
sTi?;Vi?~f3
9723L0078
9123L6079
32y4
%f
354
40
48
&&
76
::
::
32
$2
a7v2
47%
60
volm
10'h
18%r
23"l~s
23'%,
23"Ar
g:f:
i
6
ii
18
ii
:8
'8
18
275
325
465
a65
605
1030
1030
;y
1%
3450
a
El;
6
.
10
0 Tap Arrangement
G-(6) 2/&
taps: 2 above and 4 below rated primary
voltage.
A500 kVA has (2) 3.1% primary
taps above and below rated
voltage.
@ Consult Factory for outdoor
NEW
3R enclosure.
/
I
POINTED
GROUND
RODS
bonded rods last longer, drive easier and will not crack.
Stop corrosion,
while providing
the lowest
possible
resistance
Copper exteriors,
molecularly bonded to nickel-sealed
requirements
of ANSVUL 467-l 984 (ANSI C33.8-1972)
to ground.
high-strength
and CSA.
steel cores,
exceed
the
Identification: Company name, length, diameter, catalog number, UL logo and control number are
roll-stamped within 12 of chamfered end on each rod for easy inspection after installation.
Copper Jacket:
standard
exceeds
of 75,000 pounds
per square
611255*
112" x 5'
10
100
296
611265
112" x 6'
10
100
310
611285*
112" x 8'
10
100
444
611380*
112" x 8'
10
100
553
611200
112" x10'
611300
1/2"xlO
10
100
605
10
100
690
615830
518" x 3'
__
50
253
615840
518" x 4'
10
100
338
615850
518" x 5'
10
100
422
/
I
/
;,:,I
,
- 1 615860*
615880*
615883**
615800*
518" x 6'
518" x 8'
518" x 8'
518" x 10'
615803*"
518" x 10'
1 615812
98"
x 12'
615815
518" x 15'
10
509
10
100
680
10
10
100
100
680
844
10
100
of .OlO.
100
tolerance
c
9
.LA
844
10
100
1018
10
100
1266
V
1" x 10'
614400
ER/TEcH,
ASUBSiDlAFlYOFERlCOlNTERNATlONALCORP.
3
rods.
1266
P.O.60~487
INC.
25
Aberdeen,NC
.
Phone: (910)944-3355
Toll Free: (800)476-2X6
Fax: (910)944-2511
28315
019401 -L
Primed In USA 199-l
Al-l
JLIN 22 95
lB:88f%l
GE ED&C5 RRLEIGH
P. l/13
GENERAL
CONTRACTOR
ELECT
EQUIPMENT
R I
TRANSMITTAL
DATE
SOIL
& GROUND
WATER
A. 5
I,
CUSTOMER
ORDER
NUMBER
I
,
I
I
I
FACTORY
I8
SOLD
TO
I
lOWENS
ELECTRICAL
BOX 3127
IP.0.
f82G
SOUTH
KERR
4
SUPPLY
(2SCD4)
AVENUE
NC
~WZLMINGTDN
i
PEE
DRAWINGS
1r,
FOR
NUMBER
I
I
FACTZRY
II
1
1I
1I
I
CONTRACTOR
. I
I
I
tI
I
t
:
I
f1
:
1,
:
II
i
28&02-
-->
REQUXSITXCIN
1,
ORDERL
ADDRESS
CO.
APPROVAL
:
I
I
II
I
I
I
RECORD
APPROVAL
DRkWlNGS
ARE ATTACHED.
COMPLETE
DETAILS
UERE AVAILABLE
AND
WE HAVE
ASSUMED
APPROVAL
WITHOUT
CHANGE.
MANUFACTURING
INSTRUCTIONS
ARE
BEING
PREPARED
AND WE GIILL
SCHEDULE
OUR MANUFACTURE
UPON RECEIPT
OF
PRESENT
MANUFACTURE
SCHEDULES
AFTER
RECEIPT
OF APPROVED
APPROVED
DRAWINGS.
DRAWINGS
ARE SHOWN BELOW.
APPROVAL
FURNXSHED
EXPEDITED
APPROVED
SChEDULES
DRAlrJINGS
ARE ATTACHED.
DETAILS
ARE MISSING
WHICH
MUST RE
-iO PROCEED
LJITH
THIS
ORDER.
RELEASE
FOR NANUFACTUHE
sl?iL.L DE
BY FURNISHING
THE DETAILS
REQUESTED
AND RETURNING
ThE DRAWINGS
C,Fi w APPROVED
AS NOTED.
PRESENT
RELEASE
PLlJS
MANUFACTURE
AFTER
RECEIPT
OF APPROVED
DRAWINGS
ARE SHOWN BELOW.
PANELBOARDS
_
kKS.
SWITCHBOARDS
----------.---------------------------------------------------------_----------TYPICAL
G.E.
06/22/95
DRAWINGS
WKS.
SWITCHGEAR
WKS.
BUSWAY
WKS.
ATTACHED:
DRAUXNGS
AS
CUSTOMER
DRAWINGS
CONTRACTOR
FOLLOWS
DRAWING
SCHEDULE
(UNE
COPY
IF THIS
TRANS
FOR
CUST.
SERVICE)
DRAWINGS
OFF
CODE
SALES
OFF
COOE
SERVICE
PERSON
PERSON
DWGS
DWGS
!CUSTOMER
SERVICE
MDP
Ii
1
SW
FLUS
25,OCKl
AMPS
SUITABLE
1200
POWER
RMS
FCIR
Pll+lP MASN
3PkW
PANEL
SC
SERVICE
LUGS
FULLY
RAT&P
ENTRANCE
27,
6,
PANELX=
FEATUREX=
113, SUBFEEDX=
3P
SFHA
I
I
1-+
225A
NEUfRALX=
131
RRANCHX=
MASNX*
225A
3P
SSFktA
1.t;
JUN 22
GENERAL
EL=CTRICAL
i f=---.
95
18:09fXl
GE ED&CS RRLEIGH
ELECTRIC
D1STRXBUTXON
t
-CTORY
ORDER NO
:
f
I
I
~REOUISITION
NO
I
I
1
1,
J
ITEM
12
QTY
225
TYPE
AMPS
AhP
MAIN
1-LUG/PH
BRANCHES
DRAWING
I ri -
OPTIONS
AD
La4
60A
15A
20A
#6
-35Q
MCrl
THE&
THEDB
THED6
TGL20
TGL2
AR555
H 55
FRONT
AF55S
SURFACE
CUSTOMER
BOTTOM
WED6
BOX
IS
277/68OV
LOC
AXSS
LAYOK;
:
;
Ib
1
I
L
LUGS
3P
3P
3P
3P
: BOX
1
L
,
IREVIDATE
;PAGE
I
IO6/22/951
12
L
I1
Ib
L
DATE :
INTERIOR
DATE
I
,i
RATED
ADF3422flBX
DEVICE
DATE
3P6W
RMS SC FULLY
l-CABLE/LUG
;-;p; l5 5 -
f
<f---.
ANTERIOR
P&NELBOAF?D
PANEL
25,000
P.4/13
& CONTROL
I
SOB NAME
i SOIL
& GROUND WATER
A.5
8
I
!PROPOSITION
NO
: FRONT
i 623
I 31352
;
,I
II
II
A-SERIES
MAIN
l/2
w 20
D 5 S/6
MOUNTING
SPECIFIED
JUN 22 95
GENERAL
ELECTRICAL
lB:O%M
GE ED&CS RRLEIGH
P. 5/13
E 1 E C f R I C
DISTRIBUTION
Br CONTROL
PANELBOARD
DRAWING
( ,,T:FACTORY
1
I
II
1L
;REQUISITION
II
1
I
I
.I
cmER
~0
:
I SOIL
1
NO
& GROUND
:PROPOSZTION
I 623
; 31352
I4
I1
PRINT
SEQ.
#
3PlW
68OY,277V
25,000
AMPS.
12
AC
RMS
.lOU
WATER
NO
1 0
I
NAME
A.5
: FRONT
I
I
DATE
IREVIDATE
1 0 106-22-95i12
1I
II
DATE
I
INTERIOR
I
II
! BOX
1
I
II
TYPE:
AD
ITEM
# 12
BOTTOM
SURFACE
MK:PANEl.
1
SYM SC FULLY
RATED
- H 55 l/2
w20
LOAD
t
:cKTI
1 # i
II
1
II
CLOA 3P
THED6
I
I
II
604
3P
THED6
15A
3P
THED6
10A
3P
THEO6
154
3P
THED6
25A
3P
THED6
225A
PANEL
WIRE
END
; 311
,i
SPACE
FILLER
lCKT
t *
I
154
3P
I
I
THEO6
I
I
I1
20A
371
3P
THED6
i
:
2OA
SP THED6
: 38
:
I
I
:
i
I
I
I
321
DATE
1
f
71
i
i
I
t
t 131
1
I
f
I
I 19:.
:
I
f
I
I 251
I
I8
!
1
D 5 3/4
I
I
i
:PAGE
I
I
225A
MAIN
LUGS
WITH
I1
NEUTRAL
1
LINE
I
NOTE :
*XXXX.*A
LAYOIJT
WIRE
IS
SPACE
CtiSTOMER
SPECIFIED
x*xX***
I
t
I
!
:
tI
iI
I
I
I
JUN z
GENERAL
.F~CTRICAL
I
,I FACTORY
:
t
95
l~:I@ml
ELECTRIC
DISTR1BUTION
a OR
NO
ITEM
13
QTY
JOB
WATER
NO
NAME
A.5
I
:
FRONT
TYPE
225
AMPS
AMP
MAIN
l-LUG/PH
l6
SC
FULLY
20A
lrOA
70A
;PAGE
13
I
i
PATE.
1
L
:
t
I
277/68OV
RATED
LUGS
1P
3P
3P
I REV: DATE
;D6/22/95;
I
2
3PLW
l-CABLE/LUG
15 56 -
OPTIONS
AD
RMS
: BOX
t
I
PANEL
A-SERIES
DATE
25,000
BRANCHES
PANELGOARD
DRAWING
& GROUND
lPROPOSXTION
t 623
1 31352
MAIN
P.Wl3
t
t
lF?EQUISITION
:
:
I
& CONTROL
4,
1 SOIL
NO
GE ED&C5 W-EIGH
LOC
-350
$56
BOTTOM
WCM
THEO
THED6
THEO6
GROUND
MAIN
LUG
GROUND-80X
BONDED
TGL20
TGL2
l ,,-@!
ADFSL22MBX
AXSS
BOX
A055B
l-l 5s
FRONT
AF558
SURFACE
NTERIOR
DEVICE
LAYOUT
IS
CUSTOMER
SPECIFIED
l/Z
w 20
MOUNTING
D 5 3/L
XNTERIOR
;_
(
4
DATE
;
I
t
JUN 22 '95
rf+--
GENERAL
F.LECTRICAL
:FACTORY
kI
lB:l'&Pl
ORDER
;RFQUISITION
I
PANELBOARD
DRAWING
:
JO6 NAME
; SOXL & GROUND WATER
A.5
II
I FRONT
lPROPOSITION
NO
: 31352
t 0 i
; 623
4
I
II
I
I
NO
P.-?/l3
E L E C T R I C
DfSTRS6UTION
& CONTROL
NO
PRINT
SEQ.
#
3PlW &3OY/277V
25,000
AMPS.
lREV!DATE
t a
I
DATE
I BOX DATE
I
I
13
ITEM SC 13
TYPE:
AD
BOTTOM SURFACE MK:PANEL
2
AC
RMS SYM SC FULLY
RATED - H 55 i/2
W20
lPAGF
~06-22-95~13
I
,
I
INTERI&
I
1
DATE
I
t
I
,
D 5 S/rib
I
LOAD
225A
I 8
PANEL
WIRE
SPACE
END FILLER
lCKT;
1 # I
I
t
II
6tlA
71
f
I
1
I
I 131
I
I
I
t
t 1st
I
i
i
1 25:
:
f
1
1
i 31!!
1 331
,-.
I
1
I
1
II
YP WED6
70A
3P
THED6
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
7aA
SP THEDB
70A
3P
ThED6
70A
3P
THED6
2JAlPTED
2nA
1P
?C)A 1.P
2 OA 3.P
20A 1P
CLOA 3P
THED6
10A
3P
THED6
606
SF
THED6
LOA
3P THEO6
204
1P THEO
351
2OA
371 20A./P
39:
20A
61:
20A
1P THEO.
L
1
2OA
1P THEO
1P
IP
1
I
1
20A
20A
IP THED
1P THEO
,
I
t
f
i
NOTE:
THED
THED
I
I
1
1
1
,I
,I
I
1
1
I
It
I
,
I
I
i
I
I
I
t
I
I
f
t
I
f
,
t
1
I
I
I
THED
THED
T HED
THED
22%
MAIN
LUGS
WITh
NEUTRAL
I
I
I
LfNE
I
*tXX*X*
LAYOUT
WIRE
IS
SPACE
CUSTOMER
SPECIFIED
*k**x**
I
I
II
I
i
J&j
GENERAL
ELECTRICAL
,jFACTORY
I
I
I
I
:REQU;SITION
I
f
I
I,
22 95
1@:1m
GE u>&CS Rf7LEIGH
ELECTRIC
DISTRIBUTION
ORDER
PANELBOARD
DRAWING
& CONTROL
JOB NAME
f
: SOIL
& GROUND
I*IATER
A.5
:
IPROPOSITION
NO
: FRONT
I 623
t 31352
I
11
It
L
NO
NO
PANEL
A-SERIES
TYPE
25,aao
MAIN
225
AMPS
AMP
l-LUG/PH
BRANCHES
12
2
5
3
lI-
OPTXONS
I
y-.
MAIN
RMS
SC
20A
2%
1%
2(3A
FULLY
-350
#6
MCM
TGL.20
TGL2
AXSS
BOX
AB55B
H 55
FRONT
AF5SS
SURFACE
CUSTOMER
BOTTOM
THEO
THED6
THED6
THED6
GROUND
MAIN
LUG
GROUND-BOX
BONDED
IS
277/&&W
LOC
ADF3422MBX
LAYOUT
LUGS
1P
3P
3P
3P
I BOX
i
1
I
:REV;DATE
:06/22i95:
:
,I
II
INTERIOR
DATE
I
I
1
1
RATED
iNTERIOR
DEVICE
DATE
3Pd.W
AD
l-CABLE/LUG
P. 8/13
SPECIFIED
l/2
w 20
MOUNTING
D 5 3/L
iPAGE
Iti
I
DATE
I
I
1I
I
:
i
JIJN 22 95
GENERAL
/,+ECfRICAL
UACTORY
I
I
I
J
1Q:lBAM
GE ED&CS RRLEIGH
ELECTRIC
DISTRIBUTSON
QRDER
NO
I
f SOIL
1
1
P. 9/13
PANELBOARD
DRAGdING
& CONTROL
JOB
WATER
& GROUND
NAME
A.5
j REQUISITION
t
r
NO
,I FRONT
fPROPOSIYION
NO
t 623
I 31352
PRINT
SEQ.
f
3PciW 18OY/277V
25,000
AMPS.
LOAD
2254
PANEL
WIRE
I1
1: >- 25A
:
3P
t
:
I
71
f
I
15A
3P
2UA
20A
20~
20A
1P THED
1P THED
1P THED
1P THED
f
:
21:
23:
20A
2OA
IP THED
1P THED
! 25:
I
I
15A
3P
I
I
i
I
I
I
I
W20
3P
3P
15A
3P
THED6
20A
a4
2QA
OA
20A
20A
154
1P
1P
tP
ZP
1P
1P
3P
m
THFD
ThED
THEO
THEO
THED
THED6
THED6
,I
I
THED6
THED6
3P
THED6
204
225A
MAIN
LUGS
UlTH
SP
NOTE :
LINE
*XXX*XX
LAYOUT
WIRE
IS
2:
i
THEO6
20A
3P
THED6
I
I
II
NEUTRAL
I
t
i
I
I
I
i
I
1
i
i
I
I
:
I8
I
II
SPACE
CUSTOMER
SPECIFIED
*f***X*
:
I
I
II
20A
DATE
0 5 3/b
15A
INTERIOR
I,. : 25A
:
I4
I
I
I,
:
:
II
1
I
1
,
3
lCKT;
I # t
I
I
,I
18
,I
,
4I
37:
I
L
END FILLER
THEDb
131
15:
17:
1s:
:
I
SPACE
THED6
1
1
f
:
:PAGE
DATE
31 I
! BOX
16
ITEM # 16
TYPE:
AD
AC
BOTTOM SURFACE MK:PANEL
3
RMS SYM SC FULLY
RATED - H 55 l/2
I,
t
I
II
;CKT:
I # I
I
DATE
iREV;DATE
I 0 :06-2%Y5ilL
II
I
I
1
1
I
II
i
J-UN 22
GENERAL
F$.Z,CTRICAL
:i
95
18:llflM
RfXEIGH
I
I
i REQUISITION
PANELBOARD
DRAWING
NO
SOIL
tPROPOSXTION
t
1
r
1
623
NO
A.5
i FRONT
f 31352
,1
A-SERIES
TYPE
-25,000
MAIN
225
AMPS
AMP
NAIN
l-LUG/PH
BRANCHES
18
1 I-
1P
3P
3P
15A
3P
=A
60A
3P
3P
#6
-350
THEO
THED6
THED6
THEO6
THED6
TWED6
2771
ri8OV
DOTTOM
men
TGL20
TGL2
AXS5
BOX
A6555
l-l
FRONT
AF55S
SURFACE
CUSTOMER
f
1
I
SPACE
ADF3L22MBX
IS
1
t
BOX DATE:
LOC
INTERIOR
LAYOUT
I
I
RATED
LUGS
20A
4OA
70A
:06/22/95:
4
3PlL)
RMS SC FULLY
t
I
AD
l-CABLEfLUG
l1 4 1-I
l-
DATE
:
I
I
PANEL
DEVICE
P. lW13
E L. E C T R 1 C
DISTRIBUTION
& CONTROL
#I
f
1
GE EDXS
SPECIFIED
55
l/2
20
MOUNTXNG
D 5 3/c,
PAGE
15
I
I
INTERIOR
DATE
L
#
I
I
J-IA 22 95
I -/
GENERAL
ELECTRICAL
1a:llRM
DISTRIBUY
lFACTORY
ORDER
NO
I
;
I
1I
I
;REQUXSITXON
No
1
I
II
I
ELECTRIC
ION
:
: SOIL
3
15
AC
RMS
PANELBOARD
DRAWING
& CONTROL
JO8 NAME
& GROUND
ll=ROPOSITION
I 623
: 31352
I
I
PRINT
SEQ.
SC
3P4W
68OY/277V
25,000
AMPS.
P. 11113
WATER
NO
: FRONT
I
I
f 0
II
! RFV! DATE.
i 0 :06-22-95115
I
II
DATE
;
INTERIOR
I
II
A.5
DATE
i
i
II
ROX
ITEM
# 15
TYPE:
AD
60TTOM
SURFACE
MK:PANEL
4
SYM SC FULLY
RATED
- H 55 l/2
WZO
1PA GE
:
DATE
D 5 3/6
LOAD
I
lCKTl
1 * :
h
I
I
11
I
:
4
i
I
71
I
II
I
I
I
i 13;
225A
PANEL
WIRE
END
SPACE
FILLER
4OA
3P
ThED6
70A
3P
YhED6
I
I
I
I,
THED6
I
II
t
15A
3P
I
I
I
1
60A
3P
THED6
15A
3P
THED4
15A
3P
THED6
LI
1
15A
3P
SPACE
Ia
I
I
M= THED
1P THED
1P THED
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
TM&D
THEO
THED
THEO
SPACE
.SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
20A
20A
20A
THED
SPACE
2UA
20A
20A
20A
20A
lP
1P
1P
1P
iP
SPACE
WACF
SPACE
spa
SPACE
19::
35A
3P
THE66
t
1
:
I
1
I
I
:
t
20A
25;
27: 20A_1P,
29!2QA1PFD
31 I
2UA
33;
ZOP
35:
20A
37:
20A
39:9
61:
2UA
1P
THEO
1P
IP
1P
1P
1P
I,
;
!
I
1
WED6
THED
THED
THED
THEO
THED
I 20
MAIN
LUGS
WITH
NEUTRAL
t 26:
; 213;
; so;
321
; SC;!
: 361
; 38 :
1 601
t 121
I
225A
I
I
NOTE:
1
I
t CKY ;
I # I
I
i
21
1,
I
II
I
I
SI
I
i
i
; 16
,I
I
t
LINE
****XX*
LAYOUT
NlRE
IS
SPACE
CUSTOMER
SPECIFIED
***r*IC1*
I
I
I
I
II
I,
I
!
iI
1
!
:
1
JIJN 22 95
ORDER
; REQUlSITION
I
I
t
NO
16
QTY
A-SERIES
250
AMPS
AM?
3P
PANELBOARO
DRAWING
., .JOB
WATER
NAME
A.5
; FRONT
I
OPTIONS
3 -
RMS
20A
50A
2UA
2OA
SPLW
SC
FULLY
TQD
2P
2P
1P
1P
GROUND-BOX
ce
#2
-300
THQB
THOB
THQ8
THQB
BONDED
H c19 l/2
FRONT
AFCL9S
SURFACE
CUSTOMER
MCM
TGL2
ABL9B
IS
TOP
SPACE
BOX
LAYOUT
12OJ208V
LOC
AXS5
DEVICE
: BOX
I
RATED
AOFSCL22ATX
NTERIOR
DATE
IREV;DATE
1
!06/22/95:
I
I
I
DATE
I
INTERIOR
II
A0
i-CABLE/LUG
2 l28 8-
P. 12/13
CONTROL
TYPE
1-LUG/PH
f+-.
I
PANEL
10,000
BRANCHES
:
I SOIL
4: GROUND
LI
IPROPOSITION
NO
; 623
; 31352
NO
ITEM
MAIN
GE ED&25 RRLEIGH
ELECTRIC
DSSTRXBUTION
GENERAL
FFFTRICAL
!FAClflRY
I
I
I
I
1a:llfTl
SPECIFIED
w 20
MOUNTING
D 5 3/L
1PAGE
16
I
OAT-E
:
I
I
L
,I
I
JUN 22 95
{ f---,
GENERAL
ELECTRICAL
:FACTORY
8
II
I
I
18:llQ-l
GE EXIKS
ELECTRIC
DTSTRX6UTION
OROER
NQ
I
f SOIL
f?~KI-I
P. 13113
PANELBOARD
DRAWING
& CONTROL
JOB
& GROUND
WATER
;REV:DATE
: 0 :06-22-95
NAME
A.5
I
,
:REQuIsITI~N
:
I
I
I
No
~PROPOSITION
: 623
: 31352
I
1
PRINT
SEQ.
#
3PIW
2OSY/l2OV
10,000
AMPS.
16
AC
RMS
No
! FRONT
I
I
I 0
I
OATE
: BOX
:
II
ITEM
# 16
TYPE:
AQ
TOP
SURFACE
MK:pANEL
A
SYM SC FULLY
RATED
- H 69 l/Z
DATE
W20
t
I
I
IN7ERIOR
t
lCKT:
t
4I
1
I ,-..
LINE
WIRE
NEUTRAL
ONLY
225A
1:
31
I
5:
1
7:
II 11:91
t
:
13:
15:-
I
I
i
t
I
1
I
I
I
1
1
t
i
I
I
1
I
171
19;
211
231
251
20A
2OA
1P
1P
20A
20A
1P THQB
3.P TtK?R
208
213A
20A
1P
1P
1P
1P
Tt-@B
THQB
THQB
n-m6
20A
20A
20A
208,
20A
1P
3p
1P
1P
2P
THQB
THQB
THQB
THQB
THQB
t
291
20A
31: ~n4
24A
331
35:
208,
20A
371
39: $
20A
611
:
I
II
t
1
nx*ax*x
NOTE:
1P
225A
SPACE
Lt
1I
,
I,
I,
1
II
II
tI
II
I
,I
1
I
I
4
I,
SPACE
SPACE
SPACF
L
!
I
I
SPACE
THOU
PANEL
LOAD
LAYOUT
END
WIRE
IS
I
:
:CKTI
THQB
THQB
1P THQB
1P JHQB
1P THQB
1P THQB
1P THQB
I
1
II
206
2CIA
2OA
20A
2UA
20A
2 UA
204
20A
20A
20A
2OA
50A
1.P
1P
1P
iP
1P
lP
1P
1P
1P
1P
lP
2P
THQB
THQB
THQB
THQB
THQB
THQB
THQB
TtlQB
THQB
THQB
THQB
THQB
THQB
204
2 OA
20A
1P
1P
2P
THQR
THQB
THQB
?QA
20
20A
lp THQE
P
QB
1P THQB
1P
I
I
I
I
tI
/
II
16
18
20
22
26
24
30
32
34
SPA
SPACE
FILLER
t
1
SPACE
CUSTOMER
38
1 00:
: 121
SPECIFIED
Xf***XI
t
I
DATE * ,I
1
I
I
D 5 3/4
I
!
(PAGE
i 16
II
I
II
II
L#
I
NO.
16402
OHK REMEDIATION
N62470-93-C-3032
INTERIOR
SERVICES
tiIRiNG
SYSTEM
CORPCRATIOM
OHM REMEDIATION
SERVICES CORPORATION
5335 TRIANGLE
PARKWAY, SUITE 450
NORCROSS, GEORGIA 30092
(404)
729-3900
,F-@-.
CONTRACT
NO. N62470-93-C-3032
SPECIFICATION
SUBMITTAL
ITEM
IA
IB
IC
1D
1E
IF
IG
IH
11
2A
2B
2c
3
4
5A
5B
zt
NO.
FOR:
INTERIOR
WIRING
SECTION:
16402
SYSTEM
SPEC PAR
SD-NO/ITEM
1.3.1A
1.3.1A
1.3.1A
1.3.1A
1.3.1A
1.3.1A
1.3.1A
1.3.1A
1.3.1A
1.3.1B
1.3.1B
1.3.1B
1.3.1c
1.3.1D
1.3.lE
1.3.1E
1.3.1F
1.3.1F
SD-02
SD-02
SD-02
SD-02
SD-02
SD-02
SD-02
SD-02
SD-02
SD-02
SD-02
SD-02
SD-02
SD-02
SD-02
SD-02
SD-02
SD-02
DESCRIPTION/MANUFACTURER
,I
INDUSTRY
STANDARDS:
APPLICATIONS:
Galvanized Rigid Metal Conduit shall be installed in accordance with the National Electrical Codes Article 346 -Rigid
Metal Conduit.
- Under all atmospheric conditions and occupancies
- In concrete, in direct contact with earth or in areas
subject to severe corrosive influences.
- In or under cinder fill where subject to permanent
moisture when protected on all sides by a layer of noncinder concrete not less than 2 inches thick; when the
conduit is not less than 18 inches under the fill.
CONSTRUCTION:
Triangle PWC hot-dipped galvanized rigid steel conduit
is produced from high grade raw steel pipe which has
been thoroughly cleaned prior to final coating to insure
permanent adhesion. It is completely protected from any
corrosion by a special protection process:
GALVANIZED
ELECTRICAL
METAL!.,IC
TUBING[WIT)
INDUSTRY STANDARDS:
UL 797 - Electrical Metallic Tubing
Federal Spec. WW-C-563-A - Conduit, Metal, Rigid;
Electrical, Thin- Wall Steel Type
ANSI Standard C80-3 - ElectrIcal Metallc Tubing,
Zinc Coated.
APPLICATIONS:
Electrical Metallic Tubing shall be installed in accordance
with the National Electrical Codes Article 348 - Electrical
Metallic Tubing:
- Exposed and concealed work
- fir concrete, in direct contact with the earth, or in areas
subject to severe corrosive influences when protected
by corrosion protection and judged suitable for the
condition.
CONSTRUCTION:
Triangle PWC thin wall conduit or electrical metallic tubing
(EMT) is produced from high grade flat steel. It is electrically
welded giving a perfectly true tube of uniform thickness and
strength. The tubing, which is threadless and lighter in
PVC
E~ecttica~
conduit
and
Fitthgs
schedule
40 a
~ Schedule 4s
80 Conduit
.-.
or Commercial,
Utility and industrial Utilitatkm:
PVC electricat conduit has proven Its durabifity and
ektectiveness in years of maintenamx-free
use In
expased. encased and undergr~~~rtd applications.
LCP Naticmal Plaetlcs manufactures
PVC
Schedule 40 and 80 conduit to meet the complete
physical pmpwty requirements for multi-purpose elect&al conduit. All our P\rC products are manufactured
from quallty tirgln compounds arid are CareMy InSpected durfng the produc(fotl pKXt38S
pliance with lJNDERWR1TERS
L.A5ORATORlES,
NEMA CSA* 8nd ok
appropriate indusky
binsure
com-
irtstallation.
Standards.
Ccwosion
ProaLPVC
is resistant to most ctxm+
cals. it isnt a&~?%~ by dectrolysis, excessive hum&
by* corn&w &l&atts,
(K concmte additives. This
adds years of servile life and avoids costly maintenance fwd teptacement measures.
Nob-Magnetk...LCP NationsI Plastics PVC in r&nmagnetic, non-gabnlc, and ask3uies good insulalion
at maximum loads. There is NO POWER LOSS or
CONDUCT HEATING with PVC.
Fire Fk&tant...PVC
does not support combustion.
PVC is a thetmop~asticthat self-extinguishes.
Impact Re&tmt...PVC
ient to impact.
Propertia
ti
1
Consideratkms
possibility
of a constantfy
changing
temperature
on
f8n instaltation site requires precautions against expanslon and contraction. LCP National offers an expan&I coupling that should be installed near the end of
> 0 run or fkture to guard agafnsl expanslonkontraction
The
stresses.
Expansion
at various
temperature
ranges
is
ASTM
Test
Method
--
Imperial
--
---
--
S.B.
I_
-.--waiue
Value
1.35
76
1.36
76
5.0
cm
0.11
0696
6.5
_-0646 -0149
Ol!a
imv
D150
-- I3150
Power Factw
--
- 140
__
1213
3.55
3.22
4.04
.--4.71
GHERs
seb
Exiingtiehing
FlammabNity
Waief Absorption
3Qdays
Cotour
Ligtll Tramdssbn
in
D791
-__--
26f5.9
822
9.8
__
6.3
__-.
46
3.55
3-2s
4x4
-_ 4.71
-._ --
,--b
HEAVY
cot
See
No
92
p37W'O\
Mt
pmu710~
~3337010101
4340
1.050
1.315
_..
wlrr
,622
.109
324
1.049
1
I
,113
.I33
1
j
4.026
5.047
1
1
237
258
17
6000
%3
34
1
i
3200
2800
318
f
I
\3337WOlOI
4500
f333705010j
5383
380
330
*-!
--,
LCP 40 u,L*
CONDUIT
ELBOWS
PVC STANDS
RA.DIUS EI.,
.>
F-.
. _ . .
LCP NATIONAL
SIZE
PART NO.
1
1 t/4
11M
2
t31313e
1313166
1319tfM
1319236
1319256
1319336
1319354
1319936
1319536
1319636
2 112
3
3 l/2
4
5
8
PVC FITTINGS
-CQ,
SIZE
7E
34
Y
1 lid
11/2
Coupling
-j
,-
CARTON
3lJANTnY
UNfT
PRICE
100
100
103
100
-50
-50
-50
50
5.58
7.35
a.tQ
11.49
25
25
14,36
17.95
22.44
28.04
43.55
66 .a4
IFOR
UJFT
PRtCE
1.27
.33
.51
.88
245
1.26
2.40
2
2112
3
3112
3.40
4.31
i
n
5.37
tn.12
IM!!
RI?6
Illlrl'IVUL
39
ii4
.ga
1.14
I.23
122
WI
1
t 114
1 ii2
2
21/s!
3
31R
4
5
6
1277
3.2i4.89
6.38
7.47
16.28
21.49
-
SPECIFICUIONS
Conforms
to the provisions of Anicle 351 of the National
Electrical Code under Liquidtight
Flexible Metal
Conduit.
Sizes 318 through
I % have a continuous
copper ground wire built into the core. Sizes I I/Z through
4 must be installed using a separate ground wire to
conform to Article 3.51.
Suitable for direct burial.
U.L / CSA dual listed product manufactured
to the above
specifications
available upon request
PVCjacket
UL Ultratite
- 10C to
U.L tisted
U.L Listed
Approwd
cerrification
TvDe EF Liauid-tiaht
I Annrnr I
Not Listed
NOTES
For both Types UL and EF; sizes and lengths indicated are standard
the factory.
Applicable
specifications,
standards and codes as of print date.
2630
El Presidio
90810
(3iOj 886-8300
products.
Printed
January
1994
CF-2 1
fBiimq
Rigid Conduit and IMC Bushings
Std.
Catalog
Pkg.
No.
Size
Bushings-Malleable
I2
BUS0
BU75
BUlOO
BU125
BU150
BU200
BU250
"/32
314
1
1'/4
15/m
1 'jr
1 '/2
z5/16
3/S
12
12
l/2
$2
3/32
13/16
100.0
4?/6
155.0
2650
5'116
1
1
5'18
Capped
BUC300
BUC350
BUC400
Impact
Refer to Pricing
Schedule
Index
Iron-150C
Temperature
13132
'9/32
l'/r
'116
'3116
1618
9/32
;:;
;I,,6
S/32
g/32
&2
P/32
314
2'/32
18
2
2112
3'18
y32
4116
'716
~,Jz
5'/16
15/16
2.3
2.7
7.0
12.0
13.0
23.0
37.0
41.0
a75
102.5
BUCSO
BUC75
BUWOO
BUC125
BUC150
BUCPOO
BUC250
45.0
85.0
I'/16
BU3001
BU3501
Bu4ool
BU5001
BU6001
110
73.0
24.0
36.0
13/16
77/l 6
I
I
ii;6
65116
112
9
$6
3'/r
Bushings-insulated-Malleable
BU501
BU75
BUlOO
BU125
BU1501
BUZOOI
BU250
2.0
3.2
a.2
9132
9116
%
3/G
3
3/2
3
3" /2
l
Ctn.
cm
Std
Pkg.
Iron
1'116
229132
BU300
BU350
BU400
BU500
BU600
Discount
Wt.
Lbs
Per 100
Dimensions
1
1 j32
19116
100
100
50
:i
25
10
IO
i
Rating
100
100
1000
1000
50
50
500
200
200
s:
100
10
50
10
5
5
iii
20
65116
13/18
47/a
1603
10
T7/16
13/a
5,,,a
271.0
iii
Bushings-Malleable
Iron
2.7
100
100
50
1000
1000
500
50
10
10
5
5
200
100
100
50
25
25
20
12
314
1
1'/16
1'14
IS/s
j32
v
J2
4.0
1
a.0
12.8
16.0
26.0
/2
1:;
2
&I6
229/x
Oil6
2'12
3'j4
y4
44 0
3'18
'3/'16
3'12
4/16
13/16
51 0
96.0
5'116
'y6
Resistant
Plastic
f/2
Bushings-105OC
110.0
Temperature
Rating
CF-2
for Prices.
1701 W Weliington
Ave.
Chicago,
!Il~no~s 60657
FED SPEC
cNsuMK
NUMBER
UL STANDARD
NUMBER
UL FILE
NUMBER
lJ;~~;&OL
Liquid-Tight
Fittings
EMT Fittings
UL 5148
E60812
351F
49636
UL 5148
E20643
3650
49636
Non-metallic
Cable Connectors
Flexible Cord
Connectors
Armored
Cable Connectors
Service
Entrance
Cable Fittings
Grounding
and Bonding
Equipment
Conduit
Bodies
Condurt
Fittings-RIgid
MC Cable
Connectors
Grounding Lugs
Flush Device
Box Covers
UL 5148
E28474
388D
UL 5148
El05706
UL 5148
FB-1
49636
W-F-408D
W-F-4060
W-F-406C
W-F-408D
W-F-406C
1864
49636
W-F-4068
FB-1
El8304
372D
49636
W-F-406C
FB-1
UL 5148
E66990
282F
49636
W-F-406C
FB-1
UL 467
E75814
91OF
49636
W-F-406C
FB-
UL 514A
UL 5148
UL 5148
E28474
5836
49636
W-F-406
FB-!
E60812
351F
A9636
FB-1
UL 5148
El23751
388E
49636
W-F-406C
W-F-408D
W-F-406B
UL 5148
UL 514A
E86540
E48106
91OF
91OF
49636
49636
W-F-4068
W-F-406
FB-1
FB-?
Arlingtons
metallic SNAP-TITEproducts have been tested
with ULs new 1996 ground fault requirements.
Arlington
l/800/233/4717.
NEMA
STANDARD
FAX 717/562/0646.
Industries,
STAUFFER
a
FB-1
FB-I
FB-1
Inc.
LIQUID TIGHT
-aB-
CATALOG UPC/OCI/NAEDTAADE
NUMBER MFG#OlB997
SIZE
LT38
32380
318
LT50
32500
112
LT75
32750
314
LTIOO
32100
11
LT125
32125
l-114
LT150
32150
l-1/2
LT200
32200
2
'LT250
32250
2-l/2
'LT300
32300
3
'LT350
32350
3-1.;2
'LT400
32400
4
Provided
KO UNIT
SIZE PKG
l/2
25
182
25
314
10
5
l-l!'4
5
l-1/2
2
2
2
2-1:2
1
3
1
3-Ii2
1
4
with insulated
32381
LTSOA
LT75A
32501
32751
LTlOOA
318
DM
A DbM
PKG
100
1.440
400
100
1 500
520
320
593
536
587
593
,823
92'2
920
967
1.562
1.785
1 900
2008
2.103
1 3205
3 437
:
1 3.660
1 3.875
50
25
25
10
lo
throat.
WITH INSULATED
LT38A
STD
THROAT
1,'2
25
100
1.533
,493
1260
112
112
25
100
1.593
,613
1.385
314
1
10
5
50
1.656
,593
1.X
32101
3:4
1
25
1.878
.686
1900
LT125A
32121
l-l/4
l-l;4
25
1.975
LT150A
32151
l-I.'2
l-1 2
10
2.101
639
680
229C
2 633
2196
,686
3s56
LT200A
32201
10
LT250
32250
2-1:2
2-1:2
3.025
775
1205
LT300
32300
3
3-1'2
4
1
1
4.916
3.205
3c3:
,920
32350
32400
3
3-1:2
4
LT350
LT400
3.875
920
987
5 470
5925
ASSEMBLY
INSTRUCTIONS
Arlington
Industries
reusable Liquid-Tight
Flttlngs may be set-led
to ccndu~!
while fully assembled
due io our no spin fe:rule. Simply !cosen not. ang
screw onto conduit by hand. A positive Ilquid-tight
seal s prc\lued
by cur
pressure
sensitive
In!ernal gland when the nut is TIghtened
A !,quld-tlgh:
seal
is also assured between
the fitting and box by a polypropylera
sealing ring.
.
Arlington
&
Industries,
f
Inc.
Pipe Supports
Straps
Kindorf Pipe Straps are designed to be Wist inserted anywhere along the slots
of the channel. Pipes can be placed as closely as pipe couplings permit.
Some unique features of the straps include:
l Bolt head
is combination
slot and hex head for flexibility of attachment
l Square
nut is captivated on the shoulder for easy one-handed
tightening
l Straps
are interchangeable
with 1% strut, for broader appiication
l Straps
are shipped assembled so counting and sor!ing are easier
l Both O.D. and
I.D. dimensions are shown on the strap for easy identification
(t
Cat. No.
t-4
-EtSP
b-l
Rigid
Conduit
og;,pe
Steel
0;;;;
Strap
Thickness
lb!!jC
y$-??
%
3x
14
ga.
600
13
12
c:,&
c-1 05-s
h
3/,
14 ga.
14 ga.
600
633
c-105-1
1"
1 'h"
1H"
14
ga.
14 ga.
12 ga.
600
630
a00
13
15
:7
::
C-l 05-2
C-l 05-2!4
&
12 ga.
12 ga.
800
8CO
c-105-3
C-105-3%
3%
y
' 2xP
C-l 05-l %
c-105-1!4
c-105-4
c-10544
c-105-5
c-105-5
C-105-8
4
4%
8
1% 0.d.
1%,2"
0.d.
fG'
3X"
1000
64
1000
!4
1cc0
1000
Load
1" o.d.
1000
X"
Yd."
x 0.d.
2%, 2r o.d.
2Y emt,I 2%12%0.c
3 ernt. yx 3% 3/
1003
Design
Additional
Use of Strap
M"o.d.
M emt
ZF,
800
Interchangeable strap
fits both 1Y and 1 Y
(Ibs.)
72
&t.
3'i"
I,
4"'
4lA"
Locknuts-Steel/Zinc
Plated
Cat. No.
Size
LN-100
LN-101
LN-102
LN-103
LN-104
LN-105
LN-106
LN-107
LN-108
LN-109
LN-110
LN-111
LN-112
X
!4
3
;x-.
Dimensions (in.)
A (min.)
B (max.)
9.12s~
; i 4.2
: 420
0 1;s~
0.17C
0 17C
1X
0 170
&
0.187"
0.375'
0375'
: 77c
2.281
2598'
3.175"
3.562'
2 250"
Locknuts-Die
Cast Zinc
Cat. No.
LN-201
LN-202
LN-203
LN-204
LN-205
LN-206
LN-207
LN-208
LN-209
LN-210
CSA Fiie No. Lk72798
U L. Fiie No. E- 1275
Sealing Locknuts-Steel/Zinc
Plated
Dimensions (in.)
Cat. No.
LS-101
LS-102
LS-103
LS-104
LS-105
LS-106
:z-:
g:;
85
y;
Size
A (min.)
x
3
026'
0 27'
0 23'
0.32"
0 32"
: 2::
1"
1 %"
1H
;;,,
&"
4"
0.32
0.32
0.32
B (max.)
/
1 !2
1 37"
Y.75"
2 06"
2 37"
2 87"
3 43"
4 124 62"
5.18*
Tbmws&?etts
H/758
SEieeiCw
Rigid/Intermediate Grade Conduit Fittings
8:
H&l 07
HS-108
E:1
8
m8
t----+---i
Size
h I<
x,,
1"
1 X"
1 A
$,,,
,,
&
4
li^.
i
t
i
Grounding Locknuts-Malleable
Iron/Zinc Plated
Dimensions (in.)
Cat. No.
Size
h
LG-401
LG-402
LG-403
LG-404
LG-405
LG-406
3/1"
1"
1%"
1 %"
K%
LG-409
LG-410
&"
4"
&"
A fmin.)
B (max.)
0.125"
0.140"
0.170"
0.170
0.170"
0.187"
0.375"
0.375"
0.438"
0.438"
1.140
1.420"
1.770
2.281"
2.598"
3.175"
3.562"
4.250"
4.803
5.402
BG-805
BG-806
BG-807
BG-808
BG-809
BG-810
Size
BU-401
BU-402
BU-403
BU-404
BU-405
BU-406
BU-407
BU-408
B&409
BU-410
BU-411
U.L. h/e No. E-7275
#14-#4 cu
or
#12-#4AL
1 %"
1 Xi'
&
3"
#14-l/0
cu
or#12-110AL
#6-250 MCM
CUorAL
31/"
4:
Bushings-Iron/Zinc
Cat. No.
Plated
Size
X
%"
1"
i;:
2'
2!4
3";"
::
1%"
1 '5h8"
2's
2"%
3%"
3%"
4h"
42%
4%"
%"
*%2x1
%6(X
%57$.&"
%A?"
2x2%=
'%6'
DIVISION
OF JOHN
MANEELY
COMPANY
,-
GALVANIZED
PIPE
SIZE
5%
2%
10%
9%
18%
92
23
1 500
250
25
50
2%
STD.
CTN.
oKzii:E
30
in palletized
cartons
or bulk.
GALVANIZED
MIN.
FEET
PER
CTN.
+02
.
PWE:K!4
100 F
PIPE
SIZE
(IN.)
CTN.
RAUdiUS
ON.)
102
42
60
62
85
1%
7%
PG.
CTN.
j 475
41
BULK
BULK
6.000
3%
BULK
7.200
BULK
I
10 U S. Specifications.
Elbows
90=450
af-! 2*
1.1.
s3
STRAIGHT
OFFSET
-_ -1%
100
.;;
1 ., 7oj::
,^
112
2%
9%
37
3.870
.. , -.,4.500
.
7%
-29
ij$g
6.3
i8
1 170
4.875
Rigid Conduit
3%
3.250
10
Manufactured
tigid
Ruping
Thread
P!%
100
1.525
24
16
.; ,.*. .
.J 2
LENGTH
(IN.1
11%
2%
192
320
STD.
PwETd
CTN.
CTN.
(QJ-f.)
:: y35:::
y_I.50
.
j 2 c,<- .*,r;. ,
56
50
48
25
64
. ._*-,
.,62
20
.P-
..- 15
-64
12%
!!4
413~
l.03
62
15%
670
67
IO
141
51
lo!4
19%
4%
1200
600
50
30
180
54
13
21%
1900
665
35
24
249
:2806
,,fgO
383
60.
,.
_: + ..;
77i
496
45
631
38
722
43
: 12
__...
2!4
3
24!4
ij,
:.: ,. :-;:<:25
25!4
5%
.-3100
24
371x6
8%
6800
BULK
BULK
30
49x
13%
11400
BULK
BULK
or bulk
90
Elbow only
~/
.25
Wheatland
DIVISION
TUBE
COMPANY
OF JOHN
MANEELY
COMPANY
_.
WGT.
EACH
(LBS.)
,- : -::~-,~
4
- _.
WGT.
EACH
(LBS.)
-
_.
6 ,:;,
7
:~
9
10
WGT.
EACH
(LBS.)
-,;--.-.~A.-.-
.:,5;-:;
_ 1:. ., ..:>.:
.s ;yq<--i.
WGT.
EACH
(LBS.)
WGT.
EACH
(LBS.)
10
16
11
~ ;.,,_ 1s; :
19..
25
23
STD.
31
35
38
45
STD.
Dimensions
OFFSET
STRAIGHT
LENGTH
of Special
C IS:
END D IS:
UNBENT
IS:
MEASURING
SPECIAL
RADIUS
ELBOWS
Large Radius
211
19
20
24
10
11
36
40
411
30
WGT.
EACH
(LBS.)
42
54
62
69
54
64
73
81
8s
94
ST6
131
90 Elbows*
/- 3-5[:
..!iJ-,,
#$; r,
.,
311.
46
.,/.lb-,:+:>
j2.
Sk,
.- ..._
soy
76
Underwriters
Laboratories.
Inc. No. 6 American National
Institute. CEO. 1, and Federal Specifications
WW C581e
apply where applicable
Standards
and WF 406C
WHEATLAND
TUBE COMPANY
900 HADDON AVENUE, SUITE 500
COLLINGSWOOD,
NEW JERSEY 08108-2162
(609) 854-5400
-)
\,
/
Squeeze Connectors
*
Throat
Dia.
Application
To connect flexible metal conduit or armored
cable to box or enclosure
Sizes
?a (h knockout) ?hru 2
Material
403.DC thrL SiX!C: XC die cast with
steel locknct
403-DC2 thru 416.DC2: zmc die cast with
die cast locknut
Standard Finish
Trade
Size
Size
K.O.
Cable/Conduit
Range
Min.
Max.
403.DC
407.DC
408.DC
l/e"
'/If1
'/a"
',:"
1,:"
?,ll"
560"
860"
1.045"
410.DC
412.DC
414.OC
4,571:
-..
40.
)
1"
1 1,el'
1 :/>"
2"
1"
, k,:"
1 :/2"
2"
1,E '
Catalog
Number
4;:
4:"
*.-
:j
2
l/2"
?,p"
4::
2
41i.:2:,2
414.DC2
416.DC2
1"
l'/a"
1'/2"
2"
Nominal
Amt.
Unit
Amt.
Std. Pkg.
wgt.
Per C
,610"
920"
1.105"
50
50
25
500
200
100
1.300"
1.550"
1.850"
2.350"
1.380"
1.630"
1.950"
2 450"
10
10
5
Bulk
'h"
I/;"
?,r"
-560"
-860"
1.045"
610"
920"
1.105"
1"
1.300"
1.550"
1.850"
2 350"
1380"
1630"
1950"
2.450"
1 E/r"
1 /?"
2"
DimensionsB
C
61
9.6
126
?/I5
'5/x.
1 '/P
S/16
?/I6
'h
13/w
13/s
13/4
,440
,610
,813
100
100
50
10
208
306
38.8
1 '/z
l'./:t,
'J/11,
"/I6
3/a
'S/l6
2'/16
2'/6
25/a
3'/s
,990
1.240
50
50
25
500
200
100
6.4
9.8
13.3
",I,,,
" 'f
'is
13/x
1318
13/d
,440
,610
,813
10
10
5
Bulk
100
100
50
10
21.0
310
34.0
40.0
/Id
2'/15
2'/r
.990
1.240
1.490
1.990
55.0
1 :/la
1"/2
4
./16
'/'5
'/7
3/!6
1,/l&
i /.6
O/d
2/8
15/E
'?/I6
3'/s
1.490
1.990
Dimensions
Refer to dimension chart
Certifications
@) 4@3-DCthru 41E-DC,4BDC2 thru 416DC2:
File No. E9391
Federal specification W-M06D.
@ File No. LFi39354
407-DC,40&DC, 407-DC2.40EDC2
oBRlDGEmr
Bridgeport
Fittings,
705 Lo:dst:p
203/37!.%?1
Boulevard. Sua:fxd.
Fax: ?03/351-3488
Inc.
CT 06497
65
STEEL 4 SQUARE
B8
CONDiJIT
:/2
KOS
Description
Bracket L
Setback
RACO
NO.
BOXES
Knockouts
Side
Bottom
pc
DEEP
STUDS
21.0 cubic
198
inches
FM brkt.
9-/z
5-112
25
81.4
199
FM brkt.
6-=I*
25
81.2
196
FM brkt.
6-/z
R-I.
,. ,/2
d-J,.
312
3- I.
25
81.2
12-/z
8-3k
5-hS1
l-htl
25
89.8
25
92.0
2.5
90.2
25
90.2
25
102.4
25
102.4
218
/I
DEEP
30.3 cubic
inches
230
231
&lj2
232
4-314
233
8-l
234
235
--
s-/2
6-,n
3-3/r
FA brkt.
FA brkt.
A-31.
1
I.
3-1,~
2-J/.
3- In
.-,-xi.
L--I.
5-/n
3- 1/2
2- /.
233
wt.
Std.
Pkg.
235
R-390
RACO
INC
SOUTH
BEND,
INDIANA
RACO
INC
* POST
Attention
of:
Subject:
Letter
OFFICE
BOX
4002
To Whom it
of
* SOUTH
BEND.
INDIANA
. TELEPHONE
46634
219
234-7151
May concern
Certification
Fiegarding:
Gentlemen:
Fittings
are
We certify
that our Outlet
and Switch
Boxes and our Conduit
manufactured
under standard
commercial
processing
and testing
methods dethe finished
product
complies
with appropriate
stansigned
to assure that
dards and/or
specifications
as indicated:
Outlet
and Switch
Boxes
Federal
Specification
bI-J-8OOC(3)
Federal
Standard
128b
Underwriters
Laboratories,
In.,
(LJL-514)
Conduit
FittinEk
W-F-406B(l);
W-F-408c(l);
W-C-586B
Federal
Specifications
Underwriters
Laboratories,
Inc.
(U-L-514);
(UL-467)
A.N.S.I.
C-80.4
where these products
are listed
under the reWe further
certify
that,
examination
and follow-up
service
procedure
of Underwriters
Laboratories,
The UL logo
Inc.,
the products
bear the UL logo die stamped on them.
shipping
carton
and Four Element
listing
mark will
appear on the smallest
where the size of the product
makes d1-e stamping
impracticable.
Underwriters
Laboratories,
makes quarterly
inspections
Our own Quality
Control
through-out
all stages
sampling
procedures.
certifies
Inc.,
at our plant.
our
Department
inspects
of manufacture
using
inspection
all of
Military
equipment
our products
periodical]
Standard
105-D
, Yarketing/Sales
.'
subsldmry
of
hervey
and
hubbell
tncorporated
Wt.
RACO
No.
Description
752
753
767
756
759
757
758
Fiat, blank
Flat, W KO
Raised W open
Raised % open
Raised % open
Raised 1 open
Raised 1% open
cu.
in.
Std.
Pkg.
pcr
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.8
8.5
50
50
25
100
25
25
25
29.6
29.5
25.9
26.4
27.4
31.2
36.0
COMBINATION
SQUARE-DRAWN
&TILE COVERS
One Device
787
770
771
772
782
768
773
774
775
785
786
768.771.773-5
782
Flat
Raised
Raised
Raised
Raised
Raised
Raised
Raised
Raised
Raised
Raised
ia
%
%, Drawn
'A", Tile
%
%
1n
1%
1%
2
1.5
1.5
3.5
3.5
4.5
5.5
z5
9.5
11.3
14.5
50
50
100
100
25
50
50
25
25
25
25
16.8
23.4
17.8
22.3
25.0
25.7
29.1
33.0
38.0
48.8
59.4
Vd
!a
h
%
%
1
1%
1%
2
3.3
3.0
5.5
7.3
8.8
12.0
15.0
15.5
20.5
50
50
50
50
50
50
25
25
25
25
10.4
1 z4
13.8
17.7
20.2
23.0
30.8
33.2
42.3
60.2
Two Device
791
776
777
778
769
779
780
781
795
796
EXPOSED
WORK - RAISED
7.3 Cubic
Capacity
800
801,811,
,812
803
802
807
801
811
812
804
806
805
810
813
808
814
815
809
TEZHNHXY.,
R-l 92 RACO
INC
SOUTH
BEND,
INDIANA
Flat
Raised
Raised
Raised
Raised
Raised
Raised
Raised
Raised
Raised
DATA
Inch
1 toggle
switch
2 toggle
switches
1 duplex
receptacle
2 duplex
receptacles
1 receptacle
1.406 Dia.
30A twist-lok
1.719 Dia.
20A recept.
1.594 Dia.
2 recept.
1.406 Dia.
1 dup. & 1 toggle
switch
1 recept.
& 1 tog. switch
30-50A recept.
2.156 Dia.
39-60A recept.
2.625 Dia.
1 GFCI
1 GFCI & 1 toggle
switch
1 GFCI & 1 duplex
recept.
2 GFCI
/2
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
38.0
42.2
35.2
34.2
40.2
39.4
39.0
38.5
37.8
40.2
37.2
34.0
40.0
40.0
40.0
40.0
GS Conduit
Outlet
Boxes, Covers,
and Hangers:
Malleable
Iron
UNILETS@
NOTE:
to page
Refer
29 for Wiring
Description
GS - $*3;4
inside
depth,
with
tr:.Tunting
Bugs (Form
._
_ ..__. -
_. --.-.
-...--
A
A
r
Ai
A
v
w\
tz,
L
P
a
cl
-i
Length
(4
Catalog
ll2or314
GSUQO
Number
GSV-100
Covers
Furnished
with gasket
screws.
Enclosed
and
for raintight
fit.
Hub Covers
7.
Size
(Inches)
---GS - Cast
and IMC.
Tables.
20)
GSU-100
GSU-20
Capacity
and
gasketed
l/2
314
Blank
Cover
1.75
1.75
1.06
(4.4cm)
(4.4cm)
(2.6cm)
GSK-50-20
GSK-75-20
GSK-BC-20
1.63
(4.lcm)
GSK-LR20
GS - cover,
Lamp
Weceptacle
Furni?,,.
with
gaskt:
-,cI screws
.--
GS-20
Block
- Connection
Furnished
with
5-Wire.
20-Amp
300 Volt
mounting
screws.
-
CB205
.. _---.GS - Gasket,
Neoprene
.-
GS-GK20-R
GS - Flexible
Fixture
Gangers
*
Ball
A
I
A
Cushion
A
V
Effectwe
Copyright
Oclober.
1993
1993 Printed
in U.S.A.
- Form
20
Furnished
with gasket
and screws.
Ball Tyx
Ball Ti;:s- - 15" swing
in all d~.xtions,
supports
250 Ibs
3.00
3.25
(7.6cm)
(8.2cm)
GSK-50.208
GSK-7f20B
Cushion
Type, enclosed
and
gasketed
- 6 swing in all
directions.
Cushions
40 ibs.,
supports
250 Ibs.
2.00
2.00
(5.0cm)
(5.0cm)
GSK-75-20C
GSK-50.20C
25
UniletC!onduit
Outlet Bodies:
LBD and LBDN. Conduit
Outlet
JB, GS, and SEH
For use with
Fea
wes:
LBD and
Rigid Steel,
Rigid Aluminum,
Boxes:
LBDN
0 S. ?e as pulling fittings-ideal
for
p dav, difficult-to-bend
conductors.
ivfake 90 bends in conduit-straight
pull through hubs in either direction.
0 Use as service entrance fitting.
l Complete
with gasketed covers.
Features:
JB Series
Q Raintight when encl;,ed
and gasketed with hub or b!. *tic covers.
l For exposed
or ccncealed
use.
l Blind
cover screw holes prevent
conductor damage during installation,
provide water-tightness.
l Available
in three inside depthsl-5:18, 2-l/16, and 3-l/8.
l Order with or without
mounting lugs.
l Furnished
with four tapped holes and
two close-up plugs.
l Malleable
iron or aluminum.
l Cushion
fixture hangers
enclosed
and gasketed (vaportight).
Features:
GS Series
& Raintight when enclosed and gaske;ed with hub or blank covers.
l Extra wide
mating surfaces of GS
box and cover provide greater gasket
contact for more positive sea!.
* For exposed or concealed
use.
l GSU-20
will take connection
block.
l Universal
design-furnished
with 4
threaded univ::sal 3:4 i,;s, fo,, &-.
0-c. --A ) ,?I-~
tp 4 !)
- 4,j,l.2~
o iurnisned
witn mol;ntlng IL+.
l Cushion
fixture hangers
enclosed
and gasketed (vaportight).
Features:
SEH Series
0 Economy cast conduit outlet box.
@Take wiring devices designed for 4
octagonal outlet boxes.
aTwo 8-32 screw holes tapped
on
3-l/2 centers.
Standard
Materials
l LBD and LBDN Unitets and covers..
malleable iron (some in aluminum).
l JB, GS, and SEH conduit outlet boxes
--~ and covers plus JB and GS fixture
hangers: malleable iron.
l J&A
boxes and covers: copper-free
aluminum.
a Gaskets: Neoprene
or composition
fiber.
Effective October, 1993
Copyright 1993 Printed in U.S.A.
PAGE 20
3idi'biaLzL
iCla*~
-r--
LBD and LBDN malleable iron bodies and covers: triple-coat(1) zinc
electroplate,
(2) dichromate
and (3)
epoxy powder coat.
l LBD and LBDN aluminum
bodies and
covers: epoxy powder coat.
l Malleable
iron conduit outlet boxes,
GS fixture hangers, 3i4 JB, GS and
SEH hub covers: triple-coat(1) zinc
electroplate,
(2) dichromate,
and (3)
epoxy powder coat.
l JB fixture hangers,
JB and GS 112
hub and blank covers and SEH blank
cast cover: zinc electroplate
and clear
chromate.
l SEH blenk
steel cover: zinc electrol
._
PlUk3.
a Aluminum
JB conduit
epoxy powder coat.
out/et boxes:
1701 West Wellington Avenue
Chicago,
Illinois 60657
ible Fixture
and At Dimensions
UNILETSB
Hawgea Parts
-.Type
\-
ALA
Bodies
ALA
112
314
ALA50
ALA75
ALC
112
3i4
1
ALC50
ALC75
ALClOO
ALL
1.2
314
ALT
112
314
1
ALT
ALL
(Refer
Fixture
to Cushion
and Bail
Stems below)
ALL50
ALL75
.. j
Catalog
Number
AL-Hanger
ALC
6,
support
Weight
Conduit
Size (Inches)
AL-Ball
Fixture
ALT50
ALT75
ALTl 00
Stem
250 Ibs. (112.5
l/2
314
AL-Cushion
Fixture
kg)
BJ50
BJ75
Stems
CJC75-12
CJC75-48
CJC75-120
~. _--.--------
AL-Porcelain
Connection
2 Wire. 20 Amp, 277 Volt
Maximum
Wire Size
Two No.10 AWG Large Terminal
Two No.14 AWG Small Terminal
CSA
AL Fixture
Block
CB202
-~--.-
_-
Hanger
. . ..I
isZit
{2etB
1 i2
.56
.69
3.4
.69
.69
1
-----.-
PAGE 6
October,
1993
1993 Printed
in U.S.A.
-Y--.-_-.-l__
bimensicnz
Side View
(Ball Stem)
Effective
Copyright
. _----
Listed
Appletori
ELECTRIC
COMPANY
.88
_...-
.81
-
_.--
~iiEf(rs
j
1
i
1.4
1.8
2.2
;
_ _I..
18
--....-
2.1
_-
._-.
E8
m
Flexible
Fixture
Han
and Hook and Loop;
Unilets@ for Use with Threaded
Conduit
Hub
Size (inches)
Catalog
Takes
Hubbell
Plug
V&age
GHPHP
and
FurnIshed
receptacle,
with assembled
FS box, EFHM
safety
and steel cover
Supports
200 lbs.
GHPHT-Receptacle
and IMC.
Numbers
Hangers
120
208,240
277
480
lock,
Pendant
GHPHP12
GHPHP24
GHPHP27
GHPHP48
L5-15P
L6-15P
L7-15P
LB-2OP
Feed-Thru
GHPHT12
GHPHT24
GHPHT27
GHPHT48
e--,
Size
5B
1 --
FH-Hanger
With
opening
FHHF
EFHF
opening.
.P
:-; +r
i&t
kg)
FHLM-50
FHLM-75
3.25
3.25
!S 3cm)
.:, 3cm)
350
Ibs. (157.5
kg)
FHLF-50
FHLF-75
3!8 jaw
opening.
3.88
4.13
(9.8cm)
(10.5cm)
200
Ibs. (90.0
kg)
FHHM-50
FHHM-75
200
Ibs. (90.0
kg)
FHHF-50
FHHF-75
tbs. (67.5
kg)
FHSN-50
FHSN-75
FHSN-100
. _.
kg)
EFHM-50
EFHM-75
EFHF-50
EFHF-75
(157.5
FHS5075
Suspension
around
12
34
1
3.13
3.25
3.38
__-3!8
Support
EFHM-Male
li2
3i4
EFHF-Female
li2
314
l/2
or 314
conduit
or IMC.
(7.9cm)
(8.3cm)
(8.6cm)
150
.___.
..-. -
Hock
2.63
2.94
(6 7cm)
(7.5cm)
2.00
2.05
(5.lcm)
(5.2cm)
200
~--.--..
FHS-Support
Straddles
mounting
Hanger
rigid
jaw opening.
--.-
--t
Ibs. (157.5
3.25(8.3cm)
3.25(8.3cm)
EF-Safety
350
With
(9.2cm)
(10.5cm)
Hooks
wire
FHSN-Conduit
EFHM
3.88
4.13
FHHM-Male
12
3,4
FHHF-Female
1!2
3!4
1
FHHM
5/8
for Fixtures,
conduit,
max.
holes for l/4
-. _ -
D~rnmy
(8.4cm)
Si.?<.
apart.
Oct.
1991
kg)
1701 W. Wellington
Chicago,
Illinois
Refer to Pricing
Index for price,
weight,
and standard
package
PAGE 8, Effective
Catalog
Number
Loops
wire
FHLM-Male
1;2
3.4
FHLF-Female
1.2
3:4
FHLF
FHLM
Length
(4
(Inches)
FH-Hanger
With
Support
Wt.,
Lbs. and
(Kilograms)
CopyrIght
1991
Printed
Ave.
60657
in U.S.A.
-7Suitable For
Wet Locations
(Swivel
Lug)
CAPACITY:
3 OUTLETS
l/2
3/4
l
l
4 OUTLETS
l
l
2 in one
112 I.P.S. 3/4 I.P.S. -
6 OUTLETS
l
l
l/2
3/4
l
l
l/2
3/4
5 OUTLETS/SIDE
ENTRANCE
I.P.S. I.P.S. -
6 OUTLETS/SIDE
Catalog
Catalog
1 outlet
in each end,
1 in each side, 1 in back.
No. 30221 (old no. B-25SL)
No. 30224 (old no. B-35SL)
ENTRANCE
l
l
tkt?p
kX
3 OUTLETS
1 Q
3/4
I.P.S.
I.P.S.
-Catalog
-Catalog
Detachable
Lugs
side,
2 in one
1 in back.
side,
No. 30227
No. 30228
Deep. (Ground
screw
shown above)
No. 30583
No. 30584 (old no. BD-33)
No. 30589 (old no. BD-13)
NOTE:
Covers
for Weatherproof
Boxes are shown in
COVERS
section,
pages
813 through
819;
plugs are shown
in ACCESSORIES
section,
page 830.
Austin
APPLICATION:
Austin screw cover and hinge cover
boxes are Underwriters
Laboratories
approved and
listed for Junction box and Pull box applications.
All
boxes meet the general purpose, indoor requirements
for a NEMA type one rating.
CONSTRUCTION:
Austin
er boxes are fabricated in
fications from code gauge
standard without knockouts.
combination
% and V4
These can be easily tapped
screw cover and hinge covaccordance with U.L. specisteel. Boxes are furnished
If knockouts are desired, a
knockout
will be provided.
out during field installation.
MODIFICATIONS:
The Austin Company can provide
special knockouts or knockout arrangements,
cutouts,
holes, hubs, special materials, special finishes, and
custom box size or construction.
We specialize in custom work of any kind in gray finish, galvanized steel,
stainless steel, or aluminum. Please consult the factory
for assistance
on special pricing and delivery.
NOTE: Hinge cover boxes with a maximum dimension
of:
15, are made with fabricated hinges and a pull
ring catch
36, are made with butt hinges and an AB-10 latch
37 and over are made with a continuous hinge
and an AB-6 latch.
Yadkinville,
N.C.
27055
919-468-2851
/-
SEAMS
FRICTION CATCH
PULL RING SIDE
SECTION
FOAMED
THRU
ON -ml
SIDE
HINGES
FLUSH
SURFACE
.3-6 HANDLE
q
3LLER
ARMS
P
:
CONTINUOUS
HINGE-
P.O. Box
c-:->
B
: 160, YadkinviIIe,
N.C.
27055
919-468-2851
Bundle
EflClOSUre
SIC3
Standard
Bundle
A&XC
,F-.
4X4X4
6x6x4
8x6~4
8X8X4
10x8~4
10x10x4
12x12~4
15x12~4
18~12x4
15X15X4
18X15X4
10
10
10
10
10
10
5
5
3
5
3
AB.&:.:SB
AB-5&X8
AB-864SB
AB-884SB
AB-1084SB
AB-10104SB
AB-12124SB
AB-15124SB
AB-18124SB
AB-15154SB
AB-18154SB
20
30
40
50
50
70
45
55
39
70
48
6X6X6
8X8X6
10x8~6
10x10~6
10
10
10
10
AB-666SB
AB-886SB
AB-1086%
AE-10106SB
40
60
70
90
12x12~6
15x12~6
18x12~6
5
5
3
AB-12126SB
AB-15126SB
AB-18126SB
55
65
48
Catalog
Number
Bundle
Weight
T5i15X6
18x15~6
18X18X6
24x18~6
24~24x6
30~24x6
3
3
3
2
2
2
AB-15156SB
AB-18156SB
AB-18186SB
AB-24186SB
AB-24246SB
AB-3024658
48
51
60
52
78
96
12x12~8
laxi8xa
24~18x8
24x24~8
30x24~8
36x24~8
30X30X8
5
3
2
2
2
2
2
ABl2128SB
AB-18188SB
AB-24188SB
AB.24248SB
AB-30248SB
AB-36248SB
AB-3030aSB
60
69
58
84
102
120
176
24x24~10
AS-24241
OSB
96
24x24~12
36~36x12
2
2
AS-24241
2SB
AB-363612SB
106
274
WeIghI
4X4X3
6x6~3
4X4X4
6x4~4
6x6x4
8X6X4
10x6~4
12x6~4
8x8~4
10X8X4
12x8~4
10x10x4
12X10X4
12x12~4
15x12~4
18x12~4
24x12~4
15x15x.4
18x15x4
18xiax4
24x18x4
24x24~4
30x24~4
36x24~4
AB-443SB
AB-663SB
A&444SB
AB-644SB
AB-664SB
AB-864SB
AB-1064SB
AB-1264SB
A0-aa4s0
AB-1 084SB
AB-128480
AB-10104SB
AB-12104SB
AB-1212458
AB-15124SB
AB-1812458
AB-24124SB
AB-15154SB
AB-1 ai 54SB
AB-1 al a4SB
AB-2418458
AB-2424450
AB-30244SB
AB-36244SB
6X6X6
8X6X6
12x6~6
8x8~6
10x8~6
12X8X6
10%10x6
12x10~6
12x12~6
15x12~6
18x12~6
24x12~6
15x15~6
18x15~6
18X18X6
24x18~6
24x24~6
30x24~6
36x24~6
48X24X6
30x30~6
36x30~6
AB-666SB
AB-866SB
AB-1266SB
AB-8a6SB
AB- 1Oa6SB
AB-1286SB
AB-10106SB
AB-12106SB
AB-1212658
AB-15126SB
AB-18126SB
AB-24126SB
AB-15156SB
AB-18156SB
AB-18186SB
AB-241 a6SB
AB-24246SB
AB-30246SB
AB-36246SB
AB-48246SB
AB-30306SB
AB-36306SB
NOTE:
Replace
(~)
SB
Suffix
with:
SBK
SBGK
SBG
SBL
Screw
Screw
Screw
Screw
Weight
7
9
11
13
15
14
16
17
23
35
43
51
4
5
6
7
9
9
10
11
13
16
21
16
17
20
26
39
48
56
101
81
94
Cover
Cover
Cover
Cover
w KOs
Gray w KOs
Gray
Flush
HC
HCK
HCG
HCGK
36x36~6
48x36~6
48x48~6
AB-36366SB
AB-48366SB
AB-48486SB
110
128
234
8xaxa
10x10x8
12x12~8
15x12~8
18X12X8
24x12~8
15x15~8
18X15X8
18X18X8
24X18X8
24x24~8
30x24x8
36x24~8
48x24~8
30X30X8
36X30X8
36~36x8
48x36x8
4ax4axa
AB-88aSB
AB-10108SB
AB-1212838
AB-15128SB
AB-18128SB
AB-2412830
AB-15158SB
AB-18158SB
AB-18188SB
AB-24188SB
A0-2424858
AB-3024858
AB-36248SB
AB-48248SB
AB-3030aSB
AB-3630aSB
AB-36368SB
AB-48368SB
AB-48488SB
7
10
12
15
17
23
17
20
23
29
42
51
60
110
08
102
119
135
249
12X12X10
18X12X10
iaxiaxio
24x18~10
24x24~10
36x24~10
30x30x10
36x30~10
36x36~10
48x36~10
48x48~10
AB-121210SB
AB-181210SB
AB-18181OSB
AB-241810SB
AB-24241
OSB
AB-36241
OSB
AB-30301
OS@
AB-36301
OS6
AB-36361
OSB
AB-48361
OSB
AB-484810SB
14
19
25
31
48
67
96
111
128
145
265
12X12X12
18X12X12
24~12x12
18X18X12
24x18~12
24x24~12
36x24~12
30X30X1
36x36~12
48X36X1
48X48X12
AB-121212SB
AB-181212%
AB-24121258
AB-181812SB
AB-241812SB
AB-24241258
AB-362412SB
AB-303012SB
AB-363612SB
AB-483612SB
AB-484812SB
16
21
27
28
34
53
70
103
137
154
280
2
2
Hinge Cover
Hinge Cover w KOs
Hinge Cover Gray
HC Gray w KOs
P.0,
Box
1160,
Yadkinville,
N.C.
27055
919-468-2851
APPLICATIOIV.
Austin rainproof
bcxes ore U.L.
approved and listed for use in wiring box t junciron box
applications. They are designed to protEc: the contents
from rain and sleet outdoors, and drip?ng ,water indoors All boxes meet the requirements
for a NEMA
type 3R rating.
CONSTRUCTION:
Austin rainproof boxes are fabricated, in accordance with U.L. specifications, from code
guage steel. A dripshield along the top prevents water
from entering the enclosure. A slip-on, seamless cover
is provided, which is attached by screws along the bottom edge.
P.O. Box
1160,
Yadkinville,
N.C.
27055
919-468-2851
FRONT COVER
SLIDES UP UNDER
TOP FLAhlGE.
SECTION
THRU
TOP
SECTION
Rainproof
Slandard
Bundle
THRU
COVER
Boxes
Catalog
Number
Bundle
Sizes
6x6x4
6x6~4
lOXiOX4
12x12~4
10
10
10
5
AB-664%
AB-684RB
AB-101 OJRB
AB-12124RB
;L
8X8X6
10~10x6
12X12X6
18x12~6
10
10
5
3
AB-886RB
AB-10106RE
AB-12126RB
AB18126RB
60
90
60
48
Standard
50
70
50
Sizes
6X6X4
6x6~4
8x8~4
10X6X4
12x6~4
10X10X4
12~12x4
AB-664RB
AB-864RB
AB-884RB
AB-1084RB
AB-1284RB
AB-10104RB
AB-12124RB
4
4
5
6
7
7
IO
6X6X6
8X8X6
lOxlOx6
12x12~6
15x12~6
18x12~6
18x15~6
18X18X6
24x24~6
AB-666RB
AB-888RB
AB-10106RB
AB-12126RB
AB-15126RB
AB-18126RB
AB-18156RB
AB-l8186RB
AB-24246RB
<;
c.
, ,.
J
16
19
21
40
AB-18158RB
AB-l8188RB
AB-24188RB
AB-24248RB
20
23
35
44
24x24~10
FRONT
SIDE
AB-24241
ORB
48
Yadkinville,
N.C.
27055
919-468-2651
are fabricated
SECTION
from
X-X
AB66JP
ABB64JFCX
AB-863JFCX
AB884JFCX
6X6X4
&&x3h
8%8x4
10X8X4
12X10X5
12~12x6
AB-BbJP
ABsSjP
AB-108JP
AEr21OJP
A&l 084JFCX
AB-1210SJFCX
AB-12126JFCX
A514126JFCX
AE16146JFCX
14X12x6
16X14x6
PO.
AB-1212JP
AB-1412JP
AB-16r4JP
NC.
27055
91 g-468-2851
59
SW3
dopyrlght
Copper
Wire & Cable Products
Cl993
Thermoplastic
Insulated, Sheathed With Nylon or UL-listed equivalent.
Heat, Moisture, Oil & Gasoline Resistant.
600 volt. Copper.
All sizes rated THWN-2; all stranded sizes rated MTW; sizes
14-6 AWG rated AWM (105C).
AWG sizes 14 through
1 rated VW-1 and larger sizes rated for CT use.
0L3
ES1 583
APPLtCATlONS
Senator Type THHN or THWN-2 conductors
are primarily used in conduit and
cable trays for services, feeders, and branch circuits in commercial or industrial
applications as specified in the National Electrical Code*. When used as Type
THHN, conductor
is suitable for use in dry locations at temperatures
not to
exceed 90C. When used as Type THWN-2, conductor is suitable for use in wet
or dry locations at temperatures
not to exceed 90C or not to exceed 75C when
exposed to oil or coolant. When used as Type MTW, conductor is suitable for
use in wet locations or when exposed to oil or coolant at temperatures
not to
exceed 60% or dry locations at temperatures
not to exceed 90C (with ampacity
limited to that for 75C conductor
temperature
per NFPA 79). Conductor
temperatures
not to exceed 105C in dry locations when rated AWM and used
as appliance wiring material. Voltage for all applications is 600 volts.
SPECIFICATIONS
Senator Type THHN or THWN-2 or MTW (also AWM) meets or exceeds all
applicable ASTM specifications,
UL standard 83, UL standard 1063 (MTW),
Federal Specification
J-C-SOB, and requirements
of the National Electrical
Code.
CONSTRUCTION
.-
Senator
WIRE & CABLE
Senator Type THHN or THWN-2 or MTW copper conductors are annealed (soft)
copper, insula?ed with a tough, heat and moisture resistant polyvinyl chloride
(PVC), over which a nylon (polyamide)
or UL-listed equal jacket is applied.
Available in black, white, red, blue, green, yellow, brown, orange, or grey. Some
colors standard, some subject to economic order quantity. Sizes 1-l 9 through
1 .OOO kcmil available in black only.
CO.
Oil and gasolme
2 1993 Edition.
resistance
II as oefined
by Underwriters
Laboratories.
l-1
..*L.
THHN
._..
.I
h
Nominal
O.D.
(mils)
4
3
2
1 0
20
3,o
40
75
19
:5
4,G
19
15
-9
15
A0
43
40
50
50
50
50
50
I Str.
102
119
150
109
128
161
212
250
7
7
7
Allowable
Ampacities+
Approx.
Net
Weight
Per
1000 (Ibs.)
Sol.
319
346
378
435
474
518
568
624
1993
60C
75C
90C
16
24
30
63
95
15
20
30
40
55
15
20
30
50
65
15
20
30
55
75
153
189
234
300
372
463
576
719
70
65
95
85
100
115
130
I 50
175
200
230
95
110
130
150
170
195
225
260
Standarc
Package
Sol.
15
23
37
110
125
145
165
195
B
B
B
SAMPLE
SPECIFICATIONS:
OR THWN-2)
Conductors
shdi
be UL-Listed Type MTW or THHN or THWN-2 gasoline and oil
resistant Il. suitable for operations at 600 volts as specified in the National Electrical
Code Conduc?ors shall be annealed copper, insulated with high-heat and moisture
resistant PVC. jacketed with abrasion. moisture. gasoline, and oil resistant nylon or
UL-listed equivzien?. as manufactured
by Senator Wire & Cable Company or
apprcved ecua;
(AWW
Conductors shaii be UL-Listed Type THHN or THWN-2 or MTW or AWM. suitable for
operation ai 6% volts at conductor temperatures
not to exceed 105C.
Senator
WIRE & CABLE CO.
P.O. Box 797
Carrollton, GA 30117
4041832-4776
=-~
B-Cap conBuchanan
offers a full line of live-spring
nectors for a wide variety of construction
and maintenance appircations.
Insulated
with a tough, durable
Nylon that offers superior
aging characteristics,
these
twist-on
connectors
feature a unique
fin shape for
easy gripping.
easy twisting.
Rated for 105%, they offer a wide throat design
for easier installation
on multiple wire Combinations
or larger wire sizes, as well as
a longer skirt for added insulating
protection.
DESIGNED TO MEET THE NEW, TOUGHER
UL STANDARD
486C, ALL B-CAP WIRE COMBINATIONS
ARE APPROVED
FOR 600 VOLTS (IOOOV FOR SIGNS AND
FIXTURES).
Available
in three color-coded
sizes to
cover a full range of wire combinations.
The red,
universal
B-2 continues
to offer the widest range of
approved
wire combinations.
The most versatile
wire
connector
in the industry.
the B-2, B-Cap covers from
two + 18s through
five # 12s. The small size of the
yellow B-7 makes it perfect for those tight spots. And
the blue-grey
B-4 is the heavyweight
that replaces
other blue and grey combinations.
Pius, the Green-B
connector
frcm Buchanan
is perfect for those grounding applica::ons.
Buchanan
has it all!
,
,
I
,y---.
T4=9es
Section
$;
H J
A
One tape for all jobs, 33 + is a premium-grade,
7-mil tape that applies
- 18WOF and has an operating range up to 105W22OF.
Tape
Flame-retardant,
hot-and cold-weather
resistant, 33 + matches ratings of most wire
and cable insulations. It resists ultraviolet rays,
abrasion, moisture, alkalies, acids and
corrosion. Use 33 + Tape as a primary
insulation for wire cable splices up to 600 volts
- and for fixture and wire splices up to 1000
volts. Use it also to maintain the electrical and
high-temperature
integrity of your electrical
systems. 33 + provides an excellent
abrasive-resistant jacket for high-voltage cable
splices and terminations.
Scotch
33
Tape
bell at
Size
?4 tn. x 66 ft.*
% in. x 44 ft.
% in. x 20 ft.
X&e :.
,. .I ..
:, rd;d-:,
Roll
Carton
.;,,can.,10
10ml.
Also available
in a dispenser.
Product
is 33 + D.
Other wdths and lengths available
upon request.
FOR PRICES.
SEE PRICE PAGE SECTION
A.
Other
widths
and lengths
available
upon
FOR PRICES,
SEE PRICE PAGE
NOTE: MIL-l-7798A
is a cancelled
request.
SECTION
spec.
A.
Scotch*
35
Tape
Tape
Packing
cable.
RotI Size
3: In. x 66 ft
2 in. x 20 ft.
Roll
l/Can
l/Cello
Carton
10
1o
Case
100 100.. :
Pack
upon request.
SECTION
A.
Roll
Size
$4 In x 66 ft.
.
un
x44fl
1 !h I x 44 It
4 In x 36 yds.
Other
widths
FOR PRICES,
Carton
l/Can
Case:- .
1.
100
l/Box
l/Box
and lengths
SEE PRICE
48
12
available
upon
request.
PAGE SECTION
A.
!zgP
Wall Plates
,syqdard
Thermoset
Color
Description
Toggle
Switch
Line
No-Line
Thermoplastic
1
Ribbed
One Gang
Pl-I
Pl-BK
P?-GRY
Pl -RED
Pl -w
Pl
,Pl-I
Black
Gray
Red
White
Brown
iPl-w
IPl
Dl
P2-I
P2-BK
P2-GRY
P2-RED
P2-w
P2
1P2-I
D2-I
Two Gang
Ivory
Black
Gray
Red
White
Brown
,P2-w
tP2
D2
P3-I
P3-BK
P3-GRY
P3-RED
P3-w
P3
iP3-I
D3-I
Three Gang
Ivory
Black
Gray
Red
White
Brown
LP3-w
IP3
D3
P4-I
iP4-I
D4-I
P4-GRY
iP4-GRY
-wr Gana
Ivory
Black
Gray
Red
White
Brown
Ivory
I
LIzI
.-.
)I
I I I II
P4-w
P4
Dl-I
IPl-GRY
IP~-GRY
Line
Metal
No-Line
-IRPl-I
RPl -BK
RPl-GRY
RPl -RED
RPl -W
RPl
SRPl-I
SRPl -GRY
SRPl-RF:?
SRPl -W
SRPl
RP2-I
RP2-BK
RP2-GRY
SRP2-I
SRP2-GRY
,P3-GRY
1P4-w
bP4
RP3-W
RP3
Material
Line
Alum.
Brass
43os/s
302%
Al
Alum.
Brass
4309s
302%
A2
Alum.
Brass
430%
3029s
A3
Alum.
Brass
4309s
30215/S
A4
sB1
Sl-N
No-Line
SL1
SL2
S2-N
SL3
S3-N
SL4
S4-N
D4
P5-I
P5-GRY
P.5w
P5
Brass
430%
302%
P6-I
P6-GRY
P6-W
P6
43OVS
3029s
S-N
Six Gona
I
1111111
lvorv
Gray
White
Brown
5601 -I
5601 -GRY
5601 -W
5601 -X
lvorv
5602-I
S602-GRY
5602-W
5602-X
Ivory
Black
Gray
Red
White
Brown
P8-I
P8-BK
P8-GRY
P8-RED
P8-W
P8
S601
Seven Gang
i
Duplex
Receptacle
; Gang
430
Stainless
SP8-I
D8-I
SP8-GRY
SP8-W
SP8
D8
-_.-
RPB-I
RP8-BK
RP8-GRY
RP&RED
RP8-W
RP8
SRP&I
SRP8-GRY
SRP8-RED
SRP8-W
SRP8
Alum.
Brass
4309s
3029s
Steel Painted
Complionces
Q-4
Wall Plates
Standard
Thermoset
Color
Description
Sierradex@/GFCI
Five Gana
Black
Gray
Red
1White
1Brown
Ivory
Six Gang
Blank Plate Box Mounted
No-Line
Thermoplastic
1
Ribbed
Line
Metal
No-Line
Material
Line
No-Line
Ole Gong
Line
1Whi!e
Brown
gory
ilack
;rav
ied
white
\rown
P265-I
P265-BK
P265GRY
P265-RED
P265-W
P265
--
P266-I
P266-BK
P266-GRY
P266-RED
P265-W
P266
AG&-pJr--
302%
S265-N
302%
S266-N
Alum.
Brass
43WS
302515
Al3
813
$13
S13-N
Alum.
Brass
A23
B23
43OSE
302X
s23
S23-N
!I
..A
P13-w
PI3
SP13-w
SP13
vary
Gray
white
srown
P23-I
P23-GRY
P23-W
P23
SP23-I
SP23-GRY
SP23-W
SP23
vary
hy
white
bown
P33-I
P33-GRY
P33-w
P33
4309s
302%
s33
S33-N
vory
;ray
Nhite
P43-I
P43-GRY
P43-w
3029s
S43-N
3029s
S53-N
3029s
S63-N
D13
Gang
-II
Three Gona
3iOWr?
Four Gang
Five Gang
Six Gang
S6013
Complionces
Q-6
Protective
m
I1 h
Covers
wiring devices
need
_.
3962
Features
Ordering
r4
for
- .=253
__.. ~- -
1954
4=/,6 x @j,E
1923
4% x 26 & x 1sj61933
4:$, Dia. x I?,,.
2962
425& x 26-+
x 8*
3962
ZE,& x 43/; x h
2983
26,.6L x4i/;
x 19 .6
-IncludlngGasket
lncl~dmg
Gas&: and Handle
Metal
p;--w
-I
!
for comblnatlon
-I--_-~-.I1
Oversize
Wet Locations
Snap
Covers
Vertical
Wet Locations
Snap
Cover
Horizontal
Wet Locations
Snap
Cover
Vertical
Wet Locations
Snap
Cover
Stay
Open
Cover
Stay
Open
Covers
Device
, Duplex
Receptacle
i Duplex
Receptacle
/
I
1 Duplex
Receptacle
s1951
I
/
S1952
1954.eox
S3962
/
l., $2946
---
DecoratoriGFCI
Cover
I___-?
! S3966
I
i Single
I
I
/
I
Duplex
Device
Receptacle
Cluster
Cover
Round
Lempholder
Cluster
Cover
Cover
! Toggle
Gray
Cover
Single
Snap
Covers
Duplex
i
LJ:
Long
Island
City.
Horizontal
S1961
S1962
s1933
Switch
1987~BOX
Device
s992
Receptacle
Cover
5989
966~sax
Snap
Covers
1966~BOX
UL
deuces.
-...
NY 11101
Wet Locations
.._
s1923
1 Blank
Snap
Snap
Catalog
Numbers
S2962
Vertical
Lampholder
1 Gang
Decorator/GFCI
Not
Inc.
Covers
Vertical
--_-_
Co.,
Snap
Snap
Single
Cover
Wet Locations
Gray Protective
Can Be Padlocked
Dimensions
Mfg.
Gray
Snap
Horizontal
Wet Locations
Covers
For Device
Electric
1 Gang
Locations
Wet
Grade Protective
Description
Plastic
Eagle
Specification
Style
Information
Standards
do not apply